COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WITH
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST

HP REGULATING VALVE

Part Number
6713D010000 6713D060000
6713D020000 6713D060000 Amdt A
6713D040000 6713D070000
6713D040000 Amdt A 6713D070000 Amdt A
6713D050000
6713D050000 Amdt A

LIEBHERR-AEROSPACE TOULOUSE SAS

(F1958)
408, Avenue des Etats-Unis - B.P.52010
31016 TOULOUSE CEDEX - FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0)5.61.35.28.28
Fax: +33 (0)5.61.35.29.29
[email protected]

TP1

Initial Issue: Nov 30/87 36-11-51 Revision No. 09

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Copyright © 2008 Liebherr-Aerospace Toulouse SAS

This document is given in confidence and may not be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Liebherr-Aerospace Toulouse SAS.

Unless Liebherr-Aerospace Toulouse SAS (the company) has accepted a contractual obligation in respect
of the information and data contained herein, such information and data is provided without responsibility
and the company disclaim all liability arising from its use.

TP2

Initial Issue: Nov 30/87 36-11-51 Revision No. 09

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIEBHERR-AEROSPACE TOULOUSE SAS

(F1958)
408, Avenue des Etats-Unis - B.P.52010
31016 TOULOUSE CEDEX - FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0)5.61.35.28.28
Fax: +33 (0)5.61.35.29.29
[email protected]

TRANSMITTAL LETTER

TO HOLDERS OF COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR HP REGULATING VALVE ATA 36-11-51.

The revision No. 09 dated May 01/08 is attached and covers all components held by every operator.

FILING INSTRUCTIONS:

– THIS IS A COMPLETELY REISSUED CMM:

• Remove and destroy the previous CMM

• File the new complete reissue CMM.

– Affected pages are listed on the “LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES”.

– File the REVISION TRANSMITTAL LETTER separately.

TL

36-11-51 Page 1
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

TL

36-11-51 Page 2
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

HIGHLIGHTS

Revision No.09 - May 01/08

Pages which have been added, revised or deleted are outlined below together with the Highlights of the
Revision.

LOCATIONS DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE

TITLE PAGE R

SERVICE BULLETIN R

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES R

INTRODUCTION R Complete re-issue

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION R Complete re-issue

TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION R Complete re-issue

DISASSEMBLY R Complete re-issue

CLEANING R Complete re-issue

INSPECTION/CHECK R Complete re-issue

REPAIR R Complete re-issue

ASSEMBLY R Complete re-issue

FITS AND CLEARANCES R Complete re-issue

SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, R Complete re-issue

EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES

STORAGE (INCLUDING R Complete re-issue

TRANSPORTATION)

APPENDIX A R Complete re-issue

ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST R Complete re-issue

HLTS

36-11-51 Page 1
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

HLTS

36-11-51 Page 2
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

RECORD OF REVISIONS

INSERTED INSERTED
REV. ISSUE REV. ISSUE
No. DATE DATE BY No. DATE DATE BY

ROR

36-11-51 Page 1
Nov 30/87
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

ROR

36-11-51 Page 2
Nov 30/87
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

INSERTED REMOVED
TEMP REV. ISSUE PAGE No.
No. DATE DATE BY DATE BY

RTR

36-11-51 Page 1
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

RTR

36-11-51 Page 2
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SERVICE BULLETIN

SERVICE BULLETIN INCORPORATION INTO CMM TITLE

Number Rev Date Rev

6713-36-01 0 Nov 30/89 1 SEALING RING ASSEMBLY

IMPROVEMENT

6713B-36-02 0 Jul 25/90 2 SERVO CONTROL IMPROVEMENT

6713-36-03 0 Jan 31/91 3 NEW OPERATING PRINCIPLE,

FILTER AND UNION
IMPROVEMENTS

6713-36-04 3 Feb 01/93 4 WEAR RESISTANCE

IMPROVEMENT

6713-36-06 3 Nov 30/96 6 RELIABILITY IMPROVEMENT

6713-36-07 0 Nov 30/96 6 BALL BEARING IMPROVEMENT

6713-36-08 0 Dec 01/98 7 RETURN TO PREVIOUS

OVERPRESSURE VALVE S/A
DEFINITION

6713-36-09 1 Dec 01/98 7 INTRODUCTION OF A NEW

OVERPRESSURE VALVE S/A

6713-36-10 2 Mar 01/01 8 INTRODUCTION OF A NEW

MICROSWITCH AND THERMAL
INSULATION

SBL

36-11-51 Page 1
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

SBL

36-11-51 Page 2
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE

TITLE PAGE 4 R May 01/08

1 R May 01/08 5 R May 01/08
2 R May 01/08 6 R May 01/08
7 R May 01/08
RECORD OF REVISIONS 8 R May 01/08
1 Nov 30/87 9 R May 01/08
2 Blank Nov 30/87 10 R May 01/08

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1 May 01/08 1 R May 01/08
2 Blank May 01/08 2 R May 01/08
3 R May 01/08
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST 4 R May 01/08
1 R May 01/08 5 R May 01/08
2 Blank May 01/08 6 R May 01/08
7 R May 01/08
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 8 R May 01/08
1 R May 01/08 9 R May 01/08
2 R May 01/08 10 R May 01/08
3 R May 01/08 11 R May 01/08
4 R May 01/08 12 R May 01/08
5 R May 01/08 13 R May 01/08
6 R May 01/08 14 R May 01/08
15 R May 01/08
TABLE OF CONTENTS 16 R May 01/08
1 R May 01/08 17 R May 01/08
2 R May 01/08 18 R May 01/08
3 R May 01/08 19 R May 01/08
4 R May 01/08 20 R May 01/08
5 R May 01/08 21 R May 01/08
6 R May 01/08 22 R May 01/08
7 R May 01/08 23 R May 01/08
8 R May 01/08 24 R May 01/08
9 R May 01/08 25 R May 01/08
10 R May 01/08 26 R May 01/08
11 R May 01/08 27 R May 01/08
12 R May 01/08 28 R May 01/08
29 R May 01/08
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 30 R May 01/08
1 R May 01/08 31 R May 01/08
2 R May 01/08 32 R May 01/08
3 R May 01/08
4 R May 01/08 TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION
1001 R May 01/08
INTRODUCTION 1002 R May 01/08
1 R May 01/08 1003 R May 01/08
2 R May 01/08 1004 R May 01/08
3 R May 01/08 1005 R May 01/08

LEP

36-11-51 Page 1
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)

SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE

1006 R May 01/08 1054 R May 01/08

1007 R May 01/08 1055 R May 01/08
1008 R May 01/08 1056 R May 01/08
1009 R May 01/08 1057 R May 01/08
1010 R May 01/08 1058 R May 01/08
1011 R May 01/08 1059 R May 01/08
1012 R May 01/08 1060 R May 01/08
1013 R May 01/08
1014 R May 01/08 DISASSEMBLY
1015 R May 01/08 3001 R May 01/08
1016 R May 01/08 3002 R May 01/08
1017 R May 01/08 3003 R May 01/08
1018 R May 01/08 3004 R May 01/08
1019 R May 01/08 3005 R May 01/08
1020 R May 01/08 3006 R May 01/08
1021 R May 01/08 3007 R May 01/08
1022 R May 01/08 3008 R May 01/08
1023 R May 01/08 3009 R May 01/08
1024 R May 01/08 3010 R May 01/08
1025 R May 01/08 3011 R May 01/08
1026 R May 01/08 3012 R May 01/08
1027 R May 01/08 3013 R May 01/08
1028 R May 01/08 3014 R May 01/08
1029 R May 01/08 3015 R May 01/08
1030 R May 01/08 3016 R May 01/08
1031 R May 01/08 3017 R May 01/08
1032 R May 01/08 3018 R May 01/08
1033 R May 01/08 3019 R May 01/08
1034 R May 01/08 3020 R May 01/08
1035 R May 01/08 3021 R May 01/08
1036 R May 01/08 3022 R May 01/08
1037 R May 01/08 3023 R May 01/08
1038 R May 01/08 3024 R May 01/08
1039 R May 01/08 3025 R May 01/08
1040 R May 01/08 3026 Blank May 01/08
1041 R May 01/08
1042 R May 01/08 CLEANING
1043 R May 01/08 4001 R May 01/08
1044 R May 01/08 4002 R May 01/08
1045 R May 01/08 4003 R May 01/08
1046 R May 01/08 4004 R May 01/08
1047 R May 01/08 4005 R May 01/08
1048 R May 01/08 4006 R May 01/08
1049 R May 01/08 4007 R May 01/08
1050 R May 01/08 4008 R May 01/08
1051 R May 01/08 4009 R May 01/08
1052 R May 01/08 4010 R May 01/08
1053 R May 01/08 4011 R May 01/08

LEP

36-11-51 Page 2
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)

SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE

4012 R May 01/08 6016 R May 01/08

4013 R May 01/08 6017 R May 01/08
4014 R May 01/08 6018 R May 01/08
4015 R May 01/08 6019 R May 01/08
4016 R May 01/08 6020 R May 01/08
4017 R May 01/08 6021 R May 01/08
4018 Blank May 01/08 6022 R May 01/08
6023 R May 01/08
INSPECTION/CHECK 6024 R May 01/08
5001 R May 01/08 6025 R May 01/08
5002 R May 01/08 6026 R May 01/08
5003 R May 01/08 6027 R May 01/08
5004 R May 01/08 6028 R May 01/08
5005 R May 01/08 6029 R May 01/08
5006 R May 01/08 6030 R May 01/08
5007 R May 01/08 6031 R May 01/08
5008 R May 01/08 6032 R May 01/08
5009 R May 01/08 6033 R May 01/08
5010 R May 01/08 6034 R May 01/08
5011 R May 01/08
5012 R May 01/08 ASSEMBLY
5013 R May 01/08 7001 R May 01/08
5014 R May 01/08 7002 R May 01/08
5015 R May 01/08 7003 R May 01/08
5016 R May 01/08 7004 R May 01/08
5017 R May 01/08 7005 R May 01/08
5018 R May 01/08 7006 R May 01/08
5019 R May 01/08 7007 R May 01/08
5020 R May 01/08 7008 R May 01/08
5021 R May 01/08 7009 R May 01/08
5022 R May 01/08 7010 R May 01/08
7011 R May 01/08
REPAIR 7012 R May 01/08
6001 R May 01/08 7013 R May 01/08
6002 R May 01/08 7014 R May 01/08
6003 R May 01/08 7015 R May 01/08
6004 R May 01/08 7016 R May 01/08
6005 R May 01/08 7017 R May 01/08
6006 R May 01/08 7018 R May 01/08
6007 R May 01/08 7019 R May 01/08
6008 R May 01/08 7020 R May 01/08
6009 R May 01/08 7021 R May 01/08
6010 R May 01/08 7022 R May 01/08
6011 R May 01/08 7023 R May 01/08
6012 R May 01/08 7024 R May 01/08
6013 R May 01/08 7025 R May 01/08
6014 R May 01/08 7026 R May 01/08
6015 R May 01/08 7027 R May 01/08

LEP

36-11-51 Page 3
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)

SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE

7028 R May 01/08 7076 R May 01/08

7029 R May 01/08 7077 R May 01/08
7030 R May 01/08 7078 R May 01/08
7031 R May 01/08 7079 R May 01/08
7032 R May 01/08 7080 R May 01/08
7033 R May 01/08 7081 R May 01/08
7034 R May 01/08 7082 Blank May 01/08
7035 R May 01/08
7036 R May 01/08 FITS AND CLEARANCES
7037 R May 01/08 8001 R May 01/08
7038 R May 01/08 8002 R May 01/08
7039 R May 01/08 8003 R May 01/08
7040 R May 01/08 8004 R May 01/08
7041 R May 01/08 8005 R May 01/08
7042 R May 01/08 8006 R May 01/08
7043 R May 01/08
7044 R May 01/08 SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND
7045 R May 01/08 CONSUMABLES
7046 R May 01/08 9001 R May 01/08
7047 R May 01/08 9002 R May 01/08
7048 R May 01/08 9003 R May 01/08
7049 R May 01/08 9004 R May 01/08
7050 R May 01/08 9005 R May 01/08
7051 R May 01/08 9006 R May 01/08
7052 R May 01/08 9007 R May 01/08
7053 R May 01/08 9008 R May 01/08
7054 R May 01/08 9009 R May 01/08
7055 R May 01/08 9010 R May 01/08
7056 R May 01/08 9011 R May 01/08
7057 R May 01/08 9012 R May 01/08
7058 R May 01/08 9013 R May 01/08
7059 R May 01/08 9014 R May 01/08
7060 R May 01/08 9015 R May 01/08
7061 R May 01/08 9016 R May 01/08
7062 R May 01/08 9017 R May 01/08
7063 R May 01/08 9018 R May 01/08
7064 R May 01/08 9019 R May 01/08
7065 R May 01/08 9020 R May 01/08
7066 R May 01/08 9021 R May 01/08
7067 R May 01/08 9022 Blank May 01/08
7068 R May 01/08
7069 R May 01/08 STORAGE (INCLUDING TRANSPORTATION)
7070 R May 01/08 15001 R May 01/08
7071 R May 01/08 15002 R May 01/08
7072 R May 01/08
7073 R May 01/08 APPENDIX A
7074 R May 01/08 A-1 R May 01/08
7075 R May 01/08 A-2 Blank May 01/08

LEP

36-11-51 Page 4
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)

SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE

ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST 10040 R May 01/08

10001 R May 01/08 10041 R May 01/08
10002 Blank May 01/08 10042 R May 01/08
10043 R May 01/08
INTRO IPL 10044 R May 01/08
10003 R May 01/08 10045 R May 01/08
10004 R May 01/08 10046 R May 01/08
10005 R May 01/08 10047 Blank May 01/08
10006 R May 01/08 10048 R May 01/08
10007 R May 01/08 10049 R May 01/08
10008 R May 01/08 10050 R May 01/08
10009 R May 01/08 10051 R May 01/08
10010 Blank May 01/08 10052 R May 01/08
10053 R May 01/08
ALPHA/NUMERIC INDEX 10054 R May 01/08
10011 R May 01/08 10055 R May 01/08
10012 R May 01/08 10056 R May 01/08
10013 R May 01/08 10057 R May 01/08
10014 R May 01/08 10058 R May 01/08
10015 R May 01/08 10059 R May 01/08
10016 R May 01/08 10060 R May 01/08
10017 R May 01/08 10061 R May 01/08
10018 R May 01/08 10062 R May 01/08
10019 R May 01/08 10063 R May 01/08
10020 R May 01/08 10064 R May 01/08
10021 R May 01/08 10065 R May 01/08
10022 R May 01/08 10066 R May 01/08
10023 R May 01/08 10067 R May 01/08
10024 R May 01/08 10068 R May 01/08
10025 R May 01/08 10069 R May 01/08
10026 R May 01/08 10070 R May 01/08
10027 R May 01/08 10071 R May 01/08
10028 R May 01/08 10072 R May 01/08
10029 R May 01/08 10073 R May 01/08
10030 R May 01/08 10074 R May 01/08
10031 R May 01/08 10075 R May 01/08
10032 R May 01/08 10076 R May 01/08
10033 R May 01/08 10077 R May 01/08
10034 Blank May 01/08 10078 R May 01/08
10079 R May 01/08
OPTIONAL VENDOR INDEX 10080 R May 01/08
10035 R May 01/08 10081 Blank May 01/08
10036 R May 01/08 10082 R May 01/08
10037 R May 01/08 10083 R May 01/08
10038 Blank May 01/08 10084 R May 01/08
10085 R May 01/08
DETAILED PARTS LIST 10086 R May 01/08
10039 R May 01/08 10087 R May 01/08

LEP

36-11-51 Page 5
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)

SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE

10088 R May 01/08

LEP

36-11-51 Page 6
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. INTRO 1

1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... INTRO 1
A. General .............................................................................................................................. INTRO 1
B. How to Use the Manual ...................................................................................................... INTRO 1
C. Related Publications .......................................................................................................... INTRO 2
D. CMM Page Blocks .............................................................................................................. INTRO 2
E. Measurements ................................................................................................................... INTRO 5
F. Units of Measure ................................................................................................................ INTRO 6
G. Measurement Conversion Table ......................................................................................... INTRO 7
H. Temperature Conversion Table .......................................................................................... INTRO 9
I. Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................... INTRO 9
J. Geometric Tolerance Symbols ........................................................................................... INTRO 10
K. Verifications ........................................................................................................................ INTRO 10

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION .................................................................................................. 1

1. Description ................................................................................................................................ 1
A. General .............................................................................................................................. 1
B. Technical Data ................................................................................................................... 3
C. Detailed Description ........................................................................................................... 8
2. Operation .................................................................................................................................. 26

TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION .................................................................................................. 1001

1. Failure Confirmation Tests ......................................................................................................... 1001
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 1001
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 1001
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 1008
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 1008
(1) Opening Test and Regulation Test .............................................................................. 1008
(2) Opening Test and Regulation Test .............................................................................. 1010
(3) Opening/Closing Operation of the Valve ..................................................................... 1010
(4) Opening/Closing Operation of the Valve ..................................................................... 1011
(5) Pressure Regulation Function Test of the Valve ......................................................... 1013
(6) Pressure Regulation Function Test of the Valve ......................................................... 1013
(7) Overpressure Function Test of the Valve .................................................................... 1013
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 1013
2. Fault Isolation of Complete Unit ................................................................................................ 1015
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 1015
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 1015
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 1016
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 1017
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 1021
3. Dynamic Test Procedure of Complete Unit ............................................................................... 1022
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 1022
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 1022
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 1022
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 1023
(1) Visual Check ............................................................................................................... 1023
(2) Insulation Resistance Test (010) ................................................................................. 1023
(3) Continuity Test (010) ................................................................................................... 1023

TOC

36-11-51 Page 1
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

(4) Position Indication Test (020) ...................................................................................... 1023

(5) Opening - Closing Test (070) ...................................................................................... 1027
(6) Opening - Closing Test (070) ...................................................................................... 1027
(7) Regulation test (040) .................................................................................................. 1030
(8) Regulation Test (040) .................................................................................................. 1030
(9) Pressure Control Test (050) ........................................................................................ 1030
(10) Closure with no Pressure (053) .................................................................................. 1031
(11) Operation through the Ground Test Union (055) ......................................................... 1031
(12) Operation through the Ground Test Union (055) ......................................................... 1031
(13) Locking in the Closed Position (057) ........................................................................... 1033
(14) Overpressure Test (060) ............................................................................................. 1033
(15) Overpressure Test (060) ............................................................................................. 1033
(16) Min-Opening Pressure Test (065) ............................................................................... 1036
(17) Min-Opening Pressure Test (065) ............................................................................... 1036
(18) Internal Leakage Test (080) ........................................................................................ 1036
(19) External Leakage Test (090) ....................................................................................... 1036
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 1036
4. Static Test Procedure of Complete Unit .................................................................................... 1038
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 1038
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 1038
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 1039
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 1039
(1) Visual Check ............................................................................................................... 1039
(2) Insulation Resistance Test (010) ................................................................................. 1039
(3) Continuity Test ............................................................................................................ 1039
(4) Position Indication Test (020) ...................................................................................... 1040
(5) Opening - Closing Test of the Valve (070) .................................................................. 1040
(6) Opening - Closing Test of the Valve (070) .................................................................. 1041
(7) Regulation Test of the Valve (040) .............................................................................. 1041
(8) Regulation Test of the Valve (040) .............................................................................. 1042
(9) Pressure Control Test (050) ........................................................................................ 1042
(10) Closure with no Pressure (053) .................................................................................. 1044
(11) Operation through the Ground Test Union (055) ......................................................... 1044
(12) Operation through the Ground Test Union (055) ......................................................... 1044
(13) Locking in the Closed Position (057) ........................................................................... 1044
(14) Overpressure Test (060) ............................................................................................. 1045
(15) Overpressure Test (060) ............................................................................................. 1045
(16) Min-Opening Pressure Test (065) ............................................................................... 1046
(17) Min-Opening Pressure Test (065) ............................................................................... 1046
(18) Internal Leakage Test (080) ........................................................................................ 1046
(19) External Leakage Test (090) ....................................................................................... 1046
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 1046
5. Laboratory Test Procedure of the Regulator S/A Alone ............................................................ 1047
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 1047
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 1047
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 1047
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 1047
(1) Alignment of the Valve Seat (02A-600) with the Clapper (02A-540) ........................... 1047
(2) Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Opening Position (010B) ........................ 1048

TOC

36-11-51 Page 2
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

(3) Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Closing Position (020B) .......................... 1051
(4) Tightness test of the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) (030B) ............................................. 1051
(5) Opening Test of the Clapper (02A-220) (040B) .......................................................... 1054
(6) Regulated Pressure Test (050B) ................................................................................. 1056
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 1056
6. Fault Isolation of the Regulator S/A Alone ................................................................................ 1058
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 1058
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 1058
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 1058
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 1059
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 1060

SCHEMATIC AND WIRING DIAGRAMS ......................................................................... NOT APPLICABLE

DISASSEMBLY ................................................................................................................................. 3001

1. Removal of the Pneumatic Connections ................................................................................... 3001
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 3001
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 3001
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3001
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 3001
(1) Removal of the Pneumatic Connections ..................................................................... 3001
(2) Removal of the Pneumatic Connections ..................................................................... 3002
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 3002
2. Removal of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) and Trailing Edge Probe (01-228) .............. 3003
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 3003
B. Job Set-up information ....................................................................................................... 3003
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3003
(1) Preliminary Operations ............................................................................................... 3003
(2) Preliminary Operations ............................................................................................... 3003
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 3004
(1) Removal of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) and Trailing Edge Probe (01-228) 3004
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 3004
3. Disassembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) .............................................................. 3005
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 3005
B. Job Set-up information ....................................................................................................... 3005
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3005
(1) Preliminary Operations ............................................................................................... 3005
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 3005
(1) Disassembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) ................................................ 3006
(2) Disassembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) ................................................ 3006
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 3006
4. Removal of the Regulator S/A (01-230) .................................................................................... 3007
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 3007
B. Job Set-up information ....................................................................................................... 3007
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3007
(1) Preliminary Operations ............................................................................................... 3007
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 3007
(1) Removal of the Regulator S/A (01-230) ...................................................................... 3007
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 3007

TOC

36-11-51 Page 3
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

5. Disassembly of the Regulator S/A (01-230) .............................................................................. 3008

A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 3008
B. Job Set-up information ....................................................................................................... 3008
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3008
(1) Preliminary Operations ............................................................................................... 3008
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 3008
(1) Regulation S/A ............................................................................................................ 3008
(2) Regulation S/A ............................................................................................................ 3009
(3) Distribution S/A ........................................................................................................... 3009
(4) Closing S/A ................................................................................................................. 3010
(5) Closing S/A ................................................................................................................. 3010
(6) Final Disassembly of the Regulator S/A (02A-001D) .................................................. 3011
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 3011
6. Disassembly of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A (01-330) .............................................................. 3012
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 3012
B. Job Set-up information ....................................................................................................... 3012
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3012
(1) Preliminary Operations ............................................................................................... 3012
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 3012
(1) Disassembly of the Cover S/A (03-010) ...................................................................... 3012
(2) Disassembly of the Electrical Connector (03-420) ...................................................... 3013
(3) Disassembly of the Electrical Connector (03-420) ...................................................... 3013
(4) Disassembly of the Microswitches (03-490) ............................................................... 3014
(5) Disassembly of the Microswitches (03-490) ............................................................... 3014
(6) Removal of the Casing S/A (03-560) .......................................................................... 3014
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 3014
7. Disassembly of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A (01-330) .............................................................. 3015
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 3015
B. Job Set-up information ....................................................................................................... 3015
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3015
(1) Preliminary Operations ............................................................................................... 3015
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 3015
(1) Disassembly of the Cover S/A (03-010) ...................................................................... 3015
(2) Disassembly of the Electrical Connector (03-420) ...................................................... 3016
(3) Disassembly of the Microswitches (03A-490F) ........................................................... 3016
(4) Removal of the Casing S/A (03-560) .......................................................................... 3016
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 3017
8. Disassembly of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A ............................................................................. 3018
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 3018
B. Job Set-up information ....................................................................................................... 3018
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3018
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 3018
(1) Disassembly of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A .............................................................. 3018
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 3019
9. Disassembly of the Butterfly Valve (03-250) ............................................................................. 3020
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 3020
B. Job Set-up information ....................................................................................................... 3020
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 3020
(1) Preliminary Operations ............................................................................................... 3020

TOC

36-11-51 Page 4
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 3020

(1) Disassembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250) ........................................................ 3020
(2) Disassembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250) ........................................................ 3021
(3) Disassembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250E) ...................................................... 3023
(4) Disassembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080) .................................................................. 3024
(5) Disassembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080) .................................................................. 3024
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 3025

CLEANING ....................................................................................................................................... 4001

1. External Cleaning of a Unit ....................................................................................................... 4001
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 4001
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 4001
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 4001
(1) Preparation of the Unit ................................................................................................ 4001
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4001
(1) External Cleaning of the Unit ...................................................................................... 4001
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 4001
2. Cleaning of a Sub-Assembly ..................................................................................................... 4002
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 4002
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 4002
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 4002
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4002
(1) Cleaning of the Sub-Assembly .................................................................................... 4002
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 4002
3. Cleaning of Component Parts ................................................................................................... 4003
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 4003
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 4003
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 4003
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4003
(1) Cleaning of the Component Parts ............................................................................... 4003
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 4003
4. Cleaning Procedure .................................................................................................................. 4004
A. Cleaning Procedure Table .................................................................................................. 4004
5. Procedure 1: Heavy Alkaline Cleaning ..................................................................................... 4005
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 4005
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 4005
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 4005
(1) Material Preparation ................................................................................................... 4005
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4006
(1) Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 4006
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 4006
6. Procedure 2: Cleaning with Solvents by the Dipping or the Spraying Procedure ..................... 4007
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 4007
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 4007
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 4007
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4007
(1) Cleaning with Solvents ................................................................................................ 4007
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 4008
7. Procedure 3: Light Alkaline Cleaning ........................................................................................ 4009

TOC

36-11-51 Page 5
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 4009

B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 4009
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 4009
(1) Preparation ................................................................................................................. 4009
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4010
(1) Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 4010
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 4010
8. Procedure 4: Cleaning of Parts with an Alcohol-Based Cleaning Agent ................................... 4011
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 4011
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 4011
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 4011
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4011
(1) Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 4011
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 4011
9. Cleaning of the Filter (01-050A) ................................................................................................ 4012
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 4012
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 4012
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 4013
(1) Preliminary Cleaning ................................................................................................... 4013
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4013
(1) Simplified cleaning method "A" ................................................................................... 4013
(2) Complete Cleaning Method "B" .................................................................................. 4014
(3) Filters Load Loss Test ................................................................................................. 4015
(4) Cleaned Filter Identification ........................................................................................ 4015
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 4016

INSPECTION/CHECK ...................................................................................................................... 5001

1. Checking Procedure .................................................................................................................. 5001
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 5001
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 5001
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 5002
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 5002
(1) Visual Inspection of the Parts ..................................................................................... 5002
(2) Dimension Checks ...................................................................................................... 5002
(3) Special Checks ........................................................................................................... 5002
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 5018

REPAIR ............................................................................................................................................ 6001

1. REPAIR No. 1: Corrosion Protection ........................................................................................ 6001
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6001
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6001
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6001
(1) Removal of the Corrosion .......................................................................................... 6001
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6001
(1) Preparation of the Solution for Alochrome Treatment ................................................. 6001
(2) Alochrome Treatment .................................................................................................. 6002
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6002
2. REPAIR No. 2: Electrical Bonding ............................................................................................ 6003
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6003

TOC

36-11-51 Page 6
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6003

C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6003
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6003
(1) Electrical Bonding ....................................................................................................... 6003
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6004
3. REPAIR No. 3: Replacement of the Hard-Chrome Plating in the Valve Body (04-340) ............ 6006
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6006
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6006
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6006
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6006
(1) Check .......................................................................................................................... 6006
(2) Rework of One Flange Face of the Valve Body (04-340) ............................................ 6006
(3) Removal of the Existing Hard-Chrome Plating ........................................................... 6007
(4) Hard-Chrome Plating of the Valve Body (04-340) ....................................................... 6007
(5) Grinding of the Hard-Chrome Plating ......................................................................... 6007
(6) Reworking of the Valve Body (04-340) Bore ............................................................... 6009
(7) Final Check after Reworking ....................................................................................... 6009
(8) Marking ....................................................................................................................... 6009
(9) Passivation .................................................................................................................. 6009
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6010
4. REPAIR No. 4: Chamfering on the two Sides of the Washers (04-260B), (04-280) and
(04-320B) .................................................................................................................................. 6011
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6011
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6011
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6011
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6011
(1) Check .......................................................................................................................... 6011
(2) Characteristics of the Old Washers ............................................................................ 6011
(3) Chamfering ................................................................................................................. 6011
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6011
5. REPAIR No. 5: Repair of the Valve Body (05-090A) and (05-090B) ......................................... 6013
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6013
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6013
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6013
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6013
(1) Check .......................................................................................................................... 6013
(2) Repair ......................................................................................................................... 6013
(3) Test ............................................................................................................................. 6014
(4) Marking ....................................................................................................................... 6014
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6014
6. REPAIR No. 6: Repair of the Microswitch S/A (03-490A) and (03-490B) ................................. 6016
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6016
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6016
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6016
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6016
(1) Replacement of the Lever (03-527) ............................................................................ 6016
(2) Assembly .................................................................................................................... 6017
(3) Extension of the Electrical Wires Length .................................................................... 6018
(4) Marking ....................................................................................................................... 6018

TOC

36-11-51 Page 7
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6018

7. REPAIR No. 7: Repair of the Clevis (03-160) and the Adjusting Rod (03-180) ........................ 6021
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6021
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6021
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6021
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6021
(1) Repair of the Clevis (03-160) ...................................................................................... 6021
(2) Repair of the Adjusting Rod (03-180) ......................................................................... 6021
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6021
8. REPAIR No. 8: Repair of Level (03-320) and the Rod S/A (03-310) ......................................... 6023
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6023
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6023
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6023
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6023
(1) Repair of the Level (03-320) ....................................................................................... 6023
(2) Repair of Rod S/A (03-310) ........................................................................................ 6023
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6023
9. REPAIR No. 9: Repair of the Shaft (04-070B) .......................................................................... 6025
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6025
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6025
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6025
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6025
(1) Check .......................................................................................................................... 6025
(2) Removal of Wear Traces on the "A" and "B" Diameters of the Shaft (04-070B) ......... 6025
(3) Removal of Wear Traces on the "C" Diameter of the Shaft (04-070B) ........................ 6026
(4) Marking ....................................................................................................................... 6026
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6026
10. REPAIR No. 10: Repair of Wear, Impact Damage on the Pneumatic Actuator Body S/A
(03-241A) .................................................................................................................................. 6028
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6028
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6028
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6028
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6028
(1) Check .......................................................................................................................... 6028
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6028
11. REPAIR No. 11: Repair of the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610) ................................................. 6029
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6029
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6029
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6029
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6029
(1) Rework of "A" Damaged Threads ............................................................................... 6029
(2) Rework of "B" Damaged Threads ............................................................................... 6029
(3) Rework by a Locking Nut ............................................................................................ 6030
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6030
12. REPAIR No. 12: Repair of the Level of the Microswitch S/A (03-490C) ................................... 6032
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 6032
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 6032
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 6032
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6032

TOC

36-11-51 Page 8
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

(1) Check .......................................................................................................................... 6032

(2) Repair ......................................................................................................................... 6032
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 6033

ASSEMBLY ....................................................................................................................................... 7001

1. Assembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080) ..................................................................................... 7001
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 7001
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 7001
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 7002
(1) Preliminary Operations ............................................................................................... 7002
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7002
(1) Assembly of the Sealing Ring to the Butterfly S/A (04-080) ....................................... 7002
(2) Assembly of the Sealing Ring to the Butterfly S/A (04-080) ....................................... 7002
(3) Final Assembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080) .............................................................. 7003
(4) Final Assembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080) .............................................................. 7003
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 7003
2. Assembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250) ........................................................................... 7005
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 7005
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 7005
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 7006
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7006
(1) Assembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250) ............................................................. 7006
(2) Assembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250) ............................................................. 7013
(3) Internal Leakage Test ................................................................................................. 7019
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 7019
3. Preparation of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A (01-330) ................................................................ 7023
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 7023
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 7023
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 7023
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7023
(1) Assembly of the Piston S/A (03-220) .......................................................................... 7023
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 7024
4. Assembly of the Pneumatic Actuator with the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250) .............................. 7026
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 7026
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 7026
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 7027
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7028
(1) Third Bearing Alignment ............................................................................................. 7028
(2) Assembly of the Equipped Casing S/A (03-560) ......................................................... 7031
(3) Assembly of the Equipped Casing S/A (03-560) ......................................................... 7036
(4) Assembly of the Equipped Casing S/A (03-560) ......................................................... 7037
(5) Installation of the Piston S/A ....................................................................................... 7038
(6) Adjustment of the Butterfly Closing Position ............................................................... 7042
(7) Adjustment of the Microswitches (03-490) - Test set-up preparation .......................... 7046
(8) Adjustment of the Microswitches (03-490) - Test set-up preparation .......................... 7046
(9) Adjustment of the Closing Microswitch ....................................................................... 7050
(10) Adjustment of the Opening Microswitch ...................................................................... 7050
(11) High Temperature Test ................................................................................................ 7051
(12) Position Indication Test ............................................................................................... 7051

TOC

36-11-51 Page 9
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

(13) Position Indication Test ............................................................................................... 7051

(14) Check of the Opening Pressure .................................................................................. 7052
(15) Test of the Pneumatic Actuator Internal Leakage ....................................................... 7052
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 7052
5. Assembly of the Regulator Sub-Assembly (01-230) ................................................................. 7055
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 7055
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 7055
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 7056
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7056
(1) Assembly of the Closing S/A ....................................................................................... 7056
(2) Assembly of the Distribution Sub-Assembly ............................................................... 7063
(3) Assembly of the Regulation Sub-Assembly ................................................................ 7063
(4) Assembly of the Regulation S/A For Regulator (02A-001D) or (02A-001F) ............... 7067
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 7067
(1) End of Procedure ........................................................................................................ 7067
6. Assembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) ................................................................... 7068
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 7068
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 7068
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 7068
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7069
(1) Assembly Procedure ................................................................................................... 7069
(2) Adjustment of the Overpressure Valve S/A Alone (01-223A) and (01-223B) ............. 7069
(3) Internal Leakage Test ................................................................................................. 7070
(4) Re-Opening Pressure Test ......................................................................................... 7070
(5) External Leakage Test ................................................................................................ 7070
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 7070
7. Assembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223C) ................................................................ 7073
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 7073
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 7073
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 7073
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7073
(1) Assembly Procedure ................................................................................................... 7073
(2) Adjustment of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223C) ............................................... 7074
(3) External Leakage Test ................................................................................................ 7074
(4) Internal Leakage ......................................................................................................... 7074
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 7074
8. Final Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 7078
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 7078
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 7078
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 7078
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7078
(1) Assembly of the Regulator Sub-Assembly (01-230) with Pneumatic Actuator
Sub-Assembly (01-330) .............................................................................................. 7078
(2) Assembly of the Upstream Pneumatic Connection ..................................................... 7079
(3) Assembly of the Upstream Pneumatic Connection ..................................................... 7079
(4) Assembly of the Downstream Pneumatic Connection ................................................ 7080
(5) Assembly of the Pneumatic Union (01-020) ............................................................... 7080
(6) Assembly of the Complete Cable (01-150) ................................................................. 7081
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 7081

TOC

36-11-51 Page 10
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

(1) End of Procedure ........................................................................................................ 7081

FITS AND CLEARANCES ................................................................................................................ 8001

1. Fits and Clearances .................................................................................................................. 8001
A. Fits and Clearances Table .................................................................................................. 8001
2. Tightening Torques .................................................................................................................... 8005
A. Table of Tightening Torques ............................................................................................... 8005

SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES ............................................. 9001

1. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment ..................................................................................... 9001
A. Special Tool Table .............................................................................................................. 9001
2. Consumable Materials .............................................................................................................. 9018
A. Consumable Materials Table .............................................................................................. 9018

SPECIAL PROCEDURES ............................................................................................... NOT APPLICABLE

REMOVAL ....................................................................................................................... NOT APPLICABLE

INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ NOT APPLICABLE

SERVICING ..................................................................................................................... NOT APPLICABLE

STORAGE (INCLUDING TRANSPORTATION) ................................................................................ 15001

1. Storage ...................................................................................................................................... 15001
A. Reason for the Job ............................................................................................................. 15001
B. Job Set-up Information ....................................................................................................... 15001
C. Job Set-up .......................................................................................................................... 15001
D. Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 15001
(1) Packaging ................................................................................................................... 15001
(2) Storage ....................................................................................................................... 15002
(3) Destorage ................................................................................................................... 15002
(4) Transportation ............................................................................................................. 15002
E. Close-up ............................................................................................................................. 15002

REWORK (SERVICE BULLETIN ACCOMPLISHMENT PROCEDURES) ...................... NOT APPLICABLE

APPENDIX A .................................................................................................................................... A-1

1. Approved Repairers .................................................................................................................. A-1
A. List of Approved Repairers ................................................................................................. A-1

ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................ 10001

A. General .............................................................................................................................. 10003
B. How to Use the Illustrated Parts List .................................................................................. 10003
C. Vendors List (VL) ................................................................................................................ 10003
D. Numerical Index (NI) .......................................................................................................... 10003
E. Detailed Parts List (DPL) ................................................................................................... 10004
F. Updating ............................................................................................................................. 10006

VENDOR LIST .......................................................................................................................... 10008

TOC

36-11-51 Page 11
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

PAGE

Alpha/Numeric Index ................................................................................................................. 10011

Optional Vendor Index ............................................................................................................... 10033

Detailed Parts List ..................................................................................................................... 10039

TOC

36-11-51 Page 12
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

FIGURE TITLE PAGE

1 Engine Air Bleed System ............................................................................................ 2

2 Overall Dimensions
(Sheet 1) ................................................................................................................. 4
(Sheet 2) ................................................................................................................. 5
(Sheet 3) ................................................................................................................. 6
(Sheet 4) ................................................................................................................. 7
3 Butterfly Valve
For P/N 6713D040000 (Sheet 1) ............................................................................ 9
For P/N 6713D040000 Amdt A (Sheet 2) ............................................................... 10
4 Pneumatic Actuator
For P/N 6713D040000 (Sheet 1) ............................................................................ 12
(Sheet 2) ................................................................................................................. 13
5 Regulator Distribution and Regulation S/A For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000 . 15
6 Regulator Closing S/A For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000 ................................ 16
7 Regulator - Description
Regulation and Distribution System For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt
A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A,
6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 1) .............................................. 19
Opening/Closing S/A - Description For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A,
6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A,
6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 2) .............................................. 20
8 Overpressure Valve - Description For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A,
6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A .................................................................. 22
9 Overpressure Valve - Description For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A,
6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A .................................................................. 25
10 HP Valve at Rest - Operation ...................................................................................... 27
11 HP Valve Opening - Operation .................................................................................... 29
12 HP Valve Pressure Control - Operation ...................................................................... 30
13 HP Valve - Closing (Transfer) - Operation ................................................................... 31
14 Overpressure Closing - Operation .............................................................................. 32
1001 Details of Test Connections
(Sheet 1) ................................................................................................................. 1003
(Sheet 2) ................................................................................................................. 1004
(Sheet 3) ................................................................................................................. 1005
1002 Position Indication Test Box ........................................................................................ 1006
1003 Test PROCESS Logic ................................................................................................. 1007
1004 Opening Test and Regulation Test .............................................................................. 1009
1005 Opening and Closing Operation of the Valve .............................................................. 1012
1006 Pressure Regulation Function Test ............................................................................. 1014
1007 Valve Position Indication
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000 (Sheet 1) ............................................. 1025
For P/N ≥ 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000
Amdt A, 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000
Amdt A (Sheet 2) .................................................................................................... 1026
1008 Functional Test Bench ................................................................................................ 1029
1009 Operation through the Ground Test Union .................................................................. 1032
1010 Overpressure Test ...................................................................................................... 1035
1011 Leakage Test Bench ................................................................................................... 1037

LOI

36-11-51 Page 1
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS(Continued)

FIGURE TITLE PAGE

1012 Pressure Control Test ................................................................................................. 1043

1013
Alignment of the Valve Seat (02A-600) with the Clapper (02A-540) (Sheet 1) ....... 1049
Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Opening Position (Sheet 2) ................ 1050
1014 Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Closing Position ...................................... 1052
1015 Tightness Test of the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) ........................................................ 1053
1016 Opening Test of the Clapper (02A-220) ...................................................................... 1055
1017 Regulated Pressure Test ............................................................................................ 1057
4001 Check of the Filter Load Loss ..................................................................................... 4017
5001 Check of the Washers (04-260B), (04-280) and (04-320B) ........................................ 5004
5002 Check of the Valve Body (04-340) .............................................................................. 5006
5003 Electrical Functional Check of the Microswitch S/A (03-490) ..................................... 5009
5004 Check of the Butterfly Travel ....................................................................................... 5011
5005 Check of the Radial Play of the Butterfly Shaft (04-070) For all P/N except
6713D040000 Amdt A ................................................................................................ 5013
5006 Check of the Shaft (04-070B) For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A .................... 5014
5007 Check of the Threaded Ring (04-060A) For P/N 6713D040000 ................................. 5016
5008 Check of the Valve Seat (02A-600) ............................................................................. 5017
5009 Check of the Adjusting Screw (02A-130) .................................................................... 5019
5010 Check of the Clapper (02A-160) ................................................................................. 5020
5011 Check of the Valve Body (02A-530) ............................................................................ 5021
5012 Check of the Clapper (02A-540) ................................................................................. 5022
6001 REPAIR No. 2: Bonding Operations ........................................................................... 6005
6002 REPAIR No. 3: Replacement of the Hard-Chrome in the Valve Body (04-340) .......... 6008
6003 REPAIR No. 4: Chamfering on the two Sides of the Washers (04-260), (04-280) and
(04-320) For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A .................................................... 6012
6004 REPAIR No. 5: Repair of the Valve Body (05-090A) and (05-090B) .......................... 6015
6005 REPAIR No. 6: Repair of the Microswitch S/A (03-490)
(Sheet 1) ................................................................................................................. 6019
(Sheet 2) ................................................................................................................. 6020
6006 REPAIR No. 7: Repair of the Clevis (03-160B) and the Adjusting Rod (03-180B) ..... 6022
6007 REPAIR No. 8: Repair of the Lever (03-320B) and the Rod S/A (03-310B) ............... 6024
6008 REPAIR No. 9: Repair of the Shaft (04-070) For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt
A ................................................................................................................................. 6027
6009 REPAIR No. 11: Repair of the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610) ................................... 6031
6010 REPAIR No. 12: Repair of the Microswitch S/A (03-490C) For the Microswitch S/A
P/N 6713-0230 ............................................................................................................ 6034
7001 Assembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080) ....................................................................... 7004
7002 Angular Positioning of the Shaft Splines ..................................................................... 7011
7003 Adjustment of the Clearance between the Butterfly Body Edge and the Valve Body
Bore For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000 or 6713D040000 ................................... 7012
7004 Adjustment of the Clearance between the Butterfly Body Edge and the Valve Body
Bore and Measurement of “Y” Dimension For P/N 6713D040000 Amdt A ................. 7017
7005 Setting of the Preload of the Shaft (04-070C) For P/N 6713D040000 Amdt A ........... 7018
7006 Adjustment of the Butterfly S/A (04-080) Closed Position .......................................... 7020
7007 Valve Internal Laboratory Leakage Test
Installation of the Test Tool (T06) (Sheet 1) ............................................................ 7021
Installation of the Test Tool (T06) (Sheet 2) ............................................................ 7022

LOI

36-11-51 Page 2
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS(Continued)

FIGURE TITLE PAGE

7008 Assembly of the Piston Rings (03-400) ....................................................................... 7025

7009 Installation of the Microswitches and Electrical Connector
For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000 (Sheet 1) ................................................ 7033
For P/N ≥ 6713D040000 and < 6713D070000 (Sheet 2) ....................................... 7034
For P/N 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 3) ................................ 7035
7010 Assembly of the Lever (03-320) Relative to the Splines of the Butterfly Shaft ............ 7040
7011 Orientation of the Piston (03-220) into the Pneumatic Actuator Body (03-240) .......... 7041
7012 Assembly of the Clevis (03-160) with the Adjusting Rod (03-180) and the Rod
(03-310) with the Lever (03-320) ................................................................................ 7044
7013 Adjustment of the Butterfly Closed Position Through the Clevis (03-160) .................. 7045
7014 Adjustment of the Microswitches
(Sheet 1) ................................................................................................................. 7047
(Sheet 2) ................................................................................................................. 7048
(Sheet 3) ................................................................................................................. 7049
7015 Actuating Pressure Test .............................................................................................. 7053
7016 Pneumatic Actuator Internal Leakage Test ................................................................. 7054
7017 Measurement of the Clapper (02A-540) Displacement Preparation of the Parts
(02A-560), (02A-600) For ≥ P/N 6713D040000 .......................................................... 7060
7018 Alignment of the Valve Seat (02A-600B) For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt
A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A ............................................................. 7061
7019 Adjustment of the Clearance “J” between the End of the Clapper (02A-540) in its
Upper Position and the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) For P/N ≥ 6713D040000 ............. 7062
7020 Adjustment of the Diaphragm (02A-070C) Displacement “J” For P/N 6713D040000 . 7066
7021 Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) Adjustment Test Set-up
For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000, 6713D050000 and 6713D050000 Amdt A
(Sheet 1) ................................................................................................................. 7071
For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000, 6713D050000 and 6713D050000 Amdt A
(Sheet 2) ................................................................................................................. 7072
7022 Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223C) Adjustment Test Set-up
For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000
Amdt A (Sheet 1) .................................................................................................... 7075
For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000
Amdt A (Sheet 2) .................................................................................................... 7076
For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000
Amdt A (Sheet 3) .................................................................................................... 7077
8001 Fits and Clearances .................................................................................................... 8002
8002 Fits and Clearances .................................................................................................... 8003
8003 Fits and Clearances .................................................................................................... 8004
9001 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9005
9002 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9006
9003 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9007
9004 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9008
9005 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9009
9006 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9010
9007 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9011
9008 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9012
9009 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9013
9010 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9014

LOI

36-11-51 Page 3
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS(Continued)

FIGURE TITLE PAGE

9011 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9015

9012 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9016
9013 Special Tools ............................................................................................................... 9017

Detailed Parts List

01 H.P. Regulating Valve .................................................................................................. 10040

02A Regulator S/A ............................................................................................................. 10048
3 Pneumatic Actuator S/A .............................................................................................. 10056
3A Pneumatic Actuator S/A .............................................................................................. 10066
04 Butterfly Valve S/A ...................................................................................................... 10076
04A Butterfly Valve S/A ...................................................................................................... 10082
5 Overpressure Valve S/A .............................................................................................. 10086

LOI

36-11-51 Page 4
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

INTRODUCTION

TASK 36-11-51-871-801-A01
1. Introduction

A. General

(1) This component maintenance manual (CMM) agrees with the Air Transport Association (ATA)
iSpec 2200. It is written in AECMA Simplified English (European Association of Aerospace
Industries).

(2) This CMM gives the procedures necessary to do easy checks and replacement of parts and
components: it also gives the procedures for maintenance. The maintenance procedures given
in this CMM are only for approved persons with the necessary skills.

(3) This CMM gives the shop maintenance procedures for the component.

(4) This manual uses the identification of the tasks and subtasks which is specified in the
Maintenance Task Oriented Support System (MTOSS). The maintenance tasks and other data
have special MTOSS numbers because the manual uses Electronic Data Processing (EDP).
The user of the manual can ignore the MTOSS numbers.

(5) This manual contains:

– The technical data for the component.

– The maintenance and repair procedures for the component.
– An Illustrated Parts List (IPL) with the data for the component parts. The parts are identified
in all the Page Blocks of the manual by the IPL Figure and the item number.

(6) A check of DISASSEMBLY, TESTING and ASSEMBLY procedures was made in the workshop.

B. How to Use the Manual

(1) Make sure that the manual contains the applicable data for your component. Look for the part
number on the Title Page.

(2) To identify a part or to find a part number, refer to the IPL, which has an Introduction to show
the procedure.

(3) You must use the instructions in this manual for all the maintenance steps of a component. Read
all the applicable WARNINGS and CAUTIONS before you do the work on the component.

(4) When you use consumable materials, these materials are identified by a code number from a list
in the Consumable Materials Table.

(5) When you use special tools, these tools are identified by a code number which is in a list in
the Special Tools Table.

(6) For the tightening torque values of the parts, refer to the Table of Tightening Torques.

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 1
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

C. Related Publications

(1) List of Approved Repairers (LOAR)

The issuer of this CMM is LIEBHERR-AEROSPACE.

This document is in the appendix of this CMM.

D. CMM Page Blocks

(1) The data for each component in the CMM is divided into specific Page Blocks. Each Page
Block has its specified subject matter and its specified page numbering. These Page Blocks
have these titles:

PAGE BLOCKS PAGE NUMBER ACTUAL DATE BY

VERIFICATIONS
Description and 0001 to 0999
Operation
Testing and Fault 1001 to 1999
Isolation
Schematics and Wiring 2001 to 2999 Not applicable
Diagrams
Disassembly 3001 to 3999
Cleaning 4001 to 4999
Inspection/Check 5001 to 5999
Repair 6001 to 6999
Assembly 7001 to 7999
Fits and Clearances 8001 to 8999
Special Tools, Fixtures, 9001 to 9999
Equipment and
Consumables
Illustrated Parts List 10001 to 10999
Special Procedure 11001 to 11999 Not applicable
Removal 12001 to 12999 Not applicable
Installation 13001 to 13999 Not applicable
Servicing 14001 to 14999 Not applicable
Storage (including 15001 to 15999
Transportation)
Rework (Service 16001 to 16999 Not applicable
Bulletin Instructions)

(2) Description and Operation

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 2
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This Page Block gives general data.

It gives a mechanical description and an electrical description.
It gives a description of the configuration and operation of the component.

(3) Testing and Fault Isolation

(a) It contains special tests and procedures which you must do to find the condition of a
component. The general test procedure is given in the FAULT ISOLATION TABLE. For
each test, this table refers to a special procedure which gives all the parameters which
you must set. It also gives all the parameters for which you must do a check.

(b) The pressure values in the tests are gage-pressure values.

(c) Before you use a measuring instrument, make sure that it is in correct operating condition
and that it is calibrated.

(d) Do a check for pneumatic system tightness, if this is applicable.

(e) You must do the tests in a room at ambient temperature: + 25 C ± 20 C (41 F to 113 F).

(4) Schematic and Wiring Diagrams

This Page Block contains all the schematic diagrams and the wiring and interconnecting
diagrams of the cards.

It also contains the diagrams of:

– Chassis wiring, modules, and sub-assemblies

– External connector interconnections in the equipment.

(5) Disassembly

(a) This Page Block gives step-by-step disassembly instructions in a correct sequence: it
refers to the figure item numbers from the IPL illustration(s), when they are applicable.
Identify the type of fault to know how much disassembly is necessary (do this to prevent
disassembly/reassembly work that is not necessary). The procedure given below is when
full disassembly is necessary.

(b) Put the component on a clean workbench, in a dust-free and moisture-free room. Move all
the parts carefully, and prevent corrosion and impact damage to them after disassembly.

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and gaskets during disassembly.

Discard the washers, the nuts and the screws during disassembly if they are
damaged.

(6) Cleaning

(a) This Page Block gives a step-by-step description of the cleaning operations for the
component and its parts.

(b) Always use the recommended procedures for the component parts of the unit.

(7) Inspection / Check

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 3
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(a) This Page Block gives the full check procedures which are necessary during shop
maintenance.

(b) Discard all the defective parts if the document does not give a repair procedure.

(c) Do all the inspections/checks on the cleaned parts.

(8) Repair

This Page Block contains the full repair procedures and specifications which are necessary
to repair a worn or damaged part. As specified in the INSPECTION/CHECK section, you
must reject the defective parts if the document does not give a repair procedure. Replace
the defective parts with new parts.

(9) Assembly

(a) This Page Block gives step-by-step assembly instructions in a correct sequence, which
refer to the figure item numbers from the IPL illustration(s), if applicable.

(b) Put the component on a clean workbench, in a dust-free and moisture-free room. More all
the parts carefully, and prevent corrosion and impact damage to them.

(c) Be sure to remove the storage protection coating from all the new parts before assembly.
Clean the new part if necessary.

(10) Fits and Clearances

(a) This Page Block gives a table and some figures which give the fits and clearances data
and the torque values for assembly. It also gives the permitted wear for in-service /
service, and the manufacturer’s design wear-tolerances.

(b) Fits and Clearances Table

1 The identifiers in column (1) show the location of the clearance or the dimension
that you must measure.

2 The identifiers in column (2) identify the parts in the IPL (Figure + Item number).

3 Column (3) gives the initial manufacturing dimensions and clearances.

4 In-service Wear Limits (Columns 4).

a The maximum limits are the maximum wear limits. If the part is in these limits
then it is serviceable.

b If the parts have more wear than the specified limits, you must repair or replace
them.

(c) Torque Values

1 All torque values in this manual are shown in the Table of Tightening Torques. The
parts are identified by the figure number and the item number of the IPL.

(11) Special Tools, Fixtures, Equipment and Consumables

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 4
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(a) This Page Block shows all the special tools, the fixtures, the equipment and the
consumables which are necessary to do the maintenance actions (which are given in
the other page blocks).

(b) All the items shown are identified in this manual by a standard code number: Txx for
Tools, Fixtures and Equipment and Mxx for Consumable Materials.

(12) Illustrated Parts List

This Page Block contains the full list of all the parts of the component (For the detailed
description, refer to the IPL INTRO).

(13) Special Procedures

This Page Block contains tasks which are given in other Page Blocks of the manual, but which
are necessary because of other maintenance tasks. The tasks are self-contained repairs or
preventive maintenance.

(14) Removal

This Page Block gives the procedure for the removal of modules/sub-assemblies from complex
modular components.

(15) Installation

This Page Block gives the procedure for the installation of modules/sub-assemblies in complex
modular components.

(16) Servicing

This Page Block gives the self-contained tasks which are necessary because of other
maintenance tasks.

(17) Storage

This Page Block gives the requirements for preparation for transportation, for special handling,
for packaging, for storage and for preservation: these requirements are for the component
after assembly or test.

(18) Rework

This Page Block gives the rework procedures which are necessary for in-service components.

E. Measurements

(1) The measurements which are given in this manual come from the original manufacturing
drawings.

(2) This CMM uses the “Systeme International” (S.I.) units for quantities and values. It also gives
the imperial units in parentheses.

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 5
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

F. Units of Measure

(1) S.I. Units

A Ampere

bar Bar

daN.m Decanewton meter

g Gram

g/min Gram per minute

g/mm Gram per millimeter

g/s Gram per second

Hz Hertz

l/min Liter per minute

l/h Liter per hour

mbar Millibar

min Minute

m³ Cubic meter

N Newton

N.m Newton meter

Nl Liter in standard conditions: Temperature = 0 C (32 F) Pressure =

1013,2 hPa (14.691 psi)

Pa Pascal

rpm Revolution per minute

s Second

W Watt

C Degree Celsius

Ohm

(2) U.S. Units

cu Cubic

cu.ft/min foot per minute in standard conditions: Temperature = 20 C (68 F)

Pressure = 1013,2 hPa (14.691 psi)

cu.in Cubic inch

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 6
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

ft Foot

gr Grain

gr/lb Grain per pound

in Inch

lb Pound

lb/min Pound per minute

lbf.in Pound force inch

oz Ounce

psi Pound per square inch

psia Absolute pressure in pounds per square inch

psig Relative pressure in pounds per square inch

F Degree Fahrenheit

(3) Multiplying Prefixes

p Pico

d Deci

n Nano

da Deca

µ Micro

h Hecto

m Milli

k Kilo

c Centi

M Mega

G. Measurement Conversion Table

(1) From S.I. Measurement to U.S. Standard System

1 kPa 0.1450 psi

1 cm 0.3937 in

1 cm² 0.1550 in²

1 mbar 0.0145 psi

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 7
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

1N 0.2248 lbf

1g 0.0353 oz

1 kg 2.2046 lb

1 kg/min 2.2046 lb/min

1l 0.2642 gal (u.s.)

1l 0.0353 cu.ft

1 l/min 0.2642 gal(u.s.)/min

1 l/min 0.0353 cu.ft/min

1 mm 0.0394 in

1 N.m 8.8507 lbf.in

1 N.m 0.7376 lbf.ft

(2) From U.S. Standard System to SI Measurement

1 cu.ft/min 28,317 l/min

1 psi 68,948 kPa

1 psi 68,948 mbar

1 in 2,54 cm

1 in 25,4 mm

1 in² 6,4516 cm²

1 lbf 4,4482 N

1 oz 28,3495 g

1 inHg 3,3864 kPa

1 lb 0,4536 kg

1 lb/min 0,4536 kg/min

1 gal (U.S.) 3,7854 l

1 lbf.in 0,1130 N.m

1 lbf.ft 1,3558 N.m

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 8
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

H. Temperature Conversion Table

SI MEASUREMENT Degrees Celsius U.S. STANDARD SYSTEM Degrees

( C) Fahrenheit ( F)
Degrees C = ( F - 32) x 0.5555 Degrees F = ( C x 1.8000) + 32

I. Abbreviations

abs. Absolute

ATA Air Transport Association of America

CMM Component Maintenance Manual

dia. Diameter

Fig. Figure

HP High Pressure

ID Internal Diameter

IP Intermediate Pressure

IPL Illustrated Parts List

LP Low Pressure

max. Maximum

Mfr Manufacturer

min. Minimum

MTOSS Maintenance Task Oriented Support System

No Number

OD Outside Diameter

PNR Part Number

para. Paragraph

Ref. Refer to

rel. Relative

S/A Sub-Assembly

SB Service Bulletin

SIL Service Information Letter

TBD To be defined

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 9
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

VAC Volt alternating current

VDC Volt direct current

% Percent

J. Geometric Tolerance Symbols

(1) The symbols agree with the NFE04-552, NFE05-016 and ISO1101 specifications.

K. Verifications

(1) The functions (tasks) which are given in this manual were verified by simulation. This
component maintenance manual is "shop verified" after all the functions (tasks) are actually
done on the equipment.

(2) This statement is revised after all verifications are done.

(3) The list of Page Blocks gives the shop verifications which are actually done. We will revise this
statement after all verifications are made.

INTRO

36-11-51 Page 10
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

TASK 36-11-51-872-801-A01
1. Description

A. General

The pneumatically controlled HP regulating valve P/N 6713 of the butterfly type, is installed in the
HP bleed air portion of the A320 engine air bleed system. It enables to deliver bleed air to the
system at idle speed.

The HP regulating valve with the IP check-valve P/N 2290 form the transfer section of the bleed air
system (Ref. Fig. 1).

Depending on the delivered pressure level, the air is bled either from the IP or HP engine stages.

Besides, the HP regulating valve is pneumatically coupled to the bleed pressure regulating valve.

The HP Regulating Valve consists of the major components that follow (Ref. Fig. 2 Sheet 1 to 4):

– A butterfly valve

– A pneumatic actuator

– A regulator

– Pneumatic connections and filters.

36-11-51 Page 1
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Engine Air Bleed System

Figure 1/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-001-A01

36-11-51 Page 2
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

B. Technical Data

– Overall dimensions: (Ref. Fig. 2 Sheet 1 to 4)

– Weight: 4,670 kg maxi (10.295 lb)
– Max supply air pressure:

• Normal closing position: 23,1 bar rel. (335 psig)

• Normal opening position: 6,89 bar rel. (100 psig)

– Max supply air temperature:

• Normal closing position: 569 C (1056 F)

• Normal opening position: 400 C (752 F)

– Minimum opening pressure: 0,550 bar rel. (7.97 psig)

– Nominal controlled pressure: 2,48 ± 0,21 bar rel. (adjustable) (33 to 39 psig)
– Overpressure safety calibration: 6,48 to 7,5 bar rel. (95 to 110 psig)
– Ambient temperature conditions:

• Normal operation: - 40 C to 205 C (- 40 F to 401 F)

• Extreme operation: - 55 C to 230 C (- 67 F to 446 F)

– Ambient pressure conditions: 0,16 to 1,45 bar abs. (2.32 to 21 psia)

– Indicator microswitches:

• Voltage supply: 28 VDC

• Nominal current: 0,5 to 20 mA.

36-11-51 Page 3
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overall Dimensions
(Sheet 1 of 4)
Figure 2/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-002-A01

36-11-51 Page 4
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overall Dimensions
(Sheet 2 of 4)
Figure 2/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-002-A01

36-11-51 Page 5
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overall Dimensions
(Sheet 3 of 4)
Figure 2/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-002-A01

36-11-51 Page 6
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overall Dimensions
(Sheet 4 of 4)
Figure 2/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-002-A01

36-11-51 Page 7
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

C. Detailed Description

(1) Butterfly valve (Ref. Fig. 3 Sheet 1 and 2)

The butterfly valve consists of:

(a) A body made of heat resisting stainless steel fitted with:

– Two "DN4" connecting flanges of the JANITROL type to connect the unit to the aircraft
system
– Two pressure tappings, one on the unit upstream side, the other one on the valve
downstream side in an annular chamber
– Two mounting bores for the shaft/butterfly assembly
– A mounting support for the regulator and the pneumatic actuator.

(b) A slant shaft/butterfly assembly actuated by the pneumatic actuator and supported by a
ball bearing and two needle bearings or two ball bearings.

(c) The butterfly which admits bleed pressure into the system is fitted with sealing rings which
achieves tightness in the valve closing position.

(d) The internal tightness of the bearings is achieved by graphite sealing rings (1). Externally,
tightness is achieved by graphite sealing rings (2).

(e) The axial load due to the slant position of the butterfly shaft is supported upwards by a
thrust bearing. Downwards the shaft end play is limited by spring loading parts.

(f) One threaded ring secured and locked into each end of the shaft mounting bore of the
valve body, holds the bearing and sealing rings.

(g) A quadrant fixed to the lower tip of the butterfly shaft, indicates the position of the butterfly.

(h) The butterfly can be manually placed in its closing position by venting the opening
chamber. This is achieved by removing the knurled screw from the upstream supply pipe.

(i) The butterfly can be manually operated by means of a spanner placed on manual control.

(j) The manual control is to be locked into the butterfly closing position by securing the
knurled screw into its mounting hole (Ref. Fig. 2 Sheet 1 to 4).

36-11-51 Page 8
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Butterfly Valve
For P/N 6713D040000 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 3/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-003-A01

36-11-51 Page 9
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Butterfly Valve
For P/N 6713D040000 Amdt A (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 3/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-003-A01

36-11-51 Page 10
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(2) Description of the pneumatic actuator (Ref. Fig. 4 Sheet 1 and 2)

The pneumatic actuator consists of:

(a) A body made of light alloy machined with two guide bores of piston. It also comprises the
pneumatic circuitry to the opening and closing chambers.

(b) A cover made of light alloy secured to the body.

(c) A piston made of light alloy fitted with guide rings and two sealing rings which delimit the
opening and closing chambers of the pneumatic actuator.

(d) A return spring which maintains butterfly in its closing position in the absence of pressure
supply.

(e) A clevis fixed to the piston.

(f) A rod/adjusting rod assembly fixed to the clevis.

(g) A lever fixed to the butterfly shaft (Ref. Fig. 4 Sheet 1 and 2) and actuated by the rod. The
lever actuated by the piston causes the rotation of shaft/butterfly assembly.

(h) A cam fixed to the upper tip of the butterfly shaft.

(i) For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000: Two microswitches actuated by the cam.

The microswitches indicate the "Closed - not closed" and the "Open - not open" positions
of the butterfly valve.

(j) For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A,

6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A: One
microswitch actuated by the cam.

The microswitch indicates the "closed - not closed" position of the butterfly valve.

(k) A casing fixed to the actuator body to accommodate the microswitche(s).

(l) A cover fixed to the microswitch casing.

(m) An electrical connector fixed to the casing interconnects the unit to the aircraft mains
system.

36-11-51 Page 11
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Pneumatic Actuator
For P/N 6713D040000 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 4/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-004-A01

36-11-51 Page 12
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Pneumatic Actuator
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-004-A01

36-11-51 Page 13
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(3) Description of the regulator sub-assembly (Ref. Fig. 5 and Ref. Fig. 6)

For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

This sub-assembly comprises:

– A regulation sub-assembly
– A distribution sub-assembly
– A closing sub-assembly.

(a) Regulation sub-assembly (Ref. Fig. 5)

This sub-assembly comprises:

1 A body/cover sub-assembly made of light alloy. This assembly is equipped with a

pneumatic piping to connect it to the upstream and downstream pressure tappings
(Ref. Fig. 2).

2 A bellows (1) loaded by spring (2) whose calibration can be modified by adjusting nut.
This adjusting nut maintains and guides the springs (2).

3 One adjusting screw (4) fixed to regulator body and secured into the adjusting nut.

4 A clapper (5) held in contact with a stop (6) by a spring (7). The motion of bellows (1)
causes clapper (5) to leave its upper seat on stop (6) and move towards its lower
seat on support (8).

(b) Distribution sub-assembly (Ref. Fig. 5)

This sub-assembly comprises:

1 A support (8) secured to the regulator body with a threaded ring.

2 A clapper (9) that slides into the support (8) bore and held against its seat in support
(8) by a spring (10).

3 A threaded plug (11) secured into the support (8) on which the spring (10) is centered.

(c) Closing sub-assembly (Ref. Fig. 6)

This sub-assembly comprises:

1 A diaphragm S/A (12) which delimits with the Cover S/A the chamber (E).

2 A valve body (13) retained with a threaded ring.

3 A clapper (14) that slides within the valve body (13) and held against its seat on the
valve body (13) with a spring (15) when the chamber (E) is air-vented.

4 A ball held against a valve seat (16) with a spring (17).

5 A threaded plug that secures the valve seat (16) to the regulator body.

36-11-51 Page 14
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Regulator Distribution and Regulation S/A For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

Figure 5/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-005-A01

36-11-51 Page 15
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Regulator Closing S/A For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

Figure 6/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-006-A01

36-11-51 Page 16
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(4) Description of the regulator sub-assembly (Ref. Fig. 7 Sheet 1)

For P/N 6713D040000

The regulator has a light cast alloy body which includes the pneumatic connections ducting the
upstream and downstream pressure between the body of the valve and the pneumatic actuator.

It consists of three sub-assemblies:

– Regulation S/A
– Distribution S/A
– Opening/closing S/A.

It is completed by an overpressure system.

(a) Regulation S/A (Ref. Fig. 7 Sheet 1)

This sub-assembly consists of:

1 A body/cover sub-assembly made of light alloy. This sub-assembly is equipped with a

pneumatic piping to connect it to the upstream and downstream pressure tappings.

2 A regulating chamber (A) formed by a diaphragm and cover.

3 A diaphragm fixed between the cover and the regulator body is loaded by a spring (1)
whose calibration can be modified by an adjusting nut.

4 The adjusting nut screwed to an adjusting screw is accessible through a window

machined in the regulator body.

5 The hollow adjusting screw attached to the regulator body by three screws,
accommodates a clapper (2) equipped with two graphite sealing rings (3).

6 With no pressure the clapper (2) is pushed against a stop by a spring (4) and the
diaphragm is pushed against the cover by the spring (1).

7 Under the action of pressure, the diaphragm tends to move the clapper (2) towards its
lower seat on the clapper body.

(b) Distribution S/A (Ref. Fig. 7 Sheet 1)

It is located on the longitudinal axis of the regulation system described in the previous
paragraph.

It consists of:

1 A clapper body made of stainless steel.

One side is subjected to the action of the clapper (2) described in the regulation
system; the other is subjected to the action of a distribution clapper (5).

The clapper body is a hollow cylindrical body which accommodates the distribution
clapper (5); its base has an internal thread for the attachment of a threaded plug.

2 Two grooves machined on the external periphery of the distribution clapper (5)
accommodate two graphite sealing rings (6).

36-11-51 Page 17
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

The distribution clapper (5) is loaded by a spring (7) seated on the threaded plug base.

A nut (8) ensures the attachment of the distribution system to the regulator body.

(c) Opening/Closing S/A (Ref. Fig. 7 Sheet 2)

The opening/closing sub-assembly perpendicular to that of the regulation and distribution

system, consists of a stage described as follows.

This stage consists of:

1 A diaphragm (9) held between the cover and the regulator body, which acts as an
opening/closing chamber (B).

2 A spring (10) that rests on a threaded ring (11) which holds the clapper body (12).
This spring (10) is in contact with shims (13) located under the diaphragm (9).

3 A stainless steel hollow cylindrical clapper (14) drilled with four holes slides in an
internal copper alloy bush and rests against a valve seat (15) under the action of
the diaphragm (9) pushed by pressure in chamber (B).

4 A spring (16) is placed between the valve seat (15) and the clapper (14). At rest the
spring (16) holds the clapper (14) against the clapper body (12).

5 A stainless steel hollow cylindrical valve seat (15) with four outlet holes. This valve
seat accommodates a stainless steel ball (17) which is loaded by a spring (18) that
rests on a threaded plug (19).

This threaded plug (19) is equipped with a preformed packing for sealing and screwed
inside the regulator body.

6 A cover (20) is fixed to this sub-assembly. This cover made of light alloy, protected by
chromic anodizing, has one tapped hole for the pneumatic connection.

36-11-51 Page 18
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Regulator - Description
Regulation and Distribution System For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000
Amdt A, 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 7/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-007-A01

36-11-51 Page 19
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Regulator - Description
Opening/Closing S/A - Description For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000
Amdt A, 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 7/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-007-A01

36-11-51 Page 20
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(5) Overpressure valve (Ref. Fig. 8)

For P/N 6713D050000 and 6713D050000 Amdt A

The overpressure safety system consists of an overpressure valve fitted within the air pressure
tapping embossment on the valve body upstream side.

The overpressure valve consists of:

(a) A stainless steel hollow cylindrical body (1) equipped with a pressed-in copper alloy
bushing and drilled with four holes.

One end base of the valve body (1) is threaded for the connection to the trailing edge
probe (01-228); the thread on the middle part of the valve body enables connection with
the banjo tube (01-220) using a nut (01-105).

(b) A stainless steel venting clapper (2), threaded at one end; the head of the clapper rests
on the internal bushing of the valve body. It has a recess to accommodate the locating
pin of a spring guide (5).

(c) A self-locating stainless steel cylindrical spring guide (5).

(d) A spring (7) loaded between the edge of the spring guide (5) and the upper spring guide
(3) maintained by a retaining ring (9) inside the valve body (1).

(e) A machined stainless steel hollow clapper (4), the base of which acts as a seat on the
internal bushing of the valve body (1). The square section of the clapper (4) enables air
flow through the four air vent holes of the overpressure valve.

The clapper (4) is fitted against the internal face of the clapper head (2) and secured
by a nut (8).

The two clappers, thus held together and located by the locating pin of the spring guide
(5), can slide inside the valve body (1) within the limits defined by the internal bushing
swaged to the valve body (1).

36-11-51 Page 21
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Valve - Description For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A,

6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A
Figure 8/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-008-A01

36-11-51 Page 22
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(6) Pneumatic connections and filters (Ref. Fig. 2 Sheet 1 to 4)

(a) The upstream pressure piping of the regulator sub-assembly consists of:

1 A trailing edge probe secured into the valve body.

2 An Overpressure Valve S/A secured into the trailing edge probe.

3 A banjo tube (1) fixed at one end to Overpressure Valve S/A (10) with a nut and at the
other end by a hollow screw secured into the regulator body.

4 A test connection made up of a banjo union fixed by the hollow screw and blanked by
a threaded cap.

(b) The downstream pressure piping of the regulator sub-assembly consists of:

1 A filter union secured into the valve body.

2 A banjo tube (2) secured at one end by a filter union and at the other end by
a banjo screw.

3 A union (3) secured into the cover of the regulator sub-assembly which interconnects
the upper chamber of the closing sub-assembly with the bleed pressure regulating
valve P/N 6714 pneumatic regulator.

4 A banjo tube (4) secured at each end to regulator covers, which interconnect chamber
(A) of regulation sub-assembly and chamber (E) of closing sub-assembly. Certain
alternate units include a connecting hole in place of banjo tube (4) to duct the reduced
pressure into the (E) chamber of the closing sub-assembly.

(7) Overpresure valve (Ref. Fig. 9)

For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

The overpressure safety system consists of an overpressure valve fitted within the air pressure
tapping embossment on valve body upstream side.

The overpressure valve consists of:

(a) A stainless steel hollow cylindrical body (05-090C) drilled with four inlet holes and two
outlet holes.

1 One end of the valve body (05-090C) is threaded for the connection to the trailing
edge probe (01-228).

2 The middle part of the body is threaded for the attachment of the threaded cap
(01-105B).

3 The threaded cap (01-105B) has two outlet holes at its upper part to release the air
pressure from the two inlet plated holes in case of overpressure.

(b) A centering axle (05-050B) made of chrome-plated stainless steel supports the clapper
(05-070B) made of chrome-plated stainless steel. A nut (05-080) is used to attach
clapper (05-070B).

36-11-51 Page 23
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(c) A spring (05-040B) keeps the centering axle (05-050B) and one end of the clapper
(05-050B) in contact with its seat on body.

(d) A centering guide (05-020B) is made of two parts:

1 The guide made of stainless steel is used to keep the spring (05-040B) in the
correct position.

2 A pressed-in bushing made of carbon is used to guide the centering axle (05-050B).

(e) Shims (05-030) maintained between the centering guide (05-020B) and spring (05-040B)
that remain are used for the overpressure valve calibration.

36-11-51 Page 24
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Valve - Description For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A,

6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A
Figure 9/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-009-A01

36-11-51 Page 25
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-873-801-A01
2. Operation

A. Operating Principle (Ref. Fig. 10)

The upstream pressure of the valve is tapped through trailing edge probe (1) and overpressure valve
(10). Then it is reduced between clapper (2) and its seat. The reduced pressure is then delivered
into chamber (A) of regulator sub-assembly through calibrated hole (3).

This pressure acts upon bellows which controls the position of clapper (2).

The position of clapper (2) enables to build up a constant reduced pressure in opening chamber (C)
of pneumatic actuator when unit covers the pressure regulation.

The valve downstream pressure tapped through filter (5) is ducted to the closing chamber (D) of
pneumatic actuator, between clapper (6) of distribution system and its seat. Clapper (6) is kept in the
opening position by the downstream pressure.

Since the reference pressure delivered, or not, to the opening chamber (C) of pneumatic actuator is
constant, any variation in the downstream pressure brings about a change in the position of butterfly
in order to keep the downstream pressure constant.

The closing clapper (7) enables to distribute the reference pressure either in the opening chamber or
in the closing chamber of the pneumatic actuator.

In the event of IP air bleeding or HP overpressure conditions, ball valve (9) prevents the IP pressure
from being admitted into the bellows of the regulator sub-assembly.

36-11-51 Page 26
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

HP Valve at Rest - Operation

Figure 10/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-010-A01

36-11-51 Page 27
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

B. Operating Configurations

(1) HP regulating valve opening (Ref. Fig. 11)

At engine idle speed, the HP regulating valve opens with a 0,55 bar rel. (8.00 psig) minimum
pressure. The regulated pressure admitted into the opening chamber (C) of pneumatic
actuator causes valve to open.

(2) HP regulating valve pressure control (Ref. Fig. 12)

In the event of an increase in engine speed, the HP bleed pressure exceeds a certain level
(2,48 bar rel. (36 psig)); valve thus controls its downstream pressure to a constant value
2,48 bar rel. (36 psig).

The downstream pressure causes the distribution valve of the regulator to open. This admits
the downstream pressure into the chamber (D) of the pneumatic actuator.

The opening chamber of the pneumatic actuator is submitted to a constant reference pressure.

Any variation in the downstream pressure causes a change in the position of butterfly in order
to keep the downstream pressure constant.

The change in the differential pressure tends to modify the position of the butterfly, until the
required value of the downstream regulated pressure is obtained.

(3) HP valve closing (transfer configuration) (Ref. Fig. 13)

From a sufficiently high engine speed, the IP bleed pressure causes the IP non-return valve
to open, this to supply the bleed pressure regulating valve pneumatically. The IP pressure
returns to the downstream side of the HP regulating valve and is then ducted to the closing
chamber of the pneumatic actuator. This causes valve to close.

(4) HP valve closing (overpressure safety configuration) (Ref. Fig. 14)

If the HP bleed pressure exceeds a certain level (HP bleed pressure greater than 6,89 bar rel.
(100 psig), this pressure admitted through the trailing edge probe causes the overpressure
valve to open and plug the air inlet to regulator sub-assembly, causing chamber E of the
regulator closing system to be evacuated, and in turn causing clapper (7) to move up in
contact with its seat. The downstream pressure is thus admitted into the closing chamber
(D) and the opening chamber (C) is vented.

(5) Pneumatic coupling of the HP regulating valve with the bleed pressure regulating valve.

If the bleed pressure regulating valve closes, the pneumatic link, between the pneumatic
regulator of the bleed pressure regulating valve and the chamber (E) of the HP regulating
valve regulator, causes the latter valve to close fully.

36-11-51 Page 28
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

HP Valve Opening - Operation

Figure 11/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-011-A01

36-11-51 Page 29
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

HP Valve Pressure Control - Operation

Figure 12/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-012-A01

36-11-51 Page 30
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

HP Valve - Closing (Transfer) - Operation

Figure 13/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-013-A01

36-11-51 Page 31
May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Closing - Operation

Figure 14/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-014-A01

36-11-51 Page 32
May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION

TASK 36-11-51-700-801-A01
1. Failure Confirmation Tests

A. Reason for the Job

CAUTION: THESE PROCEDURES ARE TO BE UNDERSTOOD AS "FAILURE CONFIRMATION

TESTS" AND CAN, IN NO WAY, BE USED TO RECERTIFY A UNIT AFTER REPAIR
OR ONLY DISASSEMBLY (IN THIS CASE, COMPLETE TESTING AS PER TESTING
SECTION TASK 36-11-51-700-802-A01 OR TASK 36-11-51-700-803-A01).

This procedure has been defined with minimum requirements to allow the operators to easily confirm
failures on bleed valves removed from the aircraft.

Their aim is to avoid unjustified returns to a repair station.

Thus, these procedures are static tests using ambient air (NO AIRFLOW).

They consist in a selection of laboratory tests, with enlarged tolerances for some of them, checking
that valve is likely or not to induce a failure on the aircraft.

Units passing all points of these tests after removal from an A/C are serviceable, and can be returned
into service without further testing.

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Instrumentation

DESIGNATION QTY CHARACTERISTICS

MEGOHMMETER 1 RANGE: 0 TO 50 V, 1000 M
MILLIOHMMETER 1 RANGE: 0 TO 20 MILLIOHMS
FLOWMETER 1 RANGE: 5 TO 50 L/MIN (0.176 TO
1.76 CU.FT/MIN)
FLOWMETER 1 RANGE: 80 TO 800 L/MIN (2.816 TO
28.16 CU.FT/MIN)
FLOWMETER 1 RANGE: 50 TO 500 NL/MIN (1.76 TO
17.6 CU.FT/MIN)
METAL DIAL GAGE 1 RANGE: 0 TO 2 BAR REL. (0 TO 29 PSIG)
METAL DIAL GAGE 2 RANGE: 0 TO 4 BAR REL. (0 TO 58 PSIG)
METAL DIAL GAGE 1 RANGE: 0 TO 6 BAR REL. (0 TO 87 PSIG)
METAL DIAL GAGE 2 RANGE: 0 TO 10 BAR REL. (0 TO 145 PSIG)
METAL DIAL GAGE 1 RANGE: 0 TO 15 BAR REL. (0 TO 217.5 PSIG)
TEMPERATURE MEASURING 1 CONDITIONS BETWEEN 0 C AND 40 C (32 F
SYSTEM TO 104 F)

36-11-51 Page 1001

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Energy Sources

DESIGNATION QTY CHARACTERISTICS

POWER SUPPLY 1 28 VDC
STABILIZED PNEUMATIC SUPPLY 1 0 TO 24 BAR REL. (0 TO 348 PSIG)
STABILIZED PNEUMATIC SUPPLY 1 0 TO 6 BAR REL. (0 TO 87 PSIG)
AMBIENT AIR SOURCE 1 20 (+40/-20) C (32 F TO 140 F)

(c) Equipments

DESIGNATION QTY CHARACTERISTICS

POSITION INDICATION TEST BOX 1 REF. FIG. 1002

(d) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T13 OS22868A 1 BLANKING CAP
T26 92008A010000 1 POSITION INDICATION BOX
OR 92086A01
T27 M82000189-903A 1 ELECTRICAL CORD
OR M82000189-906
T39 SBE1693 1 TEST TOOL
T40 M87000210 1 TEST TOOL

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-015-A01 1000 FIGURE 1001 SHEET 1/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-015-A01 1000 FIGURE 1001 SHEET 2/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-015-A01 1000 FIGURE 1001 SHEET 3/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-016-A01 1000 FIGURE 1002
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-017-A01 1000 FIGURE 1003
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-018-A01 1000 FIGURE 1004
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-019-A01 1000 FIGURE 1005
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-020-A01 1000 FIGURE 1006
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-021-A01 1000 FIGURE 1007
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-024-A01 1000 FIGURE 1010

36-11-51 Page 1002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Details of Test Connections

(Sheet 1 of 3)
Figure 1001/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-015-A01

36-11-51 Page 1003

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Details of Test Connections

(Sheet 2 of 3)
Figure 1001/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-015-A01

36-11-51 Page 1004

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Details of Test Connections

(Sheet 3 of 3)
Figure 1001/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-015-A01

36-11-51 Page 1005

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Position Indication Test Box

Figure 1002/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-016-A01

36-11-51 Page 1006

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Test PROCESS Logic

Figure 1003/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-017-A01

36-11-51 Page 1007

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

NOTE: During the setting of required pressures, it can be noticed some fluctuations while
approaching the required value. It is then recommended to overpass the value, then come
back to the required value.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-001-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

(1) Opening Test and Regulation Test

(Ref. Fig. 1004)

(a) Install the unit on the test set (Ref. Fig. 1004).

(b) Increase upstream pressure P1 to 550 mbar rel. (7.97 psig).

(c) Make sure that the valve is full open (signal lamps: "open" indication).

(d) Increase upstream P1 up to 2,2 bar rel. (31.9 psig).

(e) Make sure that the valve is still full open (signal lamps: "open" indication).

(f) Increase P1 to 2,7 bar rel. (39.15 psig).

(g) Make sure that the valve is in closed position (signal lamps: "closed" indication).

(h) Decrease P1 down to 2 bar rel. (29 psig).

(i) Make sure that the valve is in full open position (signal lamps: "open" indication).

36-11-51 Page 1008

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Opening Test and Regulation Test

Figure 1004/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-018-A01

36-11-51 Page 1009

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-001-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(2) Opening Test and Regulation Test

(Ref. Fig. 1004)

(a) Install the unit on the test set (Ref. Fig. 1004).

(b) Increase upstream pressure P1 to 550 mbar rel. (7.97 psig).

(c) Make sure that the valve is full open (signal lamps: "not closed" indication and manual
control in the open position).

(d) Increase upstream P1 up to 2,2 bar rel. (31.9 psig).

(e) Make sure that the valve is still full open (signal lamps: "not closed" indication and
manual control in the open position).

(f) Increase P1 to 2,7 bar rel. (39.15 psig).

(g) Make sure that the valve is in closed position (signal lamps: "closed" indication).

(h) Decrease P1 down to 2 bar rel. (29 psig).

(i) Make sure that the valve is in full open position (signal lamps: "not closed" indication
and manual control in the open position).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-002-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

(3) Opening/Closing Operation of the Valve

(Ref. Fig. 1005)

(a) Install the unit on the test set (Ref. Fig. 1005).

(b) Increase P1 to 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.40 to 26.10 psig).

(c) Open the test tool (T39).

(d) Make sure that the valve closes within 3 seconds (closed indication).

(e) Close the test tool (T39).

(f) Make sure that the valve opens within 3 seconds (Signal lamps: "open" indication).

(g) Increase P1 to 6 ± 0,1 bar rel. (85.55 to 88.45 psig).

(h) Open the test tool (T39).

(i) Make sure that the valve closes within 3 seconds (closed indication).

(j) Close the test tool (T39).

36-11-51 Page 1010

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(k) Make sure that the valve opens within 3 seconds (Signal lamps: "open" indication).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-002-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(4) Opening/Closing Operation of the Valve

(Ref. Fig. 1005)

(a) Install the unit on the test set (Ref. Fig. 1005).

(b) Increase P1 to 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.40 to 26.10 psig).

(c) Open the test tool (T39).

(d) Make sure that the valve closes within 3 seconds (closed indication).

(e) Close the test tool (T39).

(f) Make sure that the valve opens within 3 seconds (Signal lamps: "not closed" indication
and manual control in the open position).

(g) Increase P1 to 6 ± 0,1 bar rel. (85.55 to 88.45 psig).

(h) Open the test tool (T39).

(i) Make sure that the valve closes within 3 seconds (closed indication).

(j) Close the test tool (T39).

(k) Make sure that the valve opens within 3 seconds (Signal lamps: "not closed" indication
and manual control in the open position).

36-11-51 Page 1011

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Opening and Closing Operation of the Valve

Figure 1005/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-019-A01

36-11-51 Page 1012

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-003-A01
For P/N except 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

(5) Pressure Regulation Function Test of the Valve

(Ref. Fig. 1006)

(a) Install the unit on the test set (Ref. Fig. 1006).

(b) Increase upstream pressure P1 to 4 ± 0,1 bar rel. (56.55 to 59.45 psig).

(c) Increase downstream pressure P2 to 2,8 bar rel. (40.6 psig).

(d) Make sure that the valve is full closed ("closed" indication).

(e) Decrease downstream pressure P2 to 2,2 bar rel. (31.90 psig).

(f) Make sure that the valve is full open ("open/not closed" indication).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-003-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(6) Pressure Regulation Function Test of the Valve

(Ref. Fig. 1006)

(a) Install the unit on the test set (Ref. Fig. 1006).

(b) Increase upstream pressure P1 to 4 ± 0,1 bar rel. (56.55 to 59.45 psig).

(c) Increase downstream pressure P2 to 2,8 bar rel. (40.6 psig).

(d) Make sure that the valve is full closed ("closed" indication).

(e) Decrease downstream pressure P2 to 2,2 bar rel. (31.90 psig).

(f) Make sure that the valve is full open ("not closed" indication and manual control in the
open position).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-004-A01
(7) Overpressure Function Test of the Valve
(Ref. Fig. 1010)

(a) Install the unit on the test set (Ref. Fig. 1010).

(b) Increase upstream pressure P1 to 7 ± 0,1 bar rel. (100 to 102.95 psig).

(c) Make sure that pressure P2 is more than 6 bar rel. (87 psig).

(d) Increase upstream pressure P1 to 10 ± 0,1 bar rel. (143.55 to 146.45 psig).

(e) Make sure that pressure P2 is less than 300 mbar rel. (4.35 psig).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 1013

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Pressure Regulation Function Test

Figure 1006/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-020-A01

36-11-51 Page 1014

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-810-801-A01
2. Fault Isolation of Complete Unit

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
TASK-36-11-51-700-804-A01 1000 LABORATORY TEST PROCEDURE OF
THE REGULATOR S/A ALONE
TASK-36-11-51-810-802-A01 1000 FAULT ISOLATION OF THE REGULATOR
S/A ALONE
SUBTASK-36-11-51-750-001-A01 1000 INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST (010)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-750-002-A01 1000 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY TEST (020)
VALVE BODY CONTINUITY
SUBTASK-36-11-51-750-003-A01 1000 POSITION INDICATION TEST (020)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-005-A01 1000 OPENING-CLOSING TEST (070)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-005-B01 1000 OPENING-CLOSING TEST (070)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-006-A01 1000 REGULATION TEST (040)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-007-A01 1000 PRESSURE CONTROL TEST (050)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-008-A01 1000 CLOSURE WITH NO PRESSURE (053)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-009-A01 1000 OPERATION THROUGH THE GROUND
TEST UNION (055)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-009-B01 1000 OPERATION THROUGH THE GROUND
TEST UNION (055)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-010-A01 1000 LOCKING IN THE CLOSED POSITION
(057)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-011-A01 1000 OVERPRESSURE TEST (060)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-011-B01 1000 OVERPRESSURE TEST (060)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-012-A01 1000 MINI OPENING PRESSURE TEST (065)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-012-B01 1000 MINI OPENING PRESSURE TEST (065)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-790-001-A01 1000 INTERNAL LEAKAGE TEST (080)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-790-002-A01 1000 EXTERNAL LEAKAGE TEST (090)
TASK-36-11-51-300-801-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 5: REPAIR OF THE VALVE
BODY (05-090A) AND (05-090B)
TASK-36-11-51-300-802-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 6: REPAIR OF THE
MICROSWITCH S/A (03-490)

36-11-51 Page 1015

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
TASK-36-11-51-300-807-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 11: REPAIR OF THE
REGULATOR BODY S/A (02A-610)
TASK-36-11-51-330-801-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 3: REPLACEMENT OF THE
HARD-CHROME PLATING IN THE VALVE
BODY (04-340
TASK-36-11-51-360-801-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 2: ELECTRICAL BONDING
SUBTASK-36-11-51-440-010-A01 7000 ADJUSTMENT OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-440-010-B01 7000 ADJUSTMENT OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 1016

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

D. Procedure

FAULT PROBABLE REASON REMEDIAL ACTION

1. Insulation Resistance Test (010) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-750-001-A01)
Electrical position The wiring of the electrical connector Repair, re-crimp, change the wiring as
indicate defective (03-420) or the wiring of the microswitches applicable.
Insulation (03-490) is stripped or uncrimped. Change the microswitches if the wiring
resistance less than is damaged or uncrimped.
100 M Change the connector if damaged.
2. Electrical Continuity Test (010) Valve body continuity (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-750-002-A01)
Electrical position The electrical bonding is defective. Isolate the defective electrical bonding
indication defective point. Re-work bonding point as per
Continuity bonding operations (Ref. to REPAIR
resistance greater No. 2 TASK 36-11-51-360-801-A01).
than 20 m
3. Valve position indication test (020) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-750-003-A01)
Valve electrical 1. Control cam (03-080)
position indication
The cam (03-080) is loose. Fix the cam (03-080) properly. Change
defective
it if damaged.
2. Microswitches (03-490)
The tripping clearance of the microswitch Adjust the tripping clearance of the
contact is out of tolerance. microswitch contact (Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-440-010-A01 or) Ref. to
Subtask 36-11-51-440-010-B01).
The microswitches retaining screws are Adjust the microswitch position and
loose (03-500). tighten the screws fully.
The microswitch(es) are inoperative (or the Do a check and repair the microswitch
wiring is uncrimped or damaged). (Ref. to REPAIR No. 6 TASK
36-11-51-300-802-A01).
2. Electrical connector (03-420)
The wiring is uncrimped. Crimp the wiring properly.
The wiring is stripped. Change the wiring.
The contact pin(s) is (are) twisted or Change the contact pin.
broken.

4. Operating torque test (030)

Butterfly valve 1. Valve body (04-001A)
seized in any
Sealing rings (04-140) or (04-150) Change the sealing rings (04-140) or
position
extrusion. (04-150).

36-11-51 Page 1017

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FAULT PROBABLE REASON REMEDIAL ACTION

or valve unproper Distortion of the valve body (04-340). The Change the valve body (04-340).
opening or closing valve body bore is damaged.
(operating torque The retaining screw of the butterfly Tighten the retaining screw (04-090)
out of tolerance) (04-090) is loose. fully.
The needles (04-240), (04-300) or the outer Change the needles (04-240), (04-300)
rings (04-250), (04-310) are damaged. or the outer rings (04-250), (04-310) as
applicable.
2. Pneumatic actuator (03-001A)
The position of the piston (03-220) is not Change the rod (03-310).
correct = the screw-lock of the rod (03-310)
is loose.
The alignment of the linkage between the Set the alignment of the linkage
rod (03-310), the lever (03-320) and the between the rod (03-310), the
butterfly shaft (04-070) is not correct. lever (03-320) and the butterfly
shaft (04-070) (Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-440-010-A01).
Distortion of the actuator body (03-240). Change the actuator body.
5. Full opening Test (040) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-006-A01 or Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-780-006-B01)
Valve pressure 1. Upstream/downstream pneumatic
control function couplings
defective or
The ducts (01-100), (01-220) or the Change the ducts (01-060), (01-220) or
inoperative
sealing parts (01-060), (01-180), (01-090), the sealing parts (01-060), (01-180),
(01-226) are leaked. (01-090), (01-226).
The filter union (01-050) is clogged. Clean the filter union (01-050).
The preformed packings (01-280), (01-290) Change the preformed packings
are defective. (01-280), (01-290).
2. Regulator Sub-Assembly
The regulator is defective. Remove the regulator from the unit.
Apply the complete test and
troubleshooting (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-700-804-A01).
Apply the repair procedure of the
Regulator S/A alone (Ref. to REPAIR
No. 11 TASK 36-11-51-300-807-A01).
3. Pneumatic Actuator Sub-Assembly
The piston ring (03-400) is worn or broken. Change the piston ring (03-400) and
the flexible ring (03-410).
The flexible ring (03-390) does not ensure Change the flexible ring (03-390).
the piston ring tightness any longer.
The sealing parts (03-130), (03-300) and Change the defective sealing parts
(03-600) are worn or broken. (03-130), (03-300) and (03-600).

36-11-51 Page 1018

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FAULT PROBABLE REASON REMEDIAL ACTION

The spring (03-150) is defective or broken. Change the spring (03-150).
4. Valve Body Sub-Assembly
The sealing rings (04-210), (04-270) are Change the sealing rings (04-210),
damaged. (04-270) as applicable.
6. Pressure control test (050) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-007-A01)
The valve opens 1. Regulator Sub-Assembly
with difficulty, the
The Regulator sub-assembly is defective. Remove the Regulator S/A from the
valve cannot open
unit.
Apply the complete Fault Isolation
procedure of the Regulator S/A alone
(Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-810-802-A01).
2. Pneumatic actuator
The sealing rings (03-600), (03-400) are Change the sealing rings (03-600),
defective. (03-400) and the flexible rings (03-410),
(03-390).
3. Bearings of the valve body S/A (04-340) Remove the parts bearings.
seized.
7. Closure with no pressure (053) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-008-A01)
With no pressure Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-750-003-A01 and Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-005-A01
valve cannot close or Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-005-B01)
8. Locking on closure (057) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-010-A01)
Valve does not The special screw (04-020) is loose or Do a check of the tightening of the
remain in the locked damaged. special screw (04-020).
position
Do a check of the special screw
(04-020). Discard and renew it if
defective.
9. Operation through the Ground Test Union (055) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-009-A01 or Ref. to
Subtask 36-11-51-780-009-B01)
Valve does not open (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-750-003-A01 and Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-005-A01
between 0,7 and or Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-005-B01)
1 bar rel. (10.15 and
2. The diaphragm (02-460) is damaged. Do a check and replace the diaphragm
14.5 psig).
(02-460) if necessary.
3. The sealing rings (03-400) of the Piston Do a check and change the sealing
S/A (03-220) are defective. rings (03-400).

36-11-51 Page 1019

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FAULT PROBABLE REASON REMEDIAL ACTION

10. Overpressure Test (060) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-011-A01 or Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-780-011-B01)
Valve remains open 1. Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223)
in high upstream
The Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) is Remove the Overpressure Valve S/A
pressure conditions
defective. (01-223) from the unit, do a check and
repair if necessary (Ref. to REPAIR No.
5 TASK 36-11-51-300-801-A01).
11. Mini Opening Pressure Test (065) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-012-A01 or Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-780-012-B01)
Valve opens for P1 1. Pneumatic Actuator S/A
pressure greater
The piston rings (03-400) are defective. Change the piston rings (03-400).
than 550 mbar rel.
(7.97 psig)
The sealing rings (03-600) are defective. Change the sealing rings (03-600).
The Regulator sub-assembly is defective. Remove the regulator sub-assembly
from the unit.
Apply the complete Fault isolation
procedure of the Regulator S/A alone
(Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-810-802-A01).
12. Opening-Closing Test (070) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-005-A01 or Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-780-005-B01)
Valve tends to 1. Regulator Sub-Assembly
remain open or
The Regulator sub-assembly is defective. Remove the Regulator sub-assembly
cannot close
from the unit.
Apply the complete test and
troubleshooting of the Regulator
S/A alone (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-700-804-A01).
Apply the repair procedure of the
Regulator S/A alone (Ref. to REPAIR
No. 11 TASK 36-11-51-300-807-A01).
13. Valve Internal Leakage Test (080) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-790-001-A01)
Internal leakage 1. Valve Body
value greater
Valve body impact damage. Change the valve body.
than 11,1 g/s
(19.6 cu.ft/min) The Valve body bore is damaged. Repair or change the valve body
(Ref. to REPAIR No. 3 TASK
36-11-51-330-801-A01).
The butterfly valve sealing ring extruded or Change the butterfly valve sealing ring.
not evenly in contact with the body bore.
The butterfly sealing ring (04-140) is Change the butterfly valve sealing ring
damaged or broken. (04-140).

36-11-51 Page 1020

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FAULT PROBABLE REASON REMEDIAL ACTION

14. External Leakage Test (090) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-790-002-A01)
External leakage 1. Sealing Parts
value greater than
The preformed packings are damaged. Change the damaged preformed
3 g/s (4.94 cu.ft/min)
packings.
2. Pneumatic connections
The upstream banjo tube (01-220) or the Change the defective tubes (01-220) or
downstream tube (01-100) is defective. (01-100).
3. Butterfly Valve S/A
The bearings sealing parts (04-050), Change the sealing rings (04-050),
(03-300) and (03-600) are defective. (03-300), (03-600).

NOTE: If the tests from (010) to (090) are satisfactory, the unit is functionally correct and
can be re-installed.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 1021

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-700-802-A01
3. Dynamic Test Procedure of Complete Unit

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T13 OS22868A 1 BLANKING CAP
T23 M82100020-060A 1 TEST TOOL
OR M82100020-010A
T26 92008A010000 1 POSITION INDICATION BOX
OR 92086A01
T27 M82000189-903A 1 ELECTRICAL CORD
OR M82000189-906
T38 M82000189-905 1 ELECTRICAL CORD

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-018-A01 1000 FIGURE 1004
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-021-A01 1000 FIGURE 1007 SHEET 1/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-021-A01 1000 FIGURE 1007 SHEET 2/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-022-A01 1000 FIGURE 1008
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-023-A01 1000 FIGURE 1009
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-024-A01 1000 FIGURE 1010
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-025-A01 1000 FIGURE 1011
SUBTASK-36-11-51-440-010-A01 7000 ADJUSTMENT OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-440-010-B01 7000 ADJUSTMENT OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)
TASK-36-11-51-820-802-A01 8000 TIGHTENING TORQUES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 1022

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-220-001-A01
(1) Visual Check

(a) Make sure that the unit is complete and not damaged and that the details given on the
identification plate are correct.

(b) Do a check of the unit for evidence of impact damage, in particular at location of valve
body, pneumatic actuator body and regulator body.

(c) With butterfly valve in the fully closed position, make sure that the butterfly valve sealing
rings are evenly spread on the periphery of the valve body bore.

(d) With the butterfly valve in the open position, do a check of the valve body bore for
evidence of scratches, scoring.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-750-001-A01
(2) Insulation Resistance Test (010)

(a) With the electrical cord (T38), apply a 50 VDC voltage between connector contact pins
connected together and any points of valve body and make sure that insulation resistance
is greater than 100 M .

SUBTASK 36-11-51-750-002-A01
(3) Continuity Test (010)

(a) Measure the continuity between any two points of the unit.

(b) The continuity resistance must be less than or equal to 20 m .

SUBTASK 36-11-51-750-003-A01
(4) Position Indication Test (020)
(Ref. Fig. 1007 Sheet 1 and 2)

(a) Connect the valve electrical connector to the signal indication box (Ref. Fig. 1007 Sheet 1
and 2).

(b) Put the butterfly valve in the required position using a 19 mm (0.748 in) thin spanner.

(c) Make sure that the signal indication is correct as per the table that follows:

INDICATION BOX SIGNAL LAMPS

BUTTERFLY
EFFECTIVITY "NOT
VALVE "OPEN" "NOT OPEN" "CLOSED"
TYPE CLOSED"
POSITION O NO C
NC
FULLY CLOSED ALL TYPES OFF ON OFF ON
≤
INTERMEDIATE OFF ON ON OFF
6713D020000
(CONTROL
FUNCTION) ≥
ON OFF ON OFF
6713D040000
FULLY OPEN ALL TYPES ON OFF ON OFF

36-11-51 Page 1023

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(d) If test is not satisfactory, do the adjustment of the microswitches (Ref. Subtask
36-11-51-440-010-A01 or Ref. Subtask 36-11-51-440-010-B01).

(e) Push the contact fully and make sure it moves smoothly and makes a "click" sound.

(f) Release the contact; make sure it moves smoothly and makes a "click" sound in the
other way.

36-11-51 Page 1024

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Valve Position Indication

For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 1007/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-021-A01

36-11-51 Page 1025

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Valve Position Indication

For P/N ≥ 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 1007/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-021-A01

36-11-51 Page 1026

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-005-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(5) Opening - Closing Test (070)

(Ref. Fig. 1008)

NOTE: Do the functional tests at normal ambient temperature: 25 C ± 20 C (41 F to 113 F).

(a) Install the unit on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1008).

NOTE: The dimensions A and B in Fig. 1008 are given for information only. They
can be adapted to obtain the P1 upstream pressure equal to 4 (+0/+0,5) bar
rel. (58 to 65 psig).

(b) Apply a 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.40 to 26.10 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) Open V1 to select the valve closing position and make sure that the valve closes after
2,5 seconds maxi.

(d) Make sure of the correct indication of the microswitch: closed indicator light on. Close
the valve two times manually.

(e) Close V1 to select the valve opening position.

(f) Make sure that the valve opens after 4 seconds maxi and that the open indicator light is on.

(g) Apply a 6 ± 0,1 bar rel. (85.65 to 88.45 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(h) Open V1 to select the valve closing position.

(i) Make sure that the valve closes after 2 seconds maxi.

(j) Make sure of the correct indications of microswitches: "Closed" indicator light on. "Not
closed" light off."

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-005-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(6) Opening - Closing Test (070)

(Ref. Fig. 1008)

NOTE: Do the functional tests at normal ambient temperature: 25 C ± 20 C (41 F to 113 F).

(a) Install the unit on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1008).

NOTE: The dimensions A and B in Fig. 1008 are given for information only. They
can be adapted to obtain the P1 upstream pressure equal to 4 (+0/+0,5) bar
rel. (58 to 65 psig).

(b) Apply a 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.40 to 26.10 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) Open V1 to select the valve closing position and make sure that the valve closes after
2,5 seconds maxi.

36-11-51 Page 1027

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(d) Make sure of the correct indication of the microswitch: closed indicator light on. Close
the valve two times manually.

(e) Close V1 to select the valve opening position.

(f) Make sure that the valve opens after 4 seconds maxi (with a P2 downstream pressure
greater than 1,2 bar rel. (17.4 psig) and that the "not closed" indicator light is on. Open
the valve two times manually.

(g) Apply a 6 ± 0,1 bar rel. (85.65 to 88.45 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(h) Open V1 to select the valve closing position.

(i) Make sure that the valve closes after 2 seconds maxi.

(j) Make sure of the correct indications of microswitches: "Closed" indicator light on. "Not
closed" light off.

36-11-51 Page 1028

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Functional Test Bench

Figure 1008/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-022-A01

36-11-51 Page 1029

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-006-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(7) Regulation test (040)

(Ref. Fig. 1008)

(a) Install the unit on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1008).

(b) Apply a 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.4 to 26.1 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) "Open" indicator light is on.

(d) Gradually increase P1 upstream pressure and note its value for which valve begins to
close ("Open" indicator light Off). This value must be less than or equal to 2,55 bar
rel. (37 psig).

(e) Gradually decrease P1 upstream pressure and note its value for which valve reaches
the full open position ("Open" indicator light on). This value must be greater than or
equal to 1,9 bar rel. (27.55 psig).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-006-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(8) Regulation Test (040)

(Ref. Fig. 1008)

(a) Install the unit on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1008).

(b) Apply a 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.4 to 26.1 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) |P1 upstream pressure - P2 downstream pressure| differential pressure is less than or
equal to 100 mbar (1.45 psi).

(d) Gradually increase P1 upstream pressure and note its value for which valve begins to
close (with |P1 - P2| differential pressure between 10 and 50 mbar (0.145 to 0.725 psi)).
This value must be less than or equal to 2,55 bar rel. (37 psig).

(e) Gradually decrease P1 upstream pressure and note its value for which valve reaches
the full open position (with |P1 - P2| differential pressure less than or equal to 50 mbar
(0.725 psi)). This value must be greater than or equal to 1,90 bar rel. (27.55 psig).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-007-A01
(9) Pressure Control Test (050)

(a) Gradually increase P1 upstream pressure up to 4 ± 0,1 bar rel. (56.55 to 59.45 psig)
and make sure that P2a downstream pressure ranges between 2,2 and 2,65 bar rel.
(31.9 to 38.43 psig).

(b) Gradually increase P1 upstream pressure up to 7 (0/-0,3) bar rel. (101.52 to 97.17 psig)
and make sure that P2 downstream pressure ranges between 2,2 and 2,65 bar rel.
(31.90 to 38.43 psig).

36-11-51 Page 1030

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(c) Gradually decrease P1 upstream pressure down to 4 ± 0,1 bar rel. (56.55 to 59.45 psig)
and make sure that P2b downstream pressure ranges between 2,2 and 2,65 bar rel.
(31.9 to 38.43 psig).

(d) Torque the threaded plug (02A-180) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-008-A01
(10) Closure with no Pressure (053)

(a) Interrupt the pressure supply of the functional test bench.

(b) When the P1 upstream pressure is equal to 0 bar, make sure that the valve is closed: the
"CLOSED" indicator light must be ON.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-009-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(11) Operation through the Ground Test Union (055)

(Ref. Fig. 1009)

(a) Prepare the unit test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1009).

(b) Apply a P1 test pressure between 0,7 and 1 bar rel. (10.15 and 14.5 psig).

NOTE: The valve may open with a P1 pressure less than 0,7 bar rel. (10.15 psig).

(c) Make sure that the valve is open: the "Open" indicator light must be on.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-009-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(12) Operation through the Ground Test Union (055)

(Ref. Fig. 1009)

(a) Prepare the unit test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1009).

(b) Apply a P1 test pressure between 0,7 and 1 bar rel. (10.15 and 14.5 psig).

NOTE: The valve may open with a P1 pressure less than 0,7 bar rel. (10.15 psig).

(c) Make sure that the valve is open, the manual control must be in the open position.

36-11-51 Page 1031

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Operation through the Ground Test Union

Figure 1009/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-023-A01

36-11-51 Page 1032

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-010-A01
(13) Locking in the Closed Position (057)
(Ref. Fig. 1009)

(a) Keep the unit test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1009).

(b) Remove the knurled screw (01-130) from the banjo tube (01-220).

(c) Secure it to manual control (04-010) to lock the unit into the closed position.

(d) Apply a P1 test pressure between 0,7 and 1 bar rel. (10.15 and 14.5 psig).

(e) Make sure that the valve remains in the closed position: the "Closed" indicator light
must be on.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-011-A01
For P/N ≤ 6713D050000

(14) Overpressure Test (060)

(Ref. Fig. 1010)

(a) Remove the unit from the functional test bench and install it on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1010).

(b) Install complete unit on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1010) and do the tests of the Overpressure
Valve S/A (01-223) as follows:

NOTE: If required values of following tests cannot be achieved, modify the number of
shims (05-030) of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) but do not remove it
from the unit.

(c) Gradually increase the (P1) pressure until the (P2) pressure drops to a value less than
150 mbar rel. (2.175 psig).

(d) Repeat the above step three times and note the average value of the P1 pressure which
must be between 7,9 and 8,45 bar rel. (114.55 to 122.525 psig).

(e) Decrease the P1 pressure slowly (20 to 30 mbar/s) (0.29 to 0.435 psi/second) from a
9 (-0/-0,1) bar rel. (129.05 to 130.5 psi) until the overpressure valve opens with a P2
pressure greater than 6 bar rel. (86.03 psig).

(f) Repeat the above step three times and note the average value of the (P1) pressure
which must be ≥ 7,1 bar rel. (103 psig).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-011-B01
For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(15) Overpressure Test (060)

(Ref. Fig. 1010)

(a) Remove the unit from the functional test bench and install it on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1010).

36-11-51 Page 1033

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Install complete unit on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1010) and do the tests of the Overpressure
Valve S/A (01-223) as follows:

NOTE: If required values of following tests cannot be achieved, modify the number of
shims (05-030) of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) but do not remove it
from the unit.

(c) Gradually increase the (P1) pressure until the (P2) pressure drops to a value less than
150 mbar rel. (2.175 psig).

(d) Repeat the above step three times and note the average value of the P1 pressure which
must be between 8,7 and 9,1 bar rel. (126.15 to 131.95 psig).

(e) Decrease the P1 pressure slowly (20 to 30 mbar/s (0.29 to 0.435 psi/second)) from a
9 (-0/-0,1) bar rel. (129.05 to 130.5 psig) until the overpressure valve opens with a P2
pressure greater than 6 bar rel. (86.03 psig).

(f) Repeat the above step three times and note the average value of the (P1) pressure
which must be ≥ 7,8 bar rel. (113.1 psig).

36-11-51 Page 1034

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Test
Figure 1010/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-024-A01

36-11-51 Page 1035

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-012-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(16) Min-Opening Pressure Test (065)

(Ref. Fig. 1004)

(a) Install the unit on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1004).

(b) Gradually apply P1 upstream pressure (20 to 50 mbar/s) and make sure that the valve
reaches the full open position for P1 pressure less than or equal to 550 mbar rel.
(7.97 psig). "Open" indicator light is on.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-012-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(17) Min-Opening Pressure Test (065)

(Ref. Fig. 1004)

(a) Install the unit on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1004).

(b) Gradually apply P1 upstream pressure (20 to 50 mbar/s) and make sure that the valve
reaches the full open position for P1 pressure less than or equal to 550 mbar rel.
(7.97 psig). The manual control must be in the open position.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-001-A01
(18) Internal Leakage Test (080)
(Ref. Fig. 1011)

(a) Open (V1) and (V2) valves.

(b) Gradually apply a 10 ± 0,1 bar rel. (143.55 to 146.45 psig) upstream test pressure read
on P1 metal dial gage.

(c) Make sure that the Q1 leakage rate is less than or equal to 11,1 g/s (555 l/min)
(19.60 cu.ft/min).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-002-A01
(19) External Leakage Test (090)
(Ref. Fig. 1011)

(a) Open (V1) and close (V2) valves and disconnect the Q1 flowmeter.

(b) Apply a 6,5 ± 0,1 bar rel. (92.8 to 95.7 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) Make sure that the leakage read on (Q2) flowmeter is less than or equal to 3,2 g/s or
150 l/min (5.29 cu.ft/min).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 1036

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Leakage Test Bench

Figure 1011/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-025-A01

36-11-51 Page 1037

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-700-803-A01
4. Static Test Procedure of Complete Unit

A. Reason for the Job

CAUTION: DO THE STATIC TESTS OF THE COMPLETE UNIT THAT FOLLOW ONLY WHEN
THE COMPLETE UPPER AND LOWER BEARINGS OF THE VALVE BODY (03-250)
HAVE BEEN REPLACED BY NEW ONES (REF. TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01
PARA. (I)).

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T23 M82100020-060A 1 TEST TOOL
OR M82100020-010A
T26 92008A010000 1 POSITION INDICATION BOX
OR 92086A01
T27 M82000189-903A 1 ELECTRICAL CORD
OR M82000189-906
T37 M82100055-030A 1 TEST TOOL
T38 M82000189-905 1 ELECTRICAL CORD
T39 SBE1693 1 TEST TOOL
T41 M82000226 1 TEST TOOL

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-018-A01 1000 FIGURE 1004
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-019-A01 1000 FIGURE 1005
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-021-A01 1000 FIGURE 1007 SHEET 1/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-021-A01 1000 FIGURE 1007 SHEET 2/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-023-A01 1000 FIGURE 1009
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-024-A01 1000 FIGURE 1010
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-025-A01 1000 FIGURE 1011
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-026-A01 1000 FIGURE 1012
SUBTASK-36-11-51-440-010-A01 7000 ADJUSTMENT OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)

36-11-51 Page 1038

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

SUBTASK-36-11-51-440-010-B01 7000 ADJUSTMENT OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)
TASK-36-11-51-820-802-A01 8000 TIGHTENING TORQUES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-220-002-A01
(1) Visual Check

(a) Make sure that the unit is complete and not damaged and that the details given on the
identification plate are correct.

(b) Do a check of the unit for evidence of impact damage, in particular at location of valve
body, pneumatic actuator body and regulator body.

(c) With butterfly valve in the fully closed position, make sure that the butterfly valve sealing
rings are evenly spread on the periphery of the valve body bore.

(d) With the butterfly valve in the open position, do a check of the valve body bore for
evidence of scratches, scoring.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-750-004-A01
(2) Insulation Resistance Test (010)

(a) With the electrical cord (T38) apply a 50 VDC voltage between connector contact pins
connected together and any point of the valve body and make sure that the insulation
resistance is greater than 100 M .

SUBTASK 36-11-51-750-005-A01
(3) Continuity Test

(a) Measure the continuity between any two points of the unit.

(b) The continuity resistance must be less than or equal to 20 m .

36-11-51 Page 1039

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-750-006-A01
(4) Position Indication Test (020)
(Ref. Fig. 1007 Sheet 1 and 2)

(a) Connect the valve electrical connector to the signal indication box (Ref. Fig. 1007 Sheet 1
and 2).

(b) Put the butterfly valve in the required position using a 19 mm (0.748 in) thin spanner.

(c) Make sure that the signal indication is correct as per the table that follows:

INDICATION BOX SIGNAL LAMPS

BUTTERFLY
EFFECTIVITY "NOT
VALVE "OPEN" "NOT OPEN" "CLOSED"
TYPE CLOSED"
POSITION O NO C
NC
FULLY CLOSED ALL TYPES OFF ON OFF ON
≤
INTERMEDIATE OFF ON ON OFF
6713D020000
(CONTROL
FUNCTION) ≥
ON OFF ON OFF
6713D040000
FULLY OPEN ALL TYPES ON OFF ON OFF

(d) If test is not satisfactory, do the adjustment of the microswitches (Ref. Subtask
36-11-51-440-010-A01 or Ref. Subtask 36-11-51-440-010-B01).

(e) Push the contact fully and make sure it moves smoothly and makes a "click" sound.

(f) Release the contact; make sure it moves smoothly and makes a "click" sound in the
other way.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-013-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(5) Opening - Closing Test of the Valve (070)

(Ref. Fig. 1005)

NOTE: The functional tests must be done at normal ambient temperature: 25 C ± 20 C

(41 F to 113 F).

(a) Install the unit on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1005).

(b) Apply a 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.40 to 26.10 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) Open - Close the valve manually two times by air venting the valve with test tool (T39).

(d) During each operation, make sure that the valve opens after 3 seconds maxi, then make
sure that the valve closes after 3 seconds maxi.

(e) Make sure of the correct indications of microswitches:

– Valve of test tool (T39) opening: "Closed" indicator light on

– Valve of test tool (T39) closing: "Open" indicator light on.

36-11-51 Page 1040

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(f) Apply a 6 ± 0,3 bar rel. (82.65 to 91.35 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(g) Open the test tool (T39) to select the valve closing position.

(h) Make sure that the valve closes after 3 seconds maxi.

(i) Make sure of the correct indications of the microswitches:

– "Closed" indicator light on

– "Not closed" light off.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-013-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(6) Opening - Closing Test of the Valve (070)

(Ref. Fig. 1005)

NOTE: The functional tests must be done at normal ambient temperature: 25 C ± 20 C

(41 F to 113 F).

(a) Install the unit on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1005).

(b) Apply a 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.40 to 26.10 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) Open - Close the valve manually two times by air venting the valve with test tool (T39).

(d) During each operation, make sure that the valve opens after 3 seconds maxi, then make
sure that the valve closes after 3 seconds maxi.

(e) Make sure of the correct indications of microswitches:

– Valve of test tool (T39) opening: "Closed" indicator light on

– Valve of test tool (T39) closing: "Not closed" indicator light on, manual control in
open position.

(f) Apply a 6 ± 0,3 bar rel. (82.65 to 91.35 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(g) Open the test tool (T39) to select the valve closing position.

(h) Make sure that the valve closes after 3 seconds maxi.

(i) Make sure of the correct indications of the microswitches:

– "Closed" indicator light on

– "Not closed" light off.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-014-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(7) Regulation Test of the Valve (040)

(Ref. Fig. 1005)

(a) Install the unit on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1005).

36-11-51 Page 1041

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Apply a 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.40 to 26.10 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) Make sure that the "open" indicator light is on.

(d) Gradually increase P1 upstream pressure and note its value for which valve reaches the
full closing position ("closed" indicator light on). This P1 value must be less than or
equal to 2,55 bar rel. (36.98 psig).

(e) Gradually decrease P1 upstream pressure and note its value for which valve reaches
the full open position ("open" indicator light on). This P1 value must be greater than or
equal to 2,1 bar rel. (30.45 psig).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-014-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(8) Regulation Test of the Valve (040)

(Ref. Fig. 1005)

(a) Install the unit on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1005).

(b) Apply a 1,5 ± 0,3 bar rel. (17.40 to 26.10 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) Make sure that the manual control is in open position.

(d) Gradually increase P1 upstream pressure and note its value for which valve reaches the
full closing position ("closed" indicator light on). This P1 value must be less than or
equal to 2,55 bar rel. (36.98 psig).

(e) Gradually decrease P1 upstream pressure and note its value for which valve reaches
the full open position (Manual control in open position). This P1 value must be greater
than or equal to 2,1 bar rel. (30.45 psig).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-015-A01
(9) Pressure Control Test (050)
(Ref. Fig. 1012)

(a) Install the unit on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1012).

(b) Gradually increase P1 upstream pressure up to 4 ± 0,1 bar rel. (56.55 to 59.45 psig)
and make sure that P2a regulated pressure ranges between 2,5 and 2,65 bar rel.
(36.25 to 38.43 psig).

(c) Gradually increase P1 upstream pressure up to 7 ± 0,1 bar rel. (100.05 to 102.95 psig)
and make sure that P2 regulated pressure ranges between 2,5 and 2,65 bar rel. (36.25 to
38.43 psig).

(d) Gradually decrease P1 upstream pressure down to 4 ± 0,1 bar rel. (56.55 to 59.45 psig)
and make sure that P2b regulated pressure ranges between 2,5 and 2,65 bar rel.
(36.25 to 38.43 psig).

(e) Torque the threaded plug (02A-180) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

36-11-51 Page 1042

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Pressure Control Test

Figure 1012/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-026-A01

36-11-51 Page 1043

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-016-A01
(10) Closure with no Pressure (053)

(a) Interrupt the pressure supply of the functional test bench.

(b) When the P1 upstream pressure is equal to 0 bar, make sure that the valve is closed: the
"CLOSED" indicator light must be ON.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-017-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(11) Operation through the Ground Test Union (055)

(Ref. Fig. 1009)

(a) Prepare the unit test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1009).

(b) Apply a P1 test pressure between 0,7 and 1 bar rel. (10.15 and 14.5 psig).

NOTE: The valve may open with a P1 pressure less than 0,7 bar rel. (10.15 psig).

(c) Make sure that the valve is open: the "Open" indicator light must be on.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-017-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(12) Operation through the Ground Test Union (055)

(Ref. Fig. 1009)

(a) Prepare the unit test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1009).

(b) Apply a P1 test pressure between 0,7 and 1 bar rel. (10.15 and 14.5 psig).

NOTE: The valve may open with a P1 pressure less than 0,7 bar rel. (10.15 psig).

(c) Make sure that the valve is open, the manual control must be in the open position.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-018-A01
(13) Locking in the Closed Position (057)
(Ref. Fig. 1009)

(a) Keep the unit test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1009).

(b) Remove the knurled screw (01-130) from the banjo tube (01-220).

(c) Secure it to manual control (04-010) to lock the unit into the closed position.

(d) Apply a P1 test pressure between 0,7 and 1 bar rel. (10.15 and 14.5 psig).

(e) Make sure that the valve remains in the closed position: the "Closed" indicator light
must be on.

36-11-51 Page 1044

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-019-A01
For P/N ≤ 6713D050000

(14) Overpressure Test (060)

(Ref. Fig. 1010)

(a) Remove the unit from the functional test bench and install it on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1010).

(b) Install complete unit on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1010) and do the tests of the Overpressure
Valve S/A (01-223) as follows:

NOTE: If required values of following tests cannot be achieved, modify the number of
shims (05-030) of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) but do not remove it
from the unit.

(c) Gradually increase the (P1) pressure until the (P2) pressure drops to a value less than
150 mbar rel. (2.175 psig).

(d) Repeat the above step three times and note the average value of the P1 pressure which
must be between 7,9 and 8,45 bar rel. (114.55 to 122.525 psig).

(e) Decrease the P1 pressure slowly (20 to 30 mbar/s (0.29 to 0.435 psi/second)) from a
9 (-0/-0,1) bar rel. (129.05 to 130.5 psig) until the overpressure valve opens with a P2
pressure greater than 6 bar rel. (86.03 psig).

(f) Repeat the above step three times and note the average value of the (P1) pressure
which must be ≥ 7,1 bar rel. (103 psig).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-019-B01
For P/N ≥ 6713D060000

(15) Overpressure Test (060)

(Ref. Fig. 1010)

(a) Remove the unit from the functional test bench and install it on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1010).

(b) Install complete unit on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1010) and do the tests of the Overpressure
Valve S/A (01-223) as follows:

NOTE: If required values of following tests cannot be achieved, modify the number of
shims (05-030) of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) but do not remove it
from the unit.

(c) Gradually increase the (P1) pressure until the (P2) pressure drops to a value less than
150 mbar rel. (2.175 psig).

(d) Repeat the above step three times and note the average value of the P1 pressure which
must be between 8,7 and 9,1 bar rel. (126.15 to 131.95 psig).

(e) Decrease the P1 pressure slowly (20 to 30 mbar/s (0.29 to 0.435 psi/second)) from a
9 (-0/-0,1) bar rel. (129.05 to 130.5 psig) until the overpressure valve opens with a P2
pressure greater than 6 bar rel. (86.03 psig).

36-11-51 Page 1045

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(f) Repeat the above step three times and note the average value of the (P1) pressure
which must be ≥ 7,8 bar rel. (113.1 psig).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-020-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(16) Min-Opening Pressure Test (065)

(Ref. Fig. 1004)

(a) Install the unit on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1004).

(b) Gradually apply P1 upstream pressure (20 to 50 mbar/s) and make sure that the valve
reaches the full open position for P1 pressure less than or equal to 550 mbar rel.
(7.97 psig). "Open" indicator light is on.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-020-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(17) Min-Opening Pressure Test (065)

(Ref. Fig. 1004)

(a) Install the unit on test set-up (Ref. Fig. 1004).

(b) Gradually apply P1 upstream pressure (20 to 50 mbar/s) and make sure that the valve
reaches the full open position for P1 pressure less than or equal to 550 mbar rel.
(7.97 psig). The manual control must be in the open position.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-003-A01
(18) Internal Leakage Test (080)
(Ref. Fig. 1011)

(a) Open (V1) and (V2) valves.

(b) Gradually apply a 10 ± 0,1 bar rel. (143.55 to 146.45 psig) upstream test pressure read
on P1 metal dial gage.

(c) Make sure that the Q1 leakage rate is less than or equal to 11,1 g/s (555 l/min)
(19.60 cu.ft/min).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-004-A01
(19) External Leakage Test (090)
(Ref. Fig. 1011)

(a) Open (V1) and close (V2) valves and disconnect the Q1 flowmeter.

(b) Apply a 6,5 ± 0,1 bar rel. (92.8 to 95.7 psig) P1 upstream pressure.

(c) Make sure that the leakage read on (Q2) flowmeter is less than or equal to 3,2 g/s or
150 l/min (5.29 cu.ft/min).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 1046

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-700-804-A01
5. Laboratory Test Procedure of the Regulator S/A Alone

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T01 OS22875D 1 TEST TOOL
T24 M65724265 1 TEST TOOL
OR M82000222
T36 M82100020-030 1 TEST TOOL
T37 M82100055-030A 1 TEST TOOL

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-027-A01 1000 FIGURE 1013 SHEET 1/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-027-A01 1000 FIGURE 1013 SHEET 2/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-028-A01 1000 FIGURE 1014
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-029-A01 1000 FIGURE 1015
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-030-A01 1000 FIGURE 1016
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-031-A01 1000 FIGURE 1017
TASK-36-11-51-820-802-A01 8000 TIGHTENING TORQUES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-021-A01
For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000, 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000 and
6713D050000 Amdt A

(1) Alignment of the Valve Seat (02A-600) with the Clapper (02A-540)
(Ref. Fig. 1013 Sheet 1)

(a) Install the Regulator S/A on the test tool (T01). Do not connect the upstream line
of the regulator.

(b) Apply a 8 bar rel. (116 psig) (P1) pressure to the coupling line of the Regulator S/A.

36-11-51 Page 1047

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(c) Loosen the threaded plug (02-460) by a quarter of a turn and torque it to the specified
value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-022-A01
(2) Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Opening Position (010B)
(Ref. Fig. 1013 Sheet 2)

(a) Connect the upstream line to the upstream connection.

(b) Apply a 2 bar rel. (29 psig) (P1) upstream pressure.

(c) Blank the coupling pressure union and the distribution clapper (02-220) outlet with the
test tool (T24).

(d) Make sure that the closing pressure outlet (Q1) leakage rate is less than or equal to
3 l/min (0.105 cu.ft/min).

36-11-51 Page 1048

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Alignment of the Valve Seat (02A-600) with the Clapper (02A-540) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 1013/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-027-A01

36-11-51 Page 1049

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Opening Position (Sheet 2 of 2)

Figure 1013/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-027-A01

36-11-51 Page 1050

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-023-A01
(3) Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Closing Position (020B)
(Ref. Fig. 1014)

(a) Air vent the coupling pressure connection.

(b) Apply a 2 bar rel. (29 psig) (P1) upstream pressure.

(c) Make sure that the opening pressure (Q1) flow rate is less than or equal to 2 l/min
(0.0706 cu.ft/min).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-024-A01
(4) Tightness test of the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) (030B)
(Ref. Fig. 1015)

(a) Air vent downstream pressure and closing pressure connections.

(b) Apply a 6 bar rel. (87 psig) (P1) upstream pressure.

(c) Make sure that the differential pressure between the opening pressure and the coupling
pressure is less than 30 mbar rel. (0.435 psig).

36-11-51 Page 1051

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Closing Position

Figure 1014/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-028-A01

36-11-51 Page 1052

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Tightness Test of the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460)

Figure 1015/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-029-A01

36-11-51 Page 1053

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-025-A01
(5) Opening Test of the Clapper (02A-220) (040B)
(Ref. Fig. 1016)

(a) The test tool (T24) will not be installed on test set-up when testing clapper (02A-220)
operation.

(b) Gradually apply a 2 bar rel. (29 psig) (P1) downstream pressure and make sure that (P2)
closing pressure is less than 0,1 bar rel. (1.45 psig).

(c) Gradually increase (P1) downstream pressure and note the value for which the clapper
(02A-220) opens. (P1) downstream pressure value must range between 2,45 and
2,55 bar rel. (35.50 to 37.00 psig).

NOTE: – If required values are not obtained, modify the number of shims (02A-190)
until correct values are achieved.
– At the end of the shim setting, pre-tighten the threaded plug (02A-180) to a
1 mdaN torque value (88.53 lbf.in). The final tightening to the required torque
value must be done at the end of the functional tests of the complete unit.
– Every time the threaded plug (02A-180) is removed, torque the nut (02A-227)
to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(d) Gradually increase (P1) downstream pressure to 3 bar rel. (43.5 psig); then, decrease it
and note its value for which clapper (02A-220) closes. (P1) downstream pressure value
must be greater than 2,1 bar rel. (30.45 psig).

(e) Install the test tool (T24) as illustrated on the test set-up on Fig. 1016.

(f) Apply a 3 bar rel. (43.51 psig) (P1) downstream pressure and make sure that (Q1) leak
through clapper (02A-220) air vent hole is effective and is less than or equal to 10 l/min
(0.35 cu.ft/min).

36-11-51 Page 1054

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Opening Test of the Clapper (02A-220)

Figure 1016/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-030-A01

36-11-51 Page 1055

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-026-A01
(6) Regulated Pressure Test (050B)
(Ref. Fig. 1017)

(a) Air vent downstream pressure and closing pressure connections.

(b) Adjust (P2) opening pressure value between 2,55 and 2,65 bar rel. (36.97 to 38.42 psig)
with the adjusting nut (02A-120) for the increasing and decreasing values of (P1) upstream
pressure supply that follow:

NOTE: IMPORTANT:

– FOR THE DECREASING VALUES, THE OPENING PRESSURE (P2)

VALUES MUST BE THE NEAREST POSSIBLE TO THE MAX VALUE.
– ON COMPLETION OF REGULATOR LABORATORY TESTS DO A CHECK
OF THE CORRECT TIGHTENING VALUE OF ALL ATTACHING PARTS (REF.
TO TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

– 4 to 6 bar rel. (58.01 to 87.02 psig)

– 6 to 9 bar rel. (87.02 to 130.53 psig)
– 9 to 6 bar rel. (130.53 to 87.02 psig)
– 6 to 4 bar rel. (87.02 to 58.01 psig).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 1056

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Regulated Pressure Test

Figure 1017/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-031-A01

36-11-51 Page 1057

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-810-802-A01
6. Fault Isolation of the Regulator S/A Alone

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-022-A01 1000 TIGHTNESS TEST OF THE CLAPPER
(02A-540) IN OPENING POSITION (010B)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-023-A01 1000 TIGHTNESS TEST OF THE CLAPPER
(02A-540) IN CLOSING POSITION (020B)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-024-A01 1000 TIGHTNESS TEST OF THE DIAPHRAGM
S/A (02-460) (030B)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-025-A01 1000 OPENING TEST OF THE CLAPPER
(02A-220) (040B)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-026-A01 1000 REGULATED PRESSURE TEST (050B)
PGBLK-36-11-51-4000 4000 CLEANING
SUBTASK-36-11-51-440-013-A01 7000 ASSEMBLY OF THE CLOSING S/A
TASK-36-11-51-820-802-A01 8000 TIGHTENING TORQUES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 1058

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

D. Procedure

FAULT PROBABLE REASON REMEDIAL ACTION

1. Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Opening Position (010B) (Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-780-022-A01)
Closing pressure 1. Closing S/A
outlet leakage rate
The clapper (02A-540) is seized in closed Clean (Ref. to CLEANING) or change
greater than 3 l/min
position, in the valve body (02A-530) the clapper (02A-540) and the valve
(0.105 cu.ft/min)
seat (02A-600).
The centering of the seat (02A-600) is Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-440-
defective. 013-A01).
The springs (02A-510) or (02A-545) are Change the springs (02A-510) or
aged. (02A-545).
The threaded ring (02A-520) is loose. Torque to the specified value (Ref. to
TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).
2. Tightness Test of the Clapper (02A-540) in Closing Position (020B) (Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-780-023-A01)
Opening pressure 1. Closing S/A
outlet leakage rate
The clapper (02A-540) is seized in open Clean (Ref. to CLEANING) or change
greater than 2 l/min
position. the clapper (02A-540) and the valve
(0.0702 cu.ft/min)
seat (02A-600).
The Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) is damaged. Change the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460).
The spring (02A-510) or (02A-545) is aged. Torque to the specified value (Ref. to
TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).
The shim setting of the Closing S/A is Adjust the shim setting of the
defective. Closing S/A (Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-440-013-A01).
3. Tightness Test of the Diaphragm S/A (02-460) (030B) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-024-A01)
P greater than 1. Closing S/A
30 mbar rel. (0.435
The Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) is defective. Change the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460).
psig).
The preformed packing (02A-440) is Change the preformed packing
damaged. (02A-440).
4. Opening Test of the Clapper (02A-220) (040B) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-025-A01)
Distribution S/A 1. Distribution S/A
function defective
The shim setting is defective. Adjust the number of shims (02A-190).
The clapper (02A-220) seized into the Clean (Ref. to CLEANING) or change
support (02A-270) or the sealing rings the clapper (02A-220) and the support
(02A-223) is damaged. (02A-270) or change the sealing rings
(02A-223).
The spring (02A-210) is aged. Change the spring (02A-210).

36-11-51 Page 1059

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FAULT PROBABLE REASON REMEDIAL ACTION

The threaded plug (02A-180) is loose. Torque to the specified value (Ref. to
TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).
5. Regulated Pressure Test (050B) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-026-A01)
Regulation S/A 1. Regulation S/A
function defective
There is a drift in the shim setting of the Adjust the nut (02A-120).
adjusting nut (02A-120).
The bellows (02A-070) is damaged. Change the bellows (02A-070).
The spring (02A-090) is aged. Change the spring (02A-090).
The clapper (02A-160) is seized into the Clean or change the clapper (02A-160)
adjusting screw (02A-130). and the adjusting screw (02A-130).
The threaded ring (02A-227) is loose. Torque to the specified value (Ref. to
TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).
The preformed packings (02A-280) and Change the preformed packings
(02A-050) are defective. (02A-280) and (02A-050).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 1060

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

DISASSEMBLY

TASK 36-11-51-010-801-A01
1. Removal of the Pneumatic Connections

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and preformed packings on disassembly. You must discard
the washers, the nuts and the screws if they are damaged.

NOTE: Important: Always discard and replace the unions (01-020A) in the case of any defect of the
thread that causes seizing (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01)

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-001-A01
For all P/N except 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(1) Removal of the Pneumatic Connections

(a) Cut off and remove the lockwire (01-040) from the union filter (01-050).

(b) Loosen and remove the union filter (01-050) with the seals (01-060).

(c) Loosen and remove the banjo screw (01-080) with its preformed packing (01-090).

(d) Remove the banjo tube (01-100) with the preformed packing (01-090).

(e) Cut off and remove the lockwire from the nut (01-105).

(f) Remove the metal seal (01-060).

(g) Cut off and remove the lockwire from the plug (03-249).

(h) Loosen and remove the banjo screw (01-160) with the preformed packings (01-180).

(i) Then remove the banjo tube (01-220) with its seal (01-210), and the two preformed
packings (01-180).

36-11-51 Page 3001

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(j) Remove the banjo union (01-170) with the preformed packing (01-180) and the washer
(01-190).

(k) Loosen and remove the screw (01-014).

(l) Remove the spacer (01-016) and the locking plate (01-012).

(m) Loosen and remove the union (01-020) with its seal (01-030) from the Regulator S/A
(01-230).

(n) Loosen and remove the banjo screw (01-024) and remove the banjo tube (01-026)
with four preformed packings (01-028).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-001-B01
For P/N 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(2) Removal of the Pneumatic Connections

(a) Cut off and remove the lockwire (01-040) from the union filter (01-050).

(b) Loosen and remove the union filter (01-050) with the seals (01-060).

(c) Loosen and remove the banjo screw (01-080) with its preformed packing (01-090).

(d) Remove the banjo tube (01-100) with the preformed packing (01-090).

(e) Loosen and remove the nut (01-105) or the threaded cap (01-105B) and remove the
metal seal (01-060).

(f) Cut off and remove the lockwire from the plug (03-249).

(g) Loosen and remove the banjo screw (01-160) with the preformed packings (01-180).

(h) Then remove the banjo tube (01-220) with its seal (01-210), and the two preformed
packings (01-180).

(i) Remove the banjo union (01-170) with the preformed packing (01-180) and the washer
(01-190).

(j) Loosen and remove the screw (01-014).

(k) Remove the spacer (01-016) and the locking plate (01-012).

(l) Loosen and remove the union (01-020) with its seal (01-030) from the Regulator S/A
(01-230).

(m) Loosen and remove the banjo screw (01-024) and remove the banjo tube (01-026)
with four preformed packings (01-028).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 3002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-010-802-A01
2. Removal of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) and Trailing Edge Probe (01-228)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-002-A01
For all P/N except 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(1) Preliminary Operations

(a) Cut off and remove the lockwire from the nut (01-105).

(b) Remove the metal seal (01-060).

(c) Cut off and remove the lockwire from the plug (03-249).

(d) Loosen and remove the banjo screw (01-160) with the preformed packings (01-180).

(e) Then remove the banjo tube (01-220) with its seal (01-210), and the two preformed
packings (01-180).

(f) Remove the banjo union (01-170) with the preformed packing (01-180) and the washer
(01-190).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-002-B01
For P/N 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(2) Preliminary Operations

(a) Loosen and remove the nut (01-105) or the threaded cap (01-105B).

(b) Remove the metal seal (01-060).

(c) Cut off and remove the lockwire from the plug (03-249).

(d) Loosen and remove the banjo screw (01-160) with the preformed packings (01-180).

(e) Then remove the banjo tube (01-220) with its seal (01-210), and the two preformed
packings (01-180).

(f) Remove the banjo union (01-170) with the preformed packing (01-180) and the washer
(01-190).

36-11-51 Page 3003

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

D. Procedure

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and preformed packings on disassembly. You must discard
the washers, the nuts and the screws if they are damaged.

NOTE: Important: Always discard and replace the unions (01-020A) in the case of any defect of the
thread that causes seizing (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01)

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-003-A01
(1) Removal of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) and Trailing Edge Probe (01-228)

(a) Loosen and remove the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) with its metal seal (01-226).

(b) Loosen and remove the trailing edge probe (01-228) from the valve body (04-340).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 3004

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-040-801-A01
3. Disassembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up information

(1) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T22 M65724170B 1 SPECIAL WRENCH
T45 M65725387 1 SPECIAL TOOL

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
TASK-36-11-51-010-801-A01 3000 REMOVAL OF THE PNEUMATIC
CONNECTIONS
TASK-36-11-51-010-802-A01 3000 REMOVAL OF THE OVERPRESSURE
VALVE S/A (01-223) AND TRAILING
EDGE PROBE (01-228)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-004-A01
(1) Preliminary Operations

(a) Remove the pneumatic connections (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-010-801-A01).

(b) Remove the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) and trailing edge probe (01-228) (Ref. to
TASK 36-11-51-010-802-A01).

D. Procedure

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and preformed packings on disassembly. You must discard
the washers, the nuts and the screws if they are damaged.

NOTE: Important: Always discard and replace the unions (01-020A) in the case of any defect of the
thread that causes seizing (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01)

36-11-51 Page 3005

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-001-A01
For all P/N except 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(1) Disassembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223)

(a) Remove the retaining ring (05-010) from the valve body (05-090).

(b) Remove the centering guide (05-020), the shims (05-030) and the spring (05-040).

(c) Remove the centering guide (05-050).

(d) Loosen and remove the nut (05-080) with the special wrench (T22) to maintain the
threaded clapper (05-060).

(e) Then remove the threaded clapper (05-060).

(f) Remove the clapper (05-070).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-001-B01
For P/N 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(2) Disassembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223)

(a) Remove the retaining ring (05-010) from the valve body (05-090).

(b) Remove the centering guide (05-020), the shims (05-030) and the spring (05-040).

(c) Remove the centering guide (05-050).

(d) Loosen and remove nut (05-080) with the special tool (T45).

(e) Then remove the centering axle (05-050B).

(f) Remove the clapper (05-070).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 3006

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-010-803-A01
4. Removal of the Regulator S/A (01-230)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
TASK-36-11-51-010-801-A01 3000 REMOVAL OF THE PNEUMATIC
CONNECTIONS
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-005-A01
(1) Preliminary Operations

(a) Remove the pneumatic connections (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-010-801-A01).

D. Procedure

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and preformed packings on disassembly. You must discard
the washers, the nuts and the screws if they are damaged.

NOTE: Important: Always discard and replace the unions (01-020A) in the case of any defect of the
thread that causes seizing (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01)

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-006-A01
(1) Removal of the Regulator S/A (01-230)

(a) Loosen and remove the screw (01-250) with its washer (01-270).

(b) Loosen and remove the two screws (01-240).

(c) Remove the Regulator S/A (01-230) with its preformed packings (01-280) and (01-290).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 3007

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-040-802-A01
5. Disassembly of the Regulator S/A (01-230)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up information

(1) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T04 OS22910 1 SPECIAL TOOL
OR M65724178

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
TASK-36-11-51-010-803-A01 3000 REMOVAL OF THE REGULATOR S/A
(01-230)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-007-A01
(1) Preliminary Operations

(a) Remove the Regulator S/A (01-230) (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-010-803-A01).

D. Procedure

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and preformed packings on disassembly. You must discard
the washers, the nuts and the screws if they are damaged.

NOTE: Important: Always discard and replace the unions (01-020A) in the case of any defect of the
thread that causes seizing (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01)

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-008-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(1) Regulation S/A

(a) Loosen and remove the four screws (02A-020) and the two screws (02A-030) with the
washers (02A-040).

WARNING: THE TENSION OF THE SPRING (02-090) BEING QUITE STRONG, HOLD THE
COVER (02A-010) FIRMLY BY HAND WHILE YOU LOOSEN THE SCREWS
(02A-020) AND (02A-030).

36-11-51 Page 3008

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Remove the cover (02A-010) with its preformed packings (02A-050), (02A-060).

(c) Remove in sequence the bellows (02A-070B), the guide (02A-080), the centering guide
(02A-085) and the spring (02A-090B).

(d) Loosen and remove the adjusting nut (02A-120).

(e) Loosen and remove three screws (02A-140) and remove the adjusting screw (02A-130)
with the clapper (02A-160), the sealing rings (02A-163) and the stop (02A-167).

(f) Remove the clapper (02A-160), the stop (02A-167) and the sealing rings (02A-163) from
the adjusting screw (02A-130).

(g) Remove the spring (02A-175).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-008-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(2) Regulation S/A

(a) Loosen and remove the four screws (02A-020) and the two screws (02A-030) with the
washers (02A-040).

WARNING: THE TENSION OF THE SPRING (02-090) BEING QUITE STRONG, HOLD THE
COVER (02A-010) FIRMLY BY HAND WHILE YOU LOOSEN THE SCREWS
(02A-020) AND (02A-030).

(b) Remove the cover (02A-010) with its preformed packings (02A-050), (02A-060).

(c) Remove in sequence the Diaphragm S/A (02A-070C) with two shims (02A-081) and
(02A-082), then the springs (02A-086) and (02A-090C).

(d) Then remove the spring guide (02A-095) and the washer (02A-096) from the adjusting
nut (02A-120).

(e) Loosen and remove the adjusting nut (02A-120).

(f) Loosen and remove three screws (02A-140) and remove the adjusting screw (02A-130)
with the clapper (02A-160), the sealing rings (02A-163) and the stop (02A-167).

(g) Remove the clapper (02A-160), the stop (02A-167) and the sealing rings (02A-163) from
the adjusting screw (02A-130).

(h) Remove the spring (02A-175).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-009-A01
(3) Distribution S/A

(a) Loosen and remove the threaded plug (02A-180) from the support (02A-270).

(b) Remove the shims (02A-190), the spring (02A-210) and the clapper (02A-220) from
the support (02A-270).

(c) Remove the two sealing rings (02A-223) from the clapper (02A-220).

36-11-51 Page 3009

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(d) Loosen and remove the threaded plug (02A-227) from the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610).

(e) Remove the support (02A-270) with the preformed packings (02A-260), (02A-320) and
(02A-280).

(f) Remove and discard the preformed packings (02A-260), (02A-320) and (02A-280) from
the support (02A-270).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-010-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(4) Closing S/A

(a) Loosen and remove the screws (02A-410) and (02A-420) with the washers (02A-430)
while you hold the cover (02A-400) firmly by hand.

(b) Remove the cover (02A-400) with the ring (02A-435) and the preformed packing
(02A-440).

(c) Remove the preformed packing (02A-450) from the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610).

(d) Remove the parts that follow:

– The Diaphragm S/A (02A-460)

– The shims (02A-470) and (02A-480)
– The stop washer (02A-485)
– The spring (02A-510).

(e) Loosen and remove the threaded ring (02A-520) from the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610)
with the special tool (T04).

(f) Remove the parts that follow:

– The valve body (02A-530)

– The clapper (02A-540)
– The spring (02A-545)
– The preformed packing (02A-550).

(g) Loosen and remove the threaded plug (02A-560).

(h) Remove the parts that follow:

– The preformed packing (02A-590)

– The spring (02A-570)
– The ball (02A-580)
– The valve seat (02A-600).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-010-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(5) Closing S/A

(a) Loosen and remove the screws (02A-410) and (02A-420) with the washers (02A-430)
while you hold the cover (02A-400) firmly by hand.

36-11-51 Page 3010

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Remove the cover (02A-400) with the ring (02A-435) and the preformed packing
(02A-440).

(c) Remove the preformed packing (02A-450) from the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610).

(d) Remove the parts that follow:

– The Diaphragm S/A (02A-460)

– The shims (02A-470) and (02A-480)
– The spring (02A-510).

(e) Loosen and remove the threaded ring (02A-520) from the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610)
with the special tool (T04).

(f) Remove the parts that follow:

– The valve body (02A-530)

– The clapper (02A-540)
– The spring (02A-545)
– The preformed packing (02A-550).

(g) Loosen and remove the threaded plug (02A-560).

(h) Remove the parts that follow:

– The preformed packing (02A-590)

– The spring (02A-570)
– The ball (02A-580)
– The valve seat (02A-600).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-011-A01
(6) Final Disassembly of the Regulator S/A (02A-001D)

(a) Loosen and remove the threaded plug (02A-330) from the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610).

(b) Remove the plug (02A-370) with the preformed packings (02A-380) and (02A-390).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 3011

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-040-803-A01
For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000, 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000,
6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

6. Disassembly of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A (01-330)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
TASK-36-11-51-010-801-A01 3000 REMOVAL OF THE PNEUMATIC
CONNECTIONS
TASK-36-11-51-010-803-A01 3000 REMOVAL OF THE REGULATOR S/A
(01-230)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-040-002-A01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE COVER S/A
(03-010)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-040-004-A01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-040-004-B01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-012-A01
(1) Preliminary Operations

(a) Remove the pneumatic connections (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-010-801-A01).

(b) Remove the Regulator S/A (01-230) (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-010-803-A01).

D. Procedure

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and preformed packings on disassembly. You must discard
the washers, the nuts and the screws if they are damaged.

NOTE: Important: Always discard and replace the unions (01-020A) in the case of any defect of the
thread that causes seizing (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01)

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-002-A01
(1) Disassembly of the Cover S/A (03-010)

(a) Cut off and remove the lockwire (03-030) from the screws (03-020).

(b) Loosen and remove the two screws (03-020) from the cover (03-050).

36-11-51 Page 3012

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(c) Remove the name plate (03-060) from the cover (03-050) by extracting the four rivets
(03-070B) with a drift.

(d) Loosen and remove the nut (03-090) from the end of the butterfly shaft.

(e) Remove the cam (03-080).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-003-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(2) Disassembly of the Electrical Connector (03-420)

(a) Loosen and remove the two screws (03-430), and the two screws (03-440) from the
electrical connector (03-420).

(b) Loosen the nut (03-480) from the electrical connector (03-420).

(c) Disengage the electrical connector (03-420) from its mounting hole on the Casing S/A
(03-560).

(d) Cut off the sleeve (03-540).

(e) Disassemble the contact pins (03-460) from the electrical connector.

(f) Cut off the electrical wire (03-530) at location of the splice (03-550A).

(g) Remove the electrical connector (03-420).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-003-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A

(3) Disassembly of the Electrical Connector (03-420)

(a) Loosen and remove the two screws (03-430), and the two screws (03-440) from the
electrical connector (03-420).

(b) Loosen the nut (03-480) from the electrical connector (03-420).

(c) Disengage the electrical connector (03-420) from its mounting hole on the Casing S/A
(03-560).

(d) Cut off the sleeve (03-540).

(e) Disassemble the contact pins (03-460) from the electrical connector.

(f) Cut off the electrical wire (03-530) at location of the two splices (03-550B).

(g) Remove the electrical connector (03-420).

36-11-51 Page 3013

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-004-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(4) Disassembly of the Microswitches (03-490)

(a) Do the procedure described Subtask 36-11-51-040-002-A01.

(b) Cut off and remove the lockwire (03-510) from the screws (03-020).

(c) Loosen and remove the screws (03-500) with the washers (03-520B) from the
microswitches (03-490).

(d) Remove the two microswitches (03-490).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-004-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A

(5) Disassembly of the Microswitches (03-490)

(a) Do the procedure described Subtask 36-11-51-040-002-A01.

(b) Cut off and remove the lockwire (03-510) from the screws (03-020).

(c) Loosen and remove the screws (03-500) with the plate (03-520C) from the microswitch
(03-490).

(d) Remove the microswitch (03-490).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-013-A01
(6) Removal of the Casing S/A (03-560)

(a) Do the procedure described Subtask 36-11-51-040-002-A01.

(b) Do the procedure described Subtask 36-11-51-040-004-A01 or Subtask

36-11-51-040-004-B01.

(c) Loosen and remove the three screws (03-570) from the pneumatic actuator body (03-240).

(d) Remove the Casing S/A (03-560).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 3014

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-040-803-B01
For P/N 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

7. Disassembly of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A (01-330)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
TASK-36-11-51-010-801-A01 3000 REMOVAL OF THE PNEUMATIC
CONNECTIONS
TASK-36-11-51-010-803-A01 3000 REMOVAL OF THE REGULATOR S/A
(01-230)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-040-002-B01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE COVER S/A
(03-010)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-040-004-C01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-012-B01
(1) Preliminary Operations

(a) Remove the pneumatic connections (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-010-801-A01).

(b) Remove the Regulator S/A (01-230) (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-010-803-A01).

D. Procedure

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and preformed packings on disassembly. You must discard
the washers, the nuts and the screws if they are damaged.

NOTE: Important: Always discard and replace the unions (01-020A) in the case of any defect of the
thread that causes seizing (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01)

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-002-B01
(1) Disassembly of the Cover S/A (03-010)

(a) Cut off and remove the lockwire (03-030) from the screws (03-020).

(b) Loosen and remove the two screws (03-020) from the cover (03A-050B).

(c) Remove the name plate (03A-060B) from the cover (03A-050B) by extracting the four
rivets (03-070B) with a drift.

36-11-51 Page 3015

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(d) Loosen and remove the nut (03-090) from the end of the butterfly shaft.

(e) Remove the cam (03A-080B).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-003-C01
(2) Disassembly of the Electrical Connector (03-420)

(a) Cut off and remove the lockwire (03A-445) from the nut (03A-480) and the lacing
cord (03A-539).

(b) Loosen and remove the two screws (03-430) and the two screws (03-440) from the
electrical connector (03-420).

(c) Loosen the nut (03-480) from the electrical connector (03-420).

(d) Disengage the electrical connector (03-420) from its mounting hole on the Casing S/A
(03-560).

(e) Loosen and remove the screws (03A-532), remove the washer (03A-533) and the
clamp (03A-531).

(f) Cut off the sleeve (03-540).

(g) Disassemble the contact pins (03-460) from the electrical connector.

(h) Cut off the electrical wire (03-530) at location of the two splices (03-550B).

(i) Remove the electrical connector (03-420).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-004-C01
(3) Disassembly of the Microswitches (03A-490F)

(a) Do the procedure described Subtask 36-11-51-040-002-B01.

(b) Loosen and remove screw (03A-500D) with the washer (03A-520D).

(c) Remove the microswitch (03A-490F).

(d) Loosen and remove the screws (03A-527) and the nuts (03A-518).

(e) Remove the parts that follow:

– The stop plate (03A-511)

– The microswitch blate (03A-512)
– The microswitch (03A-513)
– The microswitch base (03A-515).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-014-A01
(4) Removal of the Casing S/A (03-560)

(a) Do the procedure described Subtask 36-11-51-040-002-B01.

(b) Do the procedure described Subtask 36-11-51-040-004-C01.

(c) Loosen and remove the three screws (03A-570B) from the pneumatic actuator body
(03-240).

36-11-51 Page 3016

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(d) Remove the Casing S/A (03A-560E).

(e) Remove the insulating plate (03A-573).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 3017

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-040-804-A01
8. Disassembly of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS
TASK-36-11-51-300-803-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 7: REPAIR OF THE CLEVIS
(03-160) AND THE ADJUSTING ROD
(03-180)
TASK-36-11-51-300-804-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 8: REPAIR OF THE LEVER
(03-320) AND THE ROD S/A (03-310)

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and preformed packings on disassembly. You must discard
the washers, the nuts and the screws if they are damaged.

NOTE: Important: Always discard and replace the unions (01-020A) in the case of any defect of the
thread that causes seizing (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01)

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-005-A01
(1) Disassembly of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A

CAUTION: BEFORE DISASSEMBLY, DO A CHECK OF THE WEAR OF THE PNEUMATIC

ACTUATOR LINKAGE PARTS (REF. TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01
PARA. (H)) AND REPAIR THE LINKAGE PARTS IF NECESSARY (REF. TO
REPAIR NO. 7 TASK 36-11-51-300-803-A01 AND REF. TO REPAIR NO. 8 TASK
36-11-51-300-804-A01).

(a) While you hold the cover (03-100) firmly by hand, loosen and remove the screws (03-110)
with the washers (03-120).

(b) Thoroughly remove the cover (03-100) which is loaded by the spring (03-150).

(c) Remove the preformed packings (03-130) and (03-140).

(d) Loosen and remove the screws (03-170) from the clevis (03-160).

(e) Slightly pull the clevis (03-160) while you hold the piston (03-220) into place to have
access to the pin (03-190).

36-11-51 Page 3018

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(f) Remove the retaining ring (03-210), the lockwasher (03-200) and the pin (03-190).

(g) Remove the clevis (03-160).

(h) Remove the piston (03-220) and the preformed packing (03-230) from the body (03-240).

(i) Loosen the screw (03-360).

(j) Loosen and remove the screws (03-260) with the washers (03-270).

(k) Remove the nuts (03-280).

(l) Loosen and remove the screws (03-290).

(m) Remove the actuator body (03-240) from the Valve Sub-Assembly (03-250).

(n) Remove the adjusting rod (03-180)/rod (03-310)/lever (03-320) assembly from the
actuator body (03-240).

(o) Remove the lockwasher (03-340), the circlip (03-350) and the pin (03-330).

(p) Remove the guide rings (03-370), (03-380) from the piston (03-220).

(q) Remove the flexible ring (03-390), the piston rings (03-400) and the expander ring
(03-410).

NOTE: Always discard the flexible ring (03-390) and the expander ring (03-410). Discard
the piston rings (03-400) if worn or damaged.

(r) Remove the ring (03-580) with the preformed packing (03-585) from the actuator body
(03-240).

(s) Remove the two sealing rings (03-600).

(t) Remove the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250).

(u) Remove and discard the seal (03-300) and the washers (03-293) and (03-295) if
applicable.

(v) Loosen and remove the plug (03-249) and the seal (03-248) from the actuator body
(03-240C).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 3019

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-040-805-A01
9. Disassembly of the Butterfly Valve (03-250)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up information

(1) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T02 OS22911 1 SPECIAL TOOL
OR M65724009A
T11 M65723525A 1 SPECIAL TOOL
T37 M82100055-030A 1 TEST TOOL

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
SUBTASK-36-11-51-040-005-A01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE PNEUMATIC
ACTUATOR S/A
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-015-A01
(1) Preliminary Operations

(a) Disassemble the Pneumatic Actuator S/A (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-040-005-A01).

D. Procedure

NOTE: Always discard all the seals and preformed packings on disassembly. You must discard
the washers, the nuts and the screws if they are damaged.

NOTE: Important: Always discard and replace the unions (01-020A) in the case of any defect of the
thread that causes seizing (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01)

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-006-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(1) Disassembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250)

CAUTION: DO A CHECK OF THE RADIAL PLAY OF THE SHAFT (04-070B) (REF. TO

SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (I)).

36-11-51 Page 3020

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(a) Loosen and remove the screw (04-020B) and remove the Manual Control S/A (04-010B)
from the tip of the shaft (04-070B).

(b) Loosen and remove the screw (04-090) and the lockwasher (04-100) from the butterfly
(04-160).

(c) Unlock the threaded ring (04-060) by unfolding the tabs of the lockwasher (04-220).

(d) Loosen and remove the threaded ring (04-060) from the valve body (04-340) mounting
bore, with the special tool (T02).

(e) Remove the parts that follows:

– Sealing rings (04-210)

– Shims (04-200)
– Bearing ring (04-190)
– Balls (04-180)
– Lockwasher (04-220)
– Washer (04-230)
– Ring (04-170)
– Needles (04-240)
– Outer ring (04-250)
– Washer (04-260)
– Sealing ring (04-270).

(f) Remove the shaft (04-070) with the stop (04-275) from the valve body (04-340) bore.

(g) Remove the butterfly (04-160) from the valve body (04-340).

(h) Unfold the tabs of the lockwasher (04-040). Then loosen and remove the threaded
ring (04-030) with the special tool (T02).

CAUTION: ALWAYS DISCARD THE RING (04-130) EVERY TIME THE SEALING PARTS
ARE REMOVED.

(i) Remove the parts that follow:

– Sealing rings (04-050)

– Lockwasher (04-040)
– Washer (04-280)
– Inner ring (04-290)
– Needles (04-300)
– Outer ring (04-310)
– Washer (04-320)
– Sealing ring (04-330).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-006-B01
For P/N 6713D040000

(2) Disassembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250)

CAUTION: DO A CHECK OF THE RADIAL PLAY OF THE SHAFT (04-070B) (REF. TO

SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (I)).

36-11-51 Page 3021

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(a) Loosen and remove the screw (04-020B) and remove the Manual Control S/A (04-010B)
from the tip of the shaft (04-070B).

(b) Loosen and remove the screw (04-090) and the lockwasher (04-100) from the butterfly
(04-160).

(c) Remove the shaft preloading parts as follows:

1 Remove the retaining ring (04-052), with the test tool (T37).

2 Remove the parts that follow:

– Stop ring (04-053)

– Spring (04-055)
– Washer (04-057)
– Sealing ring (04-059).

(d) Unlock the threaded ring (04-060) by unfolding the tabs of the lockwasher (04-220).

(e) Loosen and remove the threaded ring (04-060) from the valve body (04-340) mounting
bore, with the special tool (T02).

CAUTION: DO A CHECK OF THE ROUGHNESS OF THE THREADED RING (04-060) UPPER

FACE BEFORE REASSEMBLY (REF. TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01
PARA. (H)).

(f) Remove the parts that follows:

– Sealing rings (04-210)

– Shims (04-200)
– Bearing ring (04-190)
– Balls (04-180)
– Lockwasher (04-220)
– Washer (04-230)
– Ring (04-170)
– Needles (04-240)
– Outer ring (04-250)
– Washer (04-260)
– Sealing ring (04-270).

(g) Remove the shaft (04-070) with the stop (04-275) from the valve body (04-340) bore.

(h) Remove the butterfly (04-160) from the valve body (04-340).

(i) Unfold the tabs of the lockwasher (04-040). Then loosen and remove the threaded
ring (04-030) with the special tool (T02).

CAUTION: ALWAYS DISCARD THE RING (04-130) EVERY TIME THE SEALING PARTS
ARE REMOVED.

36-11-51 Page 3022

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(j) Remove the parts that follow:

– Sealing rings (04-050)

– Lockwasher (04-040)
– Washer (04-280)
– Inner ring (04-290)
– Needles (04-300)
– Outer ring (04-310)
– Washer (04-320)
– Sealing ring (04-330).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-006-C01
For P/N 6713D040000 Amdt A

(3) Disassembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250E)

(a) Loosen and remove the screw (04A-020B) and remove the Manual Control S/A
(04A-010B) from the tip of the shaft (04A-070C).

(b) Loosen, remove and discard the screw (04A-090) and the lockwasher (04A-100) from
the butterfly (04A-160).

(c) Unlock the threaded ring (04A-060B) by unfolding the tabs of the lockwasher (04A-220).

(d) Loosen and remove the threaded ring (04A-060B) from the valve body (04A-340)
mounting bore with the special tool (T02).

(e) Remove the parts that follow:

– Sealing rings (04A-210B) and (04A-215C)

– Lockwasher (04A-220)
– Stop (04A-225)
– Spring washer (04A-235)
– Spacer (04A-245)
– Ball bearing (04A-255)
– Shims (04A-258) and (04A-259)
– Washer (04A-260C)
– Sealing ring (04A-270).

(f) Unlock the threaded ring (04A-030C) by unfolding the tabs of the lockwasher (04A-040).

(g) Loosen and remove the threaded ring (04A-030C) from the valve body (04A-340)
mounting bore with the special tool (T02).

36-11-51 Page 3023

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(h) Remove the parts that follow:

– Sealing rings (04A-050C), (04A-051)

– Lockwasher (04A-040)
– Stop (04A-285)
– Spring washer (04A-295)
– Spring washer retainer (04A-298)
– Ball bearing (04A-305)
– Locking ring (04A-313)
– Spring washer (04A-315)
– Washer (04A-320C)
– Sealing ring (04A-330).

(i) Remove the shaft (04A-070C) with the stop (04A-275) from the valve body (04A-340) bore.

(j) Remove the butterfly (04A-160) from the valve body (04A-340).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-007-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

(4) Disassembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080)

(a) Unfold tab of the locking plate (04-110B).

NOTE: In case of damage of the locking plate tab, grind the head of the rivet (04-120)
on the locking plate side, and with a small screwdriver, remove the locking
plate (04-110B). Remove the rivet (04-120) from its butterfly mounting hole
with the special tool (T11).

(b) Unfold free ends of the ring (04-130B).

(c) Remove the ring (04-130B) from its butterfly (04-160) mounting groove.

(d) Remove the two sealing rings (04-150B) and (04-140C) from the butterfly (04-160)
mounting groove.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-040-007-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(5) Disassembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080)

(a) Unfold tab of the locking plate (04-110B).

NOTE: In case of damage of the locking plate tab, grind the head of the rivet (04-120)
on the locking plate side, and with a small screwdriver, remove the locking
plate (04-110B). Remove the rivet (04-120) from its butterfly mounting hole
with the special tool (T11).

(b) Unfold free ends of the ring (04-130B).

(c) Remove the ring (04-130B) from its butterfly (04-160) mounting groove.

(d) Remove the sealing ring (04-155) from the butterfly (04-160) mounting groove.

36-11-51 Page 3024

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 3025

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 3026

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

CLEANING

TASK 36-11-51-100-801-A01
1. External Cleaning of a Unit

A. Reason for the Job

WARNING: – DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. THE SOLVENTS ARE DANGEROUS.

– USE EYE PROTECTION. DO NOT LET THE SOLVENTS TOUCH YOUR SKIN.
– CLEAN THE PARTS IN A ROOM WHERE AIRFLOW IS SUFFICIENT.
– DO NOT CLEAN NEAR AN OPEN FLAME.

CAUTION: – CAREFULLY OBEY THE CLEANING PROCEDURES, OR REPLACE THEM WITH

A PROCEDURE WHICH IS SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER IF YOU USE
EQUIVALENTS.
– AFTER YOU COMPLETE THE PROCEDURE, YOU MUST PUT PROTECTIVE
CAPS OR APPLICABLE PACKAGING MATERIAL ON THE PARTS.

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M09A LOCAL PURCHASE DENATURED METHANOL

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-620-001-A01
(1) Preparation of the Unit

(a) Put all the protective caps on the units.

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-160-001-A01
(1) External Cleaning of the Unit

WARNING: DO NOT USE DIPPING OR SPRAYING PROCEDURES FOR FULL UNITS.

DIPPING OR SPRAYING PROCEDURES ARE ONLY FOR ISOLATED PARTS.

(a) Clean the unit with a lint-free cloth, which you make moist with cleaning material (M09A).
As an alternative, use a soft brush.

(b) Dry with low-pressure compressed air, or with a lint-free cloth.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 4001

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-100-802-A01
2. Cleaning of a Sub-Assembly

A. Reason for the Job

WARNING: – DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. THE SOLVENTS ARE DANGEROUS.

– USE EYE PROTECTION. DO NOT LET THE SOLVENTS TOUCH YOUR SKIN.
– CLEAN THE PARTS IN A ROOM WHERE AIRFLOW IS SUFFICIENT.
– DO NOT CLEAN NEAR AN OPEN FLAME.

CAUTION: – CAREFULLY OBEY THE CLEANING PROCEDURES, OR REPLACE THEM WITH

A PROCEDURE WHICH IS SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER IF YOU USE
EQUIVALENTS.
– AFTER YOU COMPLETE THE PROCEDURE, YOU MUST PUT PROTECTIVE
CAPS OR APPLICABLE PACKAGING MATERIAL ON THE PARTS.

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
TASK-36-11-51-100-804-A01 4000 CLEANING PROCEDURE TABLE

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-160-002-A01
(1) Cleaning of the Sub-Assembly

(a) Refer to the Cleaning Procedure Table (Ref. TASK 36-11-51-100-804-A01): do the
procedure which is given for the most easily damaged part.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 4002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-100-803-A01
3. Cleaning of Component Parts

A. Reason for the Job

WARNING: – DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. THE SOLVENTS ARE DANGEROUS.

– USE EYE PROTECTION. DO NOT LET THE SOLVENTS TOUCH YOUR SKIN.
– CLEAN THE PARTS IN A ROOM WHERE AIRFLOW IS SUFFICIENT.
– DO NOT CLEAN NEAR AN OPEN FLAME.

CAUTION: – CAREFULLY OBEY THE CLEANING PROCEDURES, OR REPLACE THEM WITH

A PROCEDURE WHICH IS SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER IF YOU USE
EQUIVALENTS.
– AFTER YOU COMPLETE THE PROCEDURE, YOU MUST PUT PROTECTIVE
CAPS OR APPLICABLE PACKAGING MATERIAL ON THE PARTS.

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

TASK-36-11-51-100-804-A01 4000 CLEANING PROCEDURE TABLE

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-160-003-A01
(1) Cleaning of the Component Parts

(a) Clean each part to remove oil, grease and dirt.

(b) Make sure that the mating areas are fully free from packing material or sealing compound.

(c) Use the applicable cleaning procedure (Ref. TASK 36-11-51-100-804-A01).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 4003

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-100-804-A01
4. Cleaning Procedure

A. Cleaning Procedure Table

CLEANING
PROCEDURE
TYPE OF PART THAT YOU WILL CLEAN
1 2 3 4

STAINLESS STEEL O O X
FORGED LIGHT ALLOY WITH ANODIC-CHROMIC PROTECTION X X
CAST LIGHT ALLOY WITH ANODIC-CHROMIC PROTECTION X X
NITRIDE TITANIUM PLATING X X
CHEMICAL NICKEL PLATING X X
TITANIUM (*) X X X
PLASTIC X
COMPOSITE MATERIALS (POLYESTER) X X
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS X
TEFLON PLATING (**)
RUBBER (***)

CLEANING PROCEDURES
1: Heavy alkaline cleaning:
(Ref. TASK 36-11-51-100-805-A01)
2: Cleaning of the parts with solvents (non chlorinated), with a dipping or spraying procedure:
(Ref. TASK 36-11-51-100-806-A01)
3: Light alkaline cleaning:
(Ref. TASK 36-11-51-100-807-A01)
4: Cleaning of the parts with an alcohol-based cleaning agent:
(Ref. TASK 36-11-51-100-808-A01)

O O: DO THE TWO STEPS, ONE AFTER THE OTHER

(*): DO NOT USE CHLORINATED SOLVENT
(**): DO NOT USE CLEANING MATERIAL. USE A DRY LINT-FREE CLOTH
(***): DO NOT USE CLEANING MATERIAL. CLEAN WITH LOW-PRESSURE COMPRESSED
AIR

36-11-51 Page 4004

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-100-805-A01
5. Procedure 1: Heavy Alkaline Cleaning

A. Reason for the Job

WARNING: – DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. THE SOLVENTS ARE DANGEROUS.

– USE EYE PROTECTION. DO NOT LET THE SOLVENTS TOUCH YOUR SKIN.
– CLEAN THE PARTS IN A ROOM WHERE AIRFLOW IS SUFFICIENT.
– DO NOT CLEAN NEAR AN OPEN FLAME.

WARNING: – USE ALL PRECAUTIONS FOR THE PROTECTION OF YOUR EYES AND YOUR
SKIN WHEN YOU USE THE CLEANING MATERIAL IN THIS PROCEDURE. THIS
CLEANING MATERIAL CONTAINS SODIUM HYDROXIDE, WHICH IS HIGHLY
DANGEROUS.

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M48A TURCO 4181 CLEANING MATERIAL

WARNING: DO NOT USE MANUAL CLEANING PROCEDURES WITH THE MATERIALS

SPECIFIED IN THIS PROCEDURE. THIS PROCEDURE IS ONLY APPLICABLE
TO INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES (AUTOMATIC CLEANING
MACHINE).

CAUTION: DO NOT USE THIS MATERIAL FOR LIGHT ALLOYS. THE MATERIAL SPECIFIED
BELOW CONTAINS SODIUM HYDROXIDE: IT CAUSES THE CORROSION OF
ALUMINUM-BASED ALLOYS.

(2) Use materials which agree with specification MIL-TT-C-490 MV.

(3) Example: - Cleaning material (M48A).

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-880-001-A01
(1) Material Preparation

(a) For the dilution proportions, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Example: - Cleaning material (M48A). Dilution of the Cleaning material (M48A) with 5% of water
(for grease, baked grease, and scale particles).

36-11-51 Page 4005

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

D. Procedure

WARNING: USE ALL PRECAUTIONS AS GIVEN IN THE WARNING NOTES AT THE TOP OF
PARA. A.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-130-001-A01
(1) Cleaning

(a) To clean the part, put it momentarily in a warm bath of cleaning material, at a temperature
of 70 C to 80 C (158 F to 176 F). An ultrasonic device must mix the bath.

(b) Flush the part with water.

CAUTION: DO NOT DRY SUB-ASSEMBLIES WHICH CONTAIN PRESS-FITTED PARTS IN

THE TEMPERATURE RANGE GIVEN BELOW. THIS CAN CAUSE DISTORTION
OR INTERNAL CORROSION. USE THE CORRECT DRYING TEMPERATURE.

(c) Dry the part in hot air, at between 100 C and 110 C (212 F to 230 F).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 4006

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-100-806-A01
6. Procedure 2: Cleaning with Solvents by the Dipping or the Spraying Procedure

A. Reason for the Job

WARNING: USE SOLVENTS WHICH HAVE A FLASH POINT OF MORE THAN 50 C TO 55 C

(122 F TO 131 F) IN SPECIFIED STABLE CONDITIONS.

WARNING: DO NOT USE ANY CHLORINATED SOLVENT. CHLORINATED SOLVENTS ARE

NOT APPROVED.

WARNING: – DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. THE SOLVENTS ARE DANGEROUS.

– USE EYE PROTECTION. DO NOT LET THE SOLVENTS TOUCH YOUR SKIN.
– CLEAN THE PARTS IN A ROOM WHERE AIRFLOW IS SUFFICIENT.
– DO NOT CLEAN NEAR AN OPEN FLAME.

CAUTION: – CAREFULLY OBEY THE CLEANING PROCEDURES, OR REPLACE THEM WITH

A PROCEDURE WHICH IS SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER IF YOU USE
EQUIVALENTS.
– AFTER YOU COMPLETE THE PROCEDURE, YOU MUST PUT PROTECTIVE
CAPS OR APPLICABLE PACKAGING MATERIAL ON THE PARTS.

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

Not applicable

C. Job Set-up

WARNING: – THE SOLVENTS ARE DANGEROUS FOR YOUR HEALTH, AND CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO PARTS IF THEY DETERIORATE BECAUSE OF: POLLUTION,
WATER, GREASE, METAL PARTICLES, TEMPERATURE.
– THE SOLVENTS MUST THUS BE FULLY CLEAN AND YOU MUST REPLACE
THEM FREQUENTLY. THE CONTAINERS MUST BE FREE FROM UNWANTED
PARTICLES FOR THE DIPPING AND THE SPRAYING OPERATIONS.

D. Procedure

WARNING: – DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. THE SOLVENTS ARE DANGEROUS.

– CLEAN THE PARTS IN A ROOM WHERE AIRFLOW IS SUFFICIENT.
– DO NOT CLEAN NEAR AN OPEN FLAME OR AN INCANDESCENT MATERIAL.
– USE THE SOLVENT BETWEEN 10 C AND 15 C (50 F TO 59 F), WHICH
IS LESS THAN THE FLASH POINT.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-110-001-A01
(1) Cleaning with Solvents

(a) Put the part in the solvent momentarily, or apply the solvent to the part as a spray. If
necessary, complete the cleaning with a soft brush, or with a soft piece of material
(such as wood or plastic).

(b) At the end of the full cleaning operation, put the part in clean solvent momentarily, or
apply clean solvent to the part as a spray.

36-11-51 Page 4007

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(c) Dry the parts with compressed air that is clean and dry (free from dust and grease).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 4008

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-100-807-A01
7. Procedure 3: Light Alkaline Cleaning

A. Reason for the Job

WARNING: – DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. THE SOLVENTS ARE DANGEROUS.

– USE EYE PROTECTION. DO NOT LET THE SOLVENTS TOUCH YOUR SKIN.
– CLEAN THE PARTS IN A ROOM WHERE AIRFLOW IS SUFFICIENT.
– DO NOT CLEAN NEAR AN OPEN FLAME.

CAUTION: – CAREFULLY OBEY THE CLEANING PROCEDURES, OR REPLACE THEM WITH

A PROCEDURE WHICH IS SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER IF YOU USE
EQUIVALENTS.
– AFTER YOU COMPLETE THE PROCEDURE, YOU MUST PUT PROTECTIVE
CAPS OR APPLICABLE PACKAGING MATERIAL ON THE PARTS.

This procedure is specially applicable to the cleaning of Aluminum-based alloys (the recommended
materials do not contain Sodium Hydroxide, which damages light alloys).

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M51A TURCO AVIATION SPR CLEANING MATERIAL
M53A PROMOCLEAN TP 108 CLEANING MATERIAL

(2) Use materials that agree with Specification MIL-TT-C-490C procedure III.

(3) Example:

– cleaning material (M51A),

– cleaning material (M53A).

C. Job Set-up

WARNING: USE EYE PROTECTION. DO NOT LET THE SOLVENTS TOUCH YOUR SKIN.
ALKALINE MATERIALS CAUSE IRRITATION TO YOUR EYES AND YOUR SKIN.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-880-002-A01
(1) Preparation

(a) For the dilution proportions, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

(b) Mix 5% of the material with water, at a temperature between 70 C and 80 C (158 F to
176 F) in the ultrasonic bath during 15 to 20 minutes.

36-11-51 Page 4009

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-110-002-A01
(1) Cleaning

(a) Clean the parts with a lint-free cloth, which you make moist with the detergent solution. As
an alternative, use a soft brush.

(b) Flush the parts with clean water, at ambient temperature.

CAUTION: DO NOT USE HOT AIR (100 C (212 F)) TO DRY SUB-ASSEMBLIES WHICH
CONTAIN PRESS-FITTED PARTS.

(c) Dry with low-pressure compressed air.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 4010

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-100-808-A01
8. Procedure 4: Cleaning of Parts with an Alcohol-Based Cleaning Agent

A. Reason for the Job

WARNING: – DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. THE SOLVENTS ARE DANGEROUS.

– USE EYE PROTECTION. DO NOT LET THE SOLVENTS TOUCH YOUR SKIN.
– CLEAN THE PARTS IN A ROOM WHERE AIRFLOW IS SUFFICIENT.
– DO NOT CLEAN NEAR AN OPEN FLAME.

CAUTION: – CAREFULLY OBEY THE CLEANING PROCEDURES, OR REPLACE THEM WITH

A PROCEDURE WHICH IS SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER IF YOU USE
EQUIVALENTS.
– AFTER YOU COMPLETE THE PROCEDURE, YOU MUST PUT PROTECTIVE
CAPS OR APPLICABLE PACKAGING MATERIAL ON THE PARTS.

(1) This procedure is specially applicable to:

– hardware electrical component parts,

– electronic component parts,
– printed circuits.

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M09A DENATURED METHANOL (OM23214) DENATURED METHANOL

(a) Use a cleaning material which agrees with Specification MIL-A-6090.

(b) Example: - Cleaning material (M09A).

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable. Use the cleaning material as it is.

D. Procedure

WARNING: – IN WORKSHOPS, KEEP THE ALCOHOL-BASED CLEANING AGENTS IN SMALL

QUANTITIES (250 CM3 (15.25 CU.IN)).
– CLEAN THE PARTS IN A ROOM WHERE AIRFLOW IS SUFFICIENT.
– DO NOT CLEAN NEAR AN OPEN FLAME OR AN INCANDESCENT MATERIAL.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-110-003-A01
(1) Cleaning

(a) Clean parts with a soft brush.

(b) Dry with compressed air which is at ambient temperature.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 4011

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-100-809-A01
9. Cleaning of the Filter (01-050A)

A. Reason for the Job

CAUTION: CLEANING AGENTS ARE HAZARDOUS IN EACH CASE CAREFULLY APPLY THE
INSTRUCTIONS GIVEN BY THE CLEANING MATERIAL MANUFACTURER.

CAUTION: – USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES AND GLASSES

– DO NOT INHALE FUMES
– DO NOT INGEST SOLVENTS
– DO NOT SMOKE
– USE OR STORE SOLVENTS IN A DULY VENTILATED ROOM
– DO NOT USE SOLVENTS IN THE VICINITY OF AN OPEN FLAME
– CAREFULLY OBSERVE TEMPERATURE UTILIZATION RANGE.

Depending on the nature of pollution, the two specific procedures that follow are proposed to clean
the clogged filters.

The two should be preceded by a preliminary cleaning as per standard method 1 (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-100-805-A01) then followed by checking the filter pressure drop (Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-180-001-A01).

The filters must be removed from the unit before cleaning procedure is done.

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M26A HYDROFLUORIC ACID CLEANING MATERIAL
M27A NITRIC ACID CLEANING MATERIAL
M28A SODIUM BICHROMATE PURIFIED TO CLEANING MATERIAL
99%
M33A DEMINERALIZED WATER CLEANING MATERIAL
M34A CARBONE-SOLVENT CLEANING MATERIAL

(2) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Energy Sources

DESIGNATION QTY CHARACTERISTICS

RUNNING WATER SOURCE 1 STANDARD
COMPRESSED AIR SOURCE 1 DUST-FREE
OIL-FREE
ULTRASONIC BATH 1 STANDARD

36-11-51 Page 4012

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Equipment

DESIGNATION QTY CHARACTERISTICS

SAFETY-AGREED CLEANING 1 STANDARD
FACILITY
TEST FACILITY EQUIPPED 1 REF. FIG. 4001

(c) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T18 M65723253C 1 TEST TOOL
OR M65723281

(3) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-001-A01 1 FIGURE 1
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-032-A01 4000 FIGURE 4001
TASK-36-11-51-100-805-A01 4000 PROCEDURE 1: HEAVY ALCALINE
CLEANING
SUBTASK-36-11-51-110-004-A01 4000 SIMPLIFIED CLEANING METHOD “A”
SUBTASK-36-11-51-110-005-A01 4000 COMPLETE CLEANING METHOD “B”
SUBTASK-36-11-51-180-001-A01 4000 FILTERS LOAD LOSS TEST

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-100-001-A01
(1) Preliminary Cleaning

(a) Apply the standard alkaline cleaning method 1 (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-100-805-A01).

(b) Do a check of the filter pressure drop (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-180-001-A01).

(c) If the pressure drop is excessive, clean the filter (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-110-004-A01).

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-110-004-A01
(1) Simplified cleaning method "A"

NOTE: This method will be preferred to the second method which involves more material,
technical means and manpower.

The number of cleaning operations as per simplified method "A" is not limited.

36-11-51 Page 4013

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(a) Immerse the filter in a bath of liquid cleaning material (M34A) for:

– 6 to 8 hours with bath at ambient temperature

– Or for 1 hour for a bath temperature within 35 C and 65 C (95 F to 149 F).

(b) Rinse the filter by dipping it in running water bath then with a water jet to perfect flushing.

(c) Carefully dry the filter with clean, oil-free, dust-free compressed-air (pressure within 3 and
6 bar (43 to 87 psig)).

(d) Install the cleaned filter (Ref. Fig. 4001) and do a check of its permeability (Ref. to
Subtask 36-11-51-180-001-A01).

(e) If the results are not satisfactory, apply the complete cleaning procedure "B" (Ref. to
Subtask 36-11-51-110-005-A01).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-110-005-A01
(2) Complete Cleaning Method "B"

NOTE: This method applies to filter clogged by a compound of silicium, aluminium, sulfur,
calcium, with possible traces of cobalt, potassium, magnesium, or sodium. This
method can be applied only three times to a same filter due to the risk of:

– Chemical erosion of wire mesh

– Deterioration of brased area that causes loosening of the mesh.

Engrave a cross on the filter hexagonal part for each cleaning cycle applied.

Discard a clogged filter bearing three marks (X) on Hex. flat.

(a) Etching

– Etching bath composition:

• Fluoride Acid cleaning material (M26A): 2,5 % in Volume

• Nitric Acid cleaning material (M27A): 30 % in Volume
• Demineralized Water cleaning material (M33A): 67,5 % in Volume

– Etching bath temperature: 15 C to 25 C (59 F to 77 F)

– Etching time: 9 to 11 minutes
– Flushing:

Preferably, the filters will be flushed in demineralized water at a temperature of 15 C

to 25 C (59 F to 77 F) with ultrasonic stirring during 4 to 6 minutes.
The filters can also be flushed in running water at a temperature of 15 C to 25 C
(59 F to 77 F) during 30 to 90 seconds.

36-11-51 Page 4014

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Passivation:

– Passivation bath composition:

• Nitric Acid cleaning material (M27A): 20 % in volume

• Demineralized Water cleaning material (M33A): 80 % in Volume
• Incorporate to that solution 20 grammes of Sodium Bichromate cleaning
material (M28A)
• Powder per liter (1.25 pound/cu.foot)

– Passivation bath temperature: 15 C to 25 C (59 F to 77 F)

– Passivation time: 1 hour with filters into the passivation bath
– Flushing:

Preferably, the filters will be flushed in demineralized water at a temperature of 15 C

to 25 C (59 F to 77 F) with ultrasonic stirring during 4 to 6 minutes.
The filters can also be flushed in running water at a temperature of 15 C to 25 C
(59 F to 77 F) during 30 to 90 seconds.

– Drying: Dry the filters with dust-free and oil-free dry compressed air. No special tool is
required - air supply pressure: 3 to 6 bar rel. (43 to 87 psig).

NOTE: Drying is most important to allow any sticky particles to be removed from the filters.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-180-001-A01
(3) Filters Load Loss Test
(Ref. Fig. 4001)

(a) Once cleaning is achieved, a permeability check is required. This test consists of the
steps that follow:

1 Install the filter (Ref. Fig. 4001) on the test tool (T18).

2 Supply the installation with a P1 pressure of 4 ± 0,1 bar rel. (56.55 to 59.4 psig).

3 Make sure that the P2 pressure (read on the relative pressure gage (Ref. Fig. 1))
remains lower than 100 mbar rel. (1.45 psig).

4 In case of excessive P2 pressure, apply again the present cleaning procedure.

5 In case of P2 pressure value still too important, the filter must be rejected.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-100-002-A01
(4) Cleaned Filter Identification

NOTE: Effectivity to Subtask 36-11-51-110-005-A01.

(a) As the maximum allowed cleaning cycles is limited to 3, engrave a cross on its hexagonal
part after accomplishment of the present procedure "B".

(b) Engrave a cross at any cleaning: in case of "double cleaning" resulting from load loss
test not giving positive result (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-180-001-A01 Para (a).3), a
second cross shall be engraved as the cleaning procedure is to be applied again (Ref. to
Subtask 36-11-51-180-001-A01 Para (a).4).

36-11-51 Page 4015

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 4016

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Filter Load Loss

Figure 4001/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-032-A01

36-11-51 Page 4017

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 4018

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

INSPECTION/CHECK

TASK 36-11-51-200-801-A01
1. Checking Procedure

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T34 M65723908A 1 SPECIAL BROACH

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-033-A01 1 FIGURE 5001
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-034-A01 5000 FIGURE 5002
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-035-A01 5000 FIGURE 5003
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-036-A01 5000 FIGURE 5004
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-037-A01 5000 FIGURE 5005
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-038-A01 5000 FIGURE 5006
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-039-A01 5000 FIGURE 5007
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-040-A01 5000 FIGURE 5008
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-041-A01 5000 FIGURE 5009
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-042-A01 5000 FIGURE 5010
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-043-A01 5000 FIGURE 5011
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-044-A01 5000 FIGURE 5012
PGBLK-36-11-51-3000 3000 DISASSEMBLY
TASK-36-11-51-040-804-A01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE PNEUMATIC
ACTUATOR S/A
TASK-36-11-51-300-801-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 5: REPAIR OF THE VALVE
BODY (05-090A) AND (05-090B)
TASK-36-11-51-300-802-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 6: REPAIR OF THE
MICROSWITCH S/A (03-490A) AND
(03-490B)
TASK-36-11-51-300-803-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 7: REPAIR OF THE CLEVIS
(03-160)

36-11-51 Page 5001

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

TASK-36-11-51-300-804-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 8: REPAIR OF THE LEVEL
(03-320)
TASK-36-11-51-300-807-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 11: REPAIR OF THE
REGULATOR BODY S/A (02A-610)
TASK-36-11-51-300-808-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 12: REPAIR OF THE LEVEL
OF THE MICROSWITCH S/A (03-490C)
TASK-36-11-51-320-801-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 4: CHAMFERING ON
THE TWO SIDES OF THE WASHERS
(04-260B), (04-280) AND (04-320B)
TASK-36-11-51-330-801-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 3: REPLACEMENT OF THE
HARD-CHROME PLATING IN THE VALVE
BODY (04-340)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-440-008-A01 7000 INSTALLATION OF THE PISTON S/A
PGBLK-36-11-51-8000 8000 FITS AND CLEARANCES
TASK-36-11-51-820-801-A01 8000 FITS AND CLEARANCES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-220-003-A01
(1) Visual Inspection of the Parts

(a) Examine all the parts for changes or replacements.

(b) Examine all the parts for abrasion, cracks, distortion and scratches.

(c) Examine all the sealing surfaces for indentations, nicks and scratches.

(d) Examine all the threads for damage.

(e) Examine all the threaded inserts, and replace them if they are damaged.

NOTE: You must discard the washers, nuts and screws that are damaged.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-220-004-A01
(2) Dimension Checks

(a) Do a check of all the parts listed in the FITS AND CLEARANCES chapter.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01
(3) Special Checks

(a) Check of the Loaded Springs

1 Discard systematically the smallest springs.

36-11-51 Page 5002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Check of the Washers (04-260B), (04-280) and (04-320B) (Ref. Fig. 5001)

For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A

1 Do a check of the wear on the side of the washer in contact with the needles
(02A-300). The wear depth must not exceed 0,2 mm (0.00787 in).

– If the wear is less than or equal to 0,2 mm (0,00787 in) repair the washer (Ref. to
REPAIR No. 4 TASK 36-11-51-320-801-A01).
– If the wear exceeds 0,2 mm discard the washer.

36-11-51 Page 5003

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Washers (04-260B), (04-280) and (04-320B)

Figure 5001/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-033-A01

36-11-51 Page 5004

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(c) Check of the Valve Body S/A (04-340) (Ref. Fig. 5002)

Before you rework the valve body do the checks that follow:

1 Do a check of the circularity of the "A" diameter.

2 In regard to the circularity of the "A" diameter checked, re-use the valve body or
rework the "A" diameter of the valve body.

3 Do a check of the perpendicularity of the pneumatic actuator support plate with the
"B" common area with 0,15 mm (0.0060 in).

4 Make sure that the flatness of the flanges faces is within 0,08 mm (0.003 in).

5 Make sure visually that any important score traces are observed in the Valve Body
S/A (04-340) bore areas (Ref. Fig. 5002).

6 If the above steps 3, 4 geometric tolerance values are within the specified values,
rework the body (Ref. to REPAIR No. 3 TASK 36-11-51-330-801-A01).

36-11-51 Page 5005

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Valve Body (04-340)

Figure 5002/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-034-A01

36-11-51 Page 5006

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(d) Check of the Overpressure Valve Body (05-090A) and (05-090B)

For P/N ≤ 6713D050000

1 Do a check of the surface condition of the guide sleeve fitted in the valve body
(05-090) with a magnifying glass, especially at location of contact with the clappers
(05-060), (05-070). They must be free from evidence of cracks, scores.

– If any cracks, important score traces are observed, discard the overpressure valve
body (05-090) and replace it by a new one.

2 Do a check of the extent of wear of the guide sleeve bore fitted in the valve body
(05-090).

– If the diameter of the sleeve bore is less than or equal to 5,042 mm (0.200 in), repair
the valve body (05-090) (Ref. to REPAIR No. 5 TASK 36-11-51-300-801-A01).
– If the diameter of the sleeve exceeds 5,042 mm (0.200 in), discard the valve body
(05-090) and replace it by a new one.

(e) Check of the Microswitch S/A (03-490)

Effectivity to valve type 6713-060, Microswitch S/A (03-490A)

1 Visual check

a Do a check of the lever (03-527) contact area with the control cam (03-080)
for evidence of wear.

– If any evidence of wear is found, do the electrical functional check that follows.

2 Electrical functional check (Ref. Fig. 5003)

a Connect an ohmmeter to the ends of the Microswitch S/A leads and make sure
of its correct operation (Ref. Fig. 5003).

– If this check is not correct, discard the Microswitch S/A.

– If this check is correct, do the repair of the Microswitch S/A (03-490) (Ref.
to REPAIR No. 6 TASK 36-11-51-300-802-A01).

Effectivity to microswitch type 6713-0230 (03-490C)

3 Overall check

a Discard and renew the microswitch if the compound which protects the leads
at the bottom of the body is cracked or deformed.

4 Functional check

a Connect an ohmmeter to the ends of the Microswitch S/A leads and make sure
of its correct operation (Ref. Fig. 5003).

– If this check is not correct, discard the microswitch.

36-11-51 Page 5007

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

5 Lever wear check

a Make sure that the thickness of the microswitch lever that remains, at the location
of wear, is greater than or equal to 0,9 mm (0.035 in).

b Reject the microswitch if the lever thickness that remains is less than 0,9 mm
(0.035 in).

c Repair the microswitch lever if the thickness that remains is correct (Ref. to
REPAIR No. 12 TASK 36-11-51-300-808-A01).

36-11-51 Page 5008

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Electrical Functional Check of the Microswitch S/A (03-490)

Figure 5003/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-035-A01

36-11-51 Page 5009

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(f) Check of the Rod S/A (03-310)

1 Do a check of the locking efficiency of the threaded insert (03-315) by applying a

torque between 0,3 and 1 daN.m (26.56 to 88.53 lbf.in).

2 If the locking efficiency value is within the tolerances, re-use the existing threaded
insert.

3 If the locking efficiency value is out of tolerance, discard it and replace it by a new one
(Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-440-008-A01).

(g) Check of the Butterfly (04-160) Splines

1 Do a check of the splines of the butterfly (04-160) for good condition with a master
gage conforming to the NF32350 Standard.

2 If any friction point is experienced during this check, restore the splines.

NOTE: Broach the splines of the butterfly (04-160) if necessary with the special
broach (T34)

(h) Check of the Pneumatic Actuator Linkage Parts (Adjusting Rod (03-180), Rod S/A
(03-310), Clevis (03-160) and Lever (03-320))

NOTE: Do the check that follows before the disassembly of the Peumactic Actuator
S/A (01-330).

1 Check of the butterfly travel (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-040-804-A01)

a Measure "T" travel (Ref. Fig. 5004).

b Corrective action

– If "T" is less than 0,6 mm (0.024 in) the parts can be re-assembled as they are.
– If "T" is within 0,6 and 1 mm (0.024 to 0.04 in), replace the two pins (03-190)
and (03-340) by new ones (P/N 6713-11).
– If "T" is greater than 1 mm (0.04 in) rework the linkage parts:

• Rod (03-180) and clevis (03-160), (Ref. to REPAIR No. 7 TASK

36-11-51-300-803-A01)
• Rod S/A (03-310) and lever (03-320), (Ref. to REPAIR No. 8 TASK
36-11-51-300-804-A01).

36-11-51 Page 5010

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Butterfly Travel

Figure 5004/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-036-A01

36-11-51 Page 5011

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(i) Check of the Butterfly Shaft (04-070) Radial Play (Ref. Fig. 5005)

For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A

1 Measure the radial play:

– If the play value is less than 0,08 mm (0.0031 in), re-assemble the parts as they are.
– If the play value is between 0,08 and 0,12 mm (0.0031 to 0.0047 in), only replace
the needles (04-240), or/and (04-300).
– If the play value exceeds 0,12 mm (0.0047 in), do a check of the shaft (04-070B),
the inner rings (04-290) and (04-170) and the outer rings (04-310) and (04-250)
(Ref. to para. (j), (k) and (l) and Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-801-A01).
– At the end of check, discard and renew the defective parts, except with
the shaft (04-070B) which can be repaired (Ref. to REPAIR No. 11 TASK
36-11-51-300-807-A01). Assemble those parts with new balls (04-180) and
needles (04-240) and (04-300).

(j) Check of the Shaft (04-070B) (Ref. Fig. 5006)

For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt "A"

1 Do a check of the "A", "B" and "C" diameters min. dimensions.

2 In regard to the "A", "B" and "C" diameters min. dimensions checked, re-use or
rework the shaft (Ref. to REPAIR No. 11 TASK 36-11-51-300-807-A01).

36-11-51 Page 5012

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Radial Play of the Butterfly Shaft (04-070) For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A
Figure 5005/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-037-A01

36-11-51 Page 5013

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Shaft (04-070B) For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A
Figure 5006/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-038-A01

36-11-51 Page 5014

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(k) Check of the Parts of the Butterfly Shaft Bearings

For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt "A"

1 Outer rings (04-250), (04-310)

a Do a visual check of the appearance of wear marks on the internal diameter.

They must be even and must not show flat areas.

b Make sure that the internal diameter dimensions are equal to

24,4 (+0,060/+0,020) mm (0.961 to 0.962 in).

2 Inner rings (04-170), (04-290)

a Do a visual check of the appearance of wear marks on the external diameter.

They must be even and must not show flat areas.

b Make sure that the external diameter dimensions are equal to 20,4 (0/-0,040) mm
(0.801 to 0.803 in).

c Make sure that the internal diameter max. dimension is less than or equal to
13,920 mm (0.548 in).

3 Ring (03-580)

a Make sure that the internal diameter dimension is less than or equal to 8,865 mm
(0.349 in).

(l) Check of the Threaded Ring (04-060A) (Ref. Fig. 5007)

For P/N 6714D040000

1 Do a check of the roughness of the upper face of the threaded ring (04-060A),
which must be equal to 0,8 Ra.

2 If roughness exceeds this value, polish the upper face with a fine grade abrasive
paper placed on a flat support.

(m) Check of the Pneumatic Union (01-020)

1 Make sure of the perfect surface condition and protection of the thread.

2 Always discard and replace the union (01-020) in the case of any defect: wear,
distortion, dents, scratches, which can cause seizing (Ref. to DISASSEMBLY).

(n) Check of the Valve Seat (02A-600) (Ref. Fig. 5008)

1 Install a new ball (02A-580).

2 Do a check of the "X" dimension, which must be less than or equal to 6,4 mm
(0.252 in).

3 Reject and replace the valve seat (02A-600) by a new one if out of tolerance.

36-11-51 Page 5015

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Threaded Ring (04-060A) For P/N 6713D040000

Figure 5007/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-039-A01

36-11-51 Page 5016

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Valve Seat (02A-600)

Figure 5008/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-040-A01

36-11-51 Page 5017

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(o) Check of the Adjusting Screw (02A-130) (Ref. Fig. 5009)

1 Do a visual check of the appearance of wear marks on the internal diameter. They
must be even and must not show flat areas.

2 Do a check of the internal diameter dimensions which must be equal to

4 (+0,04/+0) mm (0.1575 to 0.1591 in).

(p) Check of the Clapper (02A-160) (Ref. Fig. 5010)

1 Do a visual check of the appearance of wear marks on the external diameter. They
must be even and must not show flat areas.

2 Do a check of the external diameter dimensions which must be equal to

4 (-0,02/-0,04) mm (0.1575 to 0.1591 in).

(q) Check of Valve Body (02A-530) (Ref. Fig. 5011)

1 Do a visual check of the appearance of wear marks on the internal diameter. They
must be even and must not show flat areas.

2 Do a check of the internal diameter dimension which must be equal to 4

(+0,03/-0) mm (0.1575 to 0.1591 in).

(r) Check of the Clapper (02A-540) (Ref. Fig. 5012)

1 Do a visual check of the appearance of wear marks on the external diameter. They
must be even and must not show flat areas.

2 Do a check of the external diameter dimension which must be equal to 4

(-0,02/-0,04) mm (0.1575 to 0.1591 in).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 5018

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Adjusting Screw (02A-130)

Figure 5009/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-041-A01

36-11-51 Page 5019

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Clapper (02A-160)

Figure 5010/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-042-A01

36-11-51 Page 5020

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Valve Body (02A-530)

Figure 5011/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-043-A01

36-11-51 Page 5021

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Check of the Clapper (02A-540)

Figure 5012/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-044-A01

36-11-51 Page 5022

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR

TASK 36-11-51-380-801-A01
1. REPAIR No. 1: Corrosion Protection

A. Reason for the Job

You can repair a protection that is defective in the conditions that follow:

– There is no anodic chromic protection on small areas only.

– The area where there is no protection does not show strong corrosion.

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M04D ALODINE 1200 USA (MIL-C-5541A) PROTECTIVE MATERIAL
M01X WATER-PROOF PNR: M734C-P1200 ABRASIVE PAPER

NOTE: Refer to the Consumable Materials Table (Ref. TASK 36-11-51-941-801-A01) for
all the data in the list.

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

TASK-36-11-51-100-803-A01 4000 CLEANING OF COMPONENT PARTS
TASK-36-11-51-941-801-A01 9000 CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-160-004-A01
(1) Removal of the Corrosion

(a) Clean the defective parts (Ref. TASK 36-11-51-100-803-A01), then remove all signs of
corrosion with abrasive paper (M01X).

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-380-001-A01
(1) Preparation of the Solution for Alochrome Treatment

(a) Use 30 g (1.058 oz) of protective material (M04D) for each liter of water to prepare
the solution.

(b) Make sure that the solution is always at ambient temperature.

(c) Mix the solution until full dissolution.

36-11-51 Page 6001

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-380-002-A01
(2) Alochrome Treatment

(a) Apply the solution with a brush on the areas without protection.

(b) Let the solution dry during 3 to 4 minutes.

(c) Flush with cold water.

(d) Let dry in ambient air.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-360-801-A01
2. REPAIR No. 2: Electrical Bonding

A. Reason for the Job

Do the electrical bonding procedure that is applicable at the bonding point (Ref. Fig. 6001).

You can repair the bonding area of the re-used part if necessary.

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M03C BRISAL 0X50-851 VASELINE
M15D NYCOTE7-11BLUE VARNISH MATERIAL

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-045-A01 6000 FIGURE 6001

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-001-A01
(1) Electrical Bonding

(a) The different assemblies are identified by a figure engraved in the symbol. This symbol
shows the electrical bonding procedures that are necessary (Ref. Fig. 6001).

(b) Spotfacing (S)

Spotface the contact areas with the applicable spotfacing tool. The spotfacing depth must
be less than 0,1 mm (0.004 in).

(c) Tapping (T)

To remove the protection that is there, chase the threaded hole with the applicable
finishing tap.

(d) Vaseline (V)

1 Before assembly and thus during the spotfacing and tapping procedures:

– Apply a thin layer of vaseline (M03C) on the areas where there is no corrosion
protection.

2 This vaseline makes the quantity of the contact points better for corrosion protection.

36-11-51 Page 6003

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(e) Varnishing (Va)

After you assemble the parts:

– Remove unwanted vaseline with a clean cloth.

– Apply a thin layer of varnish material (M15D).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6004

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 2: Bonding Operations

Figure 6001/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-045-A01

36-11-51 Page 6005

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-330-801-A01
3. REPAIR No. 3: Replacement of the Hard-Chrome Plating in the Valve Body (04-340)
(Ref. Fig. 6002)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M26A HYDROFLUORIC ACID CLEANING MATERIAL
M27A NITRIC ACID CLEANING MATERIAL
M28A SODIUM BICHROMATE PURIFIED TO 99 CLEANING MATERIAL
%
M33A DEMINERALIZED WATER CLEANING MATERIAL

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-046-A01 6000 FIGURE 6002
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS
SUBTASK-36-11-51-330-001-A01 6000 REMOVAL OF THE EXISTING
HARD-CHROME PLATING

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-210-001-A01
(1) Check

(a) Do a check of the Valve Body S/A (04-340) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01 Para.
(f)) to determine its condition and the action to be taken.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-002-A01
(2) Rework of One Flange Face of the Valve Body (04-340)

(a) Before you remove the existing hard-chrome plating, lap the downstream side of the
valve body.

36-11-51 Page 6006

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-330-001-A01
(3) Removal of the Existing Hard-Chrome Plating
(Ref. Fig. 6002)

(a) Install the valve body (04-340) on a grinding machine:

– Attach the downstream side of the valve body to the plate of the machine.
– Center the valve body according to the diameter "B".
– Set the position of the valve body according to the dimension 57,1 (+0,2/0) mm
(2.248 to 2.255 in) on the side of the support plate of the pneumatic actuator. This
dimension is marked on the support plate.
– Set the position of the valve to obtain the symmetry of 0,10 mm (0.0040 in) of the
30 (+0,024/-0,007) mm diameters (1.1808 to 1.1820 in).

(b) Remove the hard-chrome plating

1 Grind the hard-chrome plating area of a length around 25 mm (0.98 in) to get a
diameter "A" of 101,8 (-0,1/0) mm (4.007 to 4.011 in). The maximum Ra roughness
must be 0,4 micron (16 microinches A. A).

2 Spotface an unmachined reference spot next to the hard-chrome plating area to get
the center reference for the grinding of the hard-chrome plating of the valve body
(Ref. Fig. 6002 “Spotfaced Area”).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-330-002-A01
(4) Hard-Chrome Plating of the Valve Body (04-340)
(Ref. Fig. 6002)

(a) Material of the valve body Z15CNWS22-13 per AFNOR Specification.

(b) Do a treatment by hard-chrome electrolytic deposit per ISO-6158 specification over a

length of 23 (+2/0) mm (0.90 to 0.98 in) and a thickness of 0,5 mm (0.0196 in).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-003-A01
(5) Grinding of the Hard-Chrome Plating
(Ref. Fig. 6002)

(a) Install, center and set the position of the valve body on a grinding machine with the center
unmachined reference spot as a center reference of the valve body (04-340) (Ref. to
Subtask 36-11-51-330-001-A01 Para. (b)).

(b) Grind the hard-chrome plating area over a length of 25 mm (0.98 in) to get a diameter "A"
of 101,2 (+0,035/+0) mm (3.984 to 3.985 in).

(c) The Ra roughness must be 0,2 micron (8 microinches A. A).

(d) Remove the excess of hard-chrome plating on the two sides of the treated area (Ref.
Fig. 6002 Detail A).

– The length of the chrome area must be equal to 23 (+2/0) mm (0.905 to 0.984 in).

(e) Do a chamfer of 0,5 at 45 on the chrome area at the location of the diameters
17,7 ± 0,1 mm (0.692 to 0.700 in) and 15 ± 0,1 mm (0.586 to 0.594 in).

36-11-51 Page 6007

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 3: Replacement of the Hard-Chrome in the Valve Body (04-340)

Figure 6002/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-046-A01

36-11-51 Page 6008

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-004-A01
(6) Reworking of the Valve Body (04-340) Bore
(Ref. Fig. 6002 Details B and C)

(a) If necessary, rework the score traces in the valve body (04-340) bore areas.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-210-002-A01
(7) Final Check after Reworking
(Ref. Fig. 6002)

(a) Make sure that the symmetry of the hard-chrome area with the "B" common area is
within 0,10 mm (0.004 in).

(b) Make sure that the cylindricity of the hard-chrome area is within 0,02 mm (0.0008 in).

(c) The part can be accepted for further use if within the above-specified values in steps
(a) and (b).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-005-A01
(8) Marking

(a) Engrave a letter R at the end of the part number of the valve body:

6713-011R
or
6713-0611R

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-006-A01
(9) Passivation

(a) Degreasing

Degrease in perchlorethylene vapor for 5 minutes.

(b) Chemical degreasing

Degrease in a bath compound of alkaline material at 65 C ± 5 C (140 F to 158 F).

(c) Rinsing

Rinse in clean running water.

(d) Etching

Do the treatment at ambient temperature.

Dip the valve body for 10 minutes in the solution that follows:

– Demineralized water cleaning material (M33A): 67,5 % in volume

– Fluorydric acid cleaning material (M26A): 2,5 % in volume
– Nitric acid cleaning material (M27A): 30 % in volume.

(e) Rinsing

Rinse in clean running water.

36-11-51 Page 6009

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(f) Passivation treatment

Do the treatment at ambient temperature.

Dip the valve body in the solution that follows:

– Demineralized water cleaning material (M33A): 77,5 % in volume

– Nitric acid cleaning material (M27A): 20 % in volume
– Sodium bichromate cleaning material (M28A): 2,5 % in volume.

(g) Rinsing

Rinse in cold running water.

(h) Drying

Dry in dry, clean compressed air.

(i) Check

Do a visual check at the end of the treatment. The treated area must not show stains,
pitting and veining marks.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6010

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-320-801-A01
For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A

4. REPAIR No. 4: Chamfering on the two Sides of the Washers (04-260B), (04-280) and
(04-320B)

A. Reason for the Job

CAUTION: THE MACHINING OF THE CHAMFER IS DELICATE DUE TO THE HARDNESS OF

THE WASHER MATERIAL HEAT RESISTING STEAL REF. NO KC28W4. THIS STEP
CAN BE DONE ONLY ONCE.

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-047-A01 6000 FIGURE 6003
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-210-003-A01
(1) Check

(a) Do a check of the washer wear to determine if it is repairable (Ref. to Subtask

36-11-51-280-001-A01 Para. (b)).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-800-004-A01
(2) Characteristics of the Old Washers

(a) Outer diameter: 30 (+0,05/-0,01) mm (1.179 to 1.180 in).

(b) Thickness: 1 (+0,05/0) mm (0.039 to 0.041 in).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-007-A01
(3) Chamfering
(Ref. Fig. 6003)

(a) Make a chamfer 0,3 to 0,4 mm at 45 on the side not chamfered.

(b) Make sure that the dimension "a" is greater than or equal to 0,2 mm (0.007 in); if not
discard the washer.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6011

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 4: Chamfering on the two Sides of the Washers (04-260), (04-280) and
(04-320) For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A
Figure 6003/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-047-A01

36-11-51 Page 6012

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-300-801-A01
For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000, 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000 and
6713D050000 Amdt A

5. REPAIR No. 5: Repair of the Valve Body (05-090A) and (05-090B)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M49A 70030 CARECLEAN AS1 CLEANING MATERIAL

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-048-A01 6000 FIGURE 6004
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS
TASK-36-11-51-440-806-A01 7000 ASSEMBLY OF THE OVERPRESSURE
VALVE S/A (01-223)
IPL-36-11-51 10000 ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-210-004-A01
(1) Check

(a) When the overpressure valve operation is found defective (Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-780-011-A01) determine the condition of the valve body (05-095) (Ref. to
Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01 Para. (e)).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-300-001-A01
(2) Repair
(Ref. Fig. 6004)

(a) In accordance with the extent of the wear of the guide sleeve bore fitted in the valve body
(05-095) ream the bore of the guide sleeve to a diameter equal to:

5,01 (+0,012/0) mm (0.1972 to 0.1977 in)

or 5,02 (+0,012/0) mm (0.1976 to 0.1981 in)
or 5,03 (+0,012/0) mm (0.1980 to 0.1985 in)

taking as a reference the contact seats of the clappers (05-060), (05-070) (Ref. Fig. 6004).

36-11-51 Page 6013

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Clean the guide sleeve bore with a soft brush moistened with cleaning material (M49A).

(c) Dry in dry clean compressed air.

(d) Make sure that the bore of the guide sleeve is free from score traces after reworking,
especially at the location of clappers (05-060) and (05-070) contact areas.

– If cracks and scores are found, discard and renew the overpressure valve body (05-090).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-700-001-A01
(3) Test

(a) Test the re-assembled overpressure valve (05-001) (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-440-806-A01).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-008-A01
(4) Marking

(a) At the end of satisfactory test, engrave the valve body with its part number plus the
capital letter "R" (Ref. ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST, Item number (05-095)) using
an electrical pen.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6014

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 5: Repair of the Valve Body (05-090A) and (05-090B)

Figure 6004/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-048-A01

36-11-51 Page 6015

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-300-802-A01
For Microswitch S/A P/N 6713-060

6. REPAIR No. 6: Repair of the Microswitch S/A (03-490A) and (03-490B)

(Ref. Fig. 6005 Sheet 1 and 2 Sketch 1)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M23X GREEN ABRASIVE PAPER ABRASIVE PAPER

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-049-A01 6000 FIGURE 6005 SHEET 1/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-049-A01 6000 FIGURE 6005 SHEET 2/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-063-A01 7000 FIGURE 7009 SHEET 1/3
SUBTASK-36-11-51-040-004-A01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-040-004-B01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03-490)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-040-004-C01 3000 DISASSEMBLY OF THE MI-
CROSWITCHES (03A-490F)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-300-002-A01
(1) Replacement of the Lever (03-527)

(a) Check

1 Do a check of the Microswitch S/A (03-490) (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01

Para. (c)) to determine its condition.

(b) Removal

1 Remove the microswitches (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-040-004-A01, Ref. to Subtask

36-11-51-040-004-B01 or Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-040-004-C01).

36-11-51 Page 6016

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(c) Disassembly (Ref. Fig. 6005 Sheet 1)

1 Remove the pin (03-523) with a drift.

2 Remove the lever (03-527).

3 Remove the spring (03-529) and the two washers (03-525).

(d) Repair

1 Pin (03-523)

a Polish the pin with abrasive paper (M23X).

b Do a check of the pin diameter at the location of the contact area with the
lever (03-527). This diameter must be equal to 2 (-0,03/-0,07) mm (0.0775
to 0.0814 in).

c If the pin diameter is less than the specified value, discard the pin and use a
new one.

2 Washers (03-525)

a Make sure that the washers thickness is equal to 0,5 (-0/-0,08) mm (0.0165
to 0.0196 in).

b If the thickness is less than the specified value, discard them and use new ones.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-001-A01
(2) Assembly
(Ref. Fig. 6005 Sheet 2)

(a) Insert one end of the spring (03-529) in its mounting hole in the Microswitch S/A body.
At the same time, maintain the spring (03-529) into position with a drift (Ref. Fig. 6005
Sheet 2 Sketch 1).

(b) Insert the spring centering seat of the lever (03-527) into the other end of the spring
(03-529).

CAUTION: FOR ACCESSIBILITY REASONS, THE ONLY TYPE OF LEVER TO BE USED IS

THE LEVER P/N 6717-65.

(c) Squeeze the spring (03-529) and engage the lever (03-527) into the body of the
Microswitch S/A, to bring the lever/spring assembly into the correct position (beyond the
switch push-button) (Ref. Fig. 6005 Sheet 2 Sketch 2).

(d) Align the pin mounting holes of the lever with the corresponding holes in the Microswitch
S/A body.

(e) Insert one washer (03-525) on each side of the lever (03-527).

(f) Insert the pin (03-523) into the Microswitch S/A body and lever mounting holes. Center
the pin (03-523) relative to the Microswitch S/A body.

36-11-51 Page 6017

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(g) Lock the pin (03-523) into position by staking with a punch microswitch body in one
point at each end.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-300-003-A01
(3) Extension of the Electrical Wires Length
(Ref. Fig. 6005 Sheet 2 Sketch 2)

(a) Check (Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 1)

1 This step must be done if the length of one or several electrical wires is less than the
minimum length defined hereafter after several repair steps:

– 30 mm (1.20 in) for the common white lead

– 50 mm (2 in) for the each of blue (No. 2) and yellow (No. 3) leads.

(b) Repair procedure

1 Strip the ends of each lead (of the additional length and of the existing lead) over a
6 mm (0.23 in) length.

2 Insert the piece of sleeve of 15 mm (0.6 in) on the lead.

3 Insert the two ends of the leads into the splice (03-550).

4 Climp the plice with the appropriate tool (of the AMP Type).

5 Place the 12 mm (0.48 in) piece of sleeve over the splice. Heat-shrink the sleeve.

6 Align the leads and bring the piece of sleeve of 15 mm (0.23 in) over the lead and the
splice. Heat-shrink the sleeve.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-009-A01
(4) Marking

(a) At the end of the repair procedure, engrave a capital letter "R" at the end of the part
number of the Microswitch S/A (03-490), with an electrical pen.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6018

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 6: Repair of the Microswitch S/A (03-490)

(Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 6005/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-049-A01

36-11-51 Page 6019

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 6: Repair of the Microswitch S/A (03-490)

(Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 6005/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-049-A01

36-11-51 Page 6020

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-300-803-A01
7. REPAIR No. 7: Repair of the Clevis (03-160) and the Adjusting Rod (03-180)
(Ref. Fig. 6006)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-050-A01 6000 FIGURE 6006

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-300-004-A01
(1) Repair of the Clevis (03-160)
(Ref. Fig. 6006)

(a) Ream the bore to 5 (+0,012/0) mm (0.196 to 0.197 in).

(b) Identify the reworked clevis with an R marked at the end of its part number.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-300-005-A01
(2) Repair of the Adjusting Rod (03-180)
(Ref. Fig. 6006)

(a) Ream the bore to 5 (+0,012/0) mm.

(b) Identify the reworked adjusting rod, with an R marked at the end of its part number.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6021

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 7: Repair of the Clevis (03-160B) and the Adjusting Rod (03-180B)
Figure 6006/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-050-A01

36-11-51 Page 6022

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-300-804-A01
8. REPAIR No. 8: Repair of Level (03-320) and the Rod S/A (03-310)
(Ref. Fig. 6007)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-051-A01 6000 FIGURE 6007

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-300-006-A01
(1) Repair of the Level (03-320)
(Ref. Fig. 6007)

(a) Ream the bore to 5 (+0,012/0) mm.

(b) Identify the reworked lever, with an R marked at the end of its part number.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-300-007-A01
(2) Repair of Rod S/A (03-310)
(Ref. Fig. 6007)

(a) Ream the Bore to 5 (+0,012/0) mm.

(b) Identify the reworked Rod S/A, with an R marked at the end of its part number.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6023

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 8: Repair of the Lever (03-320B) and the Rod S/A (03-310B)
Figure 6007/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-051-A01

36-11-51 Page 6024

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-300-805-A01
For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A

9. REPAIR No. 9: Repair of the Shaft (04-070B)

(Ref. Fig. 6008)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-052-A01 6000 FIGURE 6008
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-210-005-A01
(1) Check

(a) Do a check of the shaft (04-070B), (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01 Para. (j)) to
determine its condition and the action to be taken.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-016-A01
(2) Removal of Wear Traces on the "A" and "B" Diameters of the Shaft (04-070B)

(a) Grind the worn area on the "A" diameter to 13,8 (-0,006/-0,022) mm (0.5424 to 0.5430 in)
diameter dimension.

(b) Grind the worn area on the "B" diameter to 8,7 (-0,02/-0,08) mm (0.3393 to 0.3417 in)
diameter dimension.

(c) Nickel plating

1 Material of shaft: E26NCT25 as per AFNOR specification.

2 Do a treatment by nickel electroless deposit per ISO-4527 specification. The nickel

plating thickness on the "A" and "B" diameters is 0,05 mm (0.00196 in).

(d) Final check after nickel plating

1 Make sure that the "A" diameter dimension is 13,9 (-0,006/-0,022) mm (0.5463 to
0.5470 in).

36-11-51 Page 6025

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

2 Make sure that the "B" diameter dimension is 8,8 (-0,02/-0,08) mm (0.3433 to
0.3456 in).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-010-017-A01
(3) Removal of Wear Traces on the "C" Diameter of the Shaft (04-070B)
(Ref. Fig. 6008)

(a) Machine the "C" diameter to 9 (+0,01/+0,005) mm diameter (0.3545 to 0.3547 in).

(b) Machine a ring (Ref. Fig. 6008). Material of ring: EZ6NCT25 as per AFNOR Specification.

(c) Heat the ring to 200 C to obtain a correct expansion of the internal bore.

CAUTION: TAKE CARE TO INSTALLATION DIRECTION AND ANGULAR POSITION OF THE

4,1 (+0,1/+0) MM (0.161 TO 0.165 IN) DIAMETER HOLE OF THE MACHINED
RING.

(d) Install the machined ring on the tip of the shaft with a hand press.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-010-A01
(4) Marking

(a) At the end of the repair procedure, engrave a capital letter "R" at the end of the part
number of the shaft (04-070B), with an electrical pen.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6026

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 9: Repair of the Shaft (04-070) For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A
Figure 6008/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-052-A01

36-11-51 Page 6027

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-300-806-A01
10. REPAIR No. 10: Repair of Wear, Impact Damage on the Pneumatic Actuator Body S/A
(03-241A)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

Not applicable

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-210-006-A01
(1) Check

(a) Measure the thickness of the Body S/A (03-241A) at the location of wear/impact.

(b) If thickness is less than 0,75 mm (0.030 in), discard the Body S/A, which is not repairable.

(c) If thickness is greater than 0,75 mm (0.030 in), return the Body S/A to our Commercial
and Repair Administration Department for repair.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6028

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-300-807-A01
11. REPAIR No. 11: Repair of the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610)
(Ref. Fig. 6009)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M04D ALODINE 1200 COATING MATERIAL

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-053-A01 6000 FIGURE 6009
SUBTASK-36-11-51-320-010-A01 6000 REWORK OF “A” DAMAGED THREADS
IPL-36-11-51 10000 ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-011-A01
(1) Rework of "A" Damaged Threads

(a) Drill a hole to 4,2 mm (0.165 in) diameter and to a max. depth of 7 mm (0.275 in).

(b) Tap to M5x80.

(c) Clean and apply coating material (M04D).

(d) Install a threaded insert P/N KNCML3X0-50 and lock it with an appropriate tool (P/N
TKNC-04-40).

(e) Rework the external thread of the threaded insert P/N KNCML3X0-50 in the counterboring
42,5 (+0,2/0) mm (1.673 to 1.681 in) diameter with an appropriate spotfacer (only for
Regulator Body S/A (02A-610A) and (02A-610B)).

(f) Clean the threaded insert with a dry clean compressed air.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-012-A01
(2) Rework of "B" Damaged Threads

(a) Drill a hole to 4,2 mm (0.165 in) diameter and to a max. depth of 8 mm (0,314 in).

(b) Tap to M5x80.

36-11-51 Page 6029

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(c) Clean and apply coating material (M04D).

(d) Install a threaded insert P/N KNCML3x0-50 and lock it with an appropriate tool (P/N
TKNC-04-40).

(e) Clean the threaded insert with a dry clean compressed air.

NOTE: For all the other holes on the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610) Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-320-010-A01 or replace the damaged thread by a locking nut.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-320-013-A01
(3) Rework by a Locking Nut

(a) Replace the screw fitted on the Regulator Body S/A and mentioned on the ILLUSTRATED
PARTS LIST by a 4 mm longer screw.

Example: P/N 22223CF030010E replaced by P/N 22223CF030014E.

(b) Complete then with a locking nut P/N 22541P030 and washer P/N 23111DB030.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6030

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 11: Repair of the Regulator Body S/A (02A-610)

Figure 6009/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-053-A01

36-11-51 Page 6031

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-300-808-A01
For the Microswitch S/A, P/N 6713-0230

12. REPAIR No. 12: Repair of the Level of the Microswitch S/A (03-490C)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE BLOCK DESIGNATION

GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-054-A01 6000 FIGURE 6010
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-210-007-A01
(1) Check

(a) Do a check of the microswitch (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01 Para. (e)).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-300-008-A01
(2) Repair

(a) Machining

1 Rework the lever (Ref. Fig. 6010).

2 Machine the implanted piece made from:

– Stainless steel material Z15CN17-03

– Resistance to rupture: Rm ≥ 880 MPa (Ref. Fig. 6010).

(b) Crimping

1 Place the microswitch on a base block.

2 Install and crimp the implanted piece on the lever (Ref. Fig. 6010).

3 Make sure, after the crimping step, that the implanted piece has no play.

(c) Marking

1 Engrave the repair part number on the microswitch body using a permanent pen:
6713-0230R.

36-11-51 Page 6032

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 6033

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REPAIR No. 12: Repair of the Microswitch S/A (03-490C) For the Microswitch S/A P/N 6713-0230
Figure 6010/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-054-A01

36-11-51 Page 6034

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

ASSEMBLY

TASK 36-11-51-440-801-A01
1. Assembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M23C NEVER SEEZ NSB4M LUBRICATING MATERIAL

(2) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Instrumentation

DESIGNATION QTY CHARACTERISTICS

FLOWMETER 1 RANGE: 0 TO 10 L/MIN (0 TO 0.2 CU.FT/MIN)
FLOWMETER 1 RANGE: 80 TO 800 L/MIN (2.81 TO
28.16 CU.FT/MIN)
DIAL GAGE 1 RANGE: 0 TO 15 BAR REL. (0 TO 217.5 PSIG)

(b) Energy Sources

DESIGNATION QTY CHARACTERISTICS

STABILIZED PNEUMATIC SUPPLY 1 RANGE: 0 TO 10 BAR REL. (0 TO 145 PSIG)

(c) Equipment

DESIGNATION QTY CHARACTERISTICS

LABORATORY TEST BENCH 1

(d) Connections

Ref. Fig. 1001 Sheet 1 to 3

(e) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T12 OS23105 1 RIVETING TOOL
OR M65724008
T25 M65724320 1 RIVETING DIE

36-11-51 Page 7001

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(3) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-015-A01 1000 FIGURE 1001 SHEET 1/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-015-A01 1000 FIGURE 1001 SHEET 2/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-015-A01 1000 FIGURE 1001 SHEET 3/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-055-A01 7000 FIGURE 7001

C. Job Set-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-210-008-A01
(1) Preliminary Operations

(a) Make sure with a 2 mm thick shim that the butterfly groove is in good condition. If any
burrs are observed, grind them with a thin file.

D. Procedure

NOTE: Upon installation apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on all the threaded parts.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-002-A01
For P/N except 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

(1) Assembly of the Sealing Ring to the Butterfly S/A (04-080)

(Ref. Fig. 7001)

(a) Install the sealing ring (04-140C), then the sealing ring (04-150B) into the butterfly groove
with their slots diametrically opposite and in line with the butterfly rotation axis.

(b) Install the ring (04-130B) against the sealing ring (04-150B).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-002-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(2) Assembly of the Sealing Ring to the Butterfly S/A (04-080)

(Ref. Fig. 7001)

(a) Install the sealing ring (04-155) into the butterfly groove with its slot in line with the
butterfly rotation axis.

(b) Install the ring (04-130B) against the sealing ring (04-155).

36-11-51 Page 7002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-003-A01
For P/N except 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

(3) Final Assembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080)

(Ref. Fig. 7001)

(a) Position the locking plate (04-110B) correctly centered into the butterfly notch and secure
it with the rivet (04-120).

NOTE: Do the riveting on the butterfly face opposite to the locking plate (04-110B) with
the riveting tool (T12) and the riveting die (T25).

NOTE: Make sure that the ring (04-130) does not protrude from the sealing rings
periphery and do a check of the sealing rings (04-140C) and (04-150B).

(b) Insert the ring (04-130) free ends through the locking plate (04-110B) slot.

(c) Insert a shim between the sealing ring (04-150) and the ring (04-130), in front of the
locking plate (04-110) to maintain the ring (04-130) ends against the butterfly groove side.

(d) Fold the ring (04-130) ends over the locking plate edges.

(e) Fold back the tab of the locking plate (04-110B).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-003-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(4) Final Assembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080)

(Ref. Fig. 7001)

(a) Position the locking plate (04-110B) correctly centered into the butterfly notch and secure
it with the rivet (04-120).

NOTE: Do the riveting on the butterfly face opposite to the locking plate (04-110B) with
the riveting tool (T12) and the riveting die (T25).

NOTE: Make sure that the ring (04-130) does not protrude from the sealing rings
periphery do a check of the sealing ring (04-155).

(b) Insert the ring (04-130) free ends through the locking plate (04-110B) slot.

(c) Insert a shim between the sealing ring (04-155) and the ring (04-130), in front of the
locking plate (04-110) to maintain the ring (04-130) ends against the butterfly groove side.

(d) Fold the ring (04-130) ends over the locking plate edges.

(e) Fold back the tab of the locking plate (04-110B).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 7003

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Assembly of the Butterfly S/A (04-080)

Figure 7001/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-055-A01

36-11-51 Page 7004

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-440-802-A01
2. Assembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M23C NEVER SEEZ NSB4M LUBRICATING MATERIAL
M01X ABRASIVE PAPER ABRASIVE PAPER

(2) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T02 OS22911 1 SPECIAL TOOL
OR M65724009A
T06 OS22964A 1 TEST TOOL
T09 M65723164A 1 SETTING TOOL
T10 M65723979 1 SUPPORT
T13 OS22868A 2 BLANKING CAP
T14 OS23119 1 SPECIAL PLUG
OR M8210043-1
T34 M65723908A 1 SPECIAL BROACH
T42 M65725171 1 SPECIAL TOOL
T43 M65725224 1 SPECIAL TOOL

(3) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-056-A01 1000 FIGURE 7002
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-057-A01 7000 FIGURE 7003
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-058-A01 7000 FIGURE 7004
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-059-A01 7000 FIGURE 7005
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-060-A01 7000 FIGURE 7006
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-061-A01 7000 FIGURE 7007 SHEET 1/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-061-A01 7000 FIGURE 7007 SHEET 2/2

36-11-51 Page 7005

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS
TASK-36-11-51-300-805-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 9: REPAIR OF THE SHAFT
(04-070B)
TASK-36-11-51-320-801-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 4: CHAMFERING ON
THE TWO SIDES OF THE WASHERS
(04-260B), (04-280) AND (04-320B)
TASK-36-11-51-440-801-A01 7000 ASSEMBLY OF THE BUTTERFLY S/A
(04-080)
TASK-36-11-51-820-802-A01 8000 TIGHTENING TORQUES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

NOTE: Upon installation apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on all the threaded parts.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-004-A01
For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000 or 6713D040000

(1) Assembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250)

(Ref. Fig. 7002 and
Ref. Fig. 7003)

NOTE: Broach the splines of the butterfly (04-160) if necessary with the special broach (T34).

NOTE: Make sure that the shaft (04-070) can slide freely inside the Butterfly S/A (04-080C) or
(04-080D).

(a) Assemble the Butterfly S/A (04-080) (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-440-801-A01).

(b) Split the sealing rings (04-050), (04-210), (04-330), (04-270) as follows:

1 Place a sealing ring on a soft flat support (rubber).

2 With a round wooden rod, placed against the rim of the sealing ring, apply a slight
pressure by hand.

(c) Assembly of the lower bearing

1 Install the valve body (04-340) on the support (T10).

2 Install the sealing ring (04-330) into the valve body (04-340) bore.

CAUTION: DO A CHECK AND REPAIR THE WASHERS (04-320) AND (04-280) IF

NECESSARY (REF. TO REPAIR NO. 4 TASK 36-11-51-320-801-A01).

36-11-51 Page 7006

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

3 Install the washer (04-320B) with its chamfered side facing the contact area of
the valve body bore.

4 Temporarily install the shaft (04-070B) to be used as a guide during steps (e), (f), (g).

CAUTION: DO A CHECK OR REPLACE THE RINGS (04-290) AND (04-310) IF

NECESSARY (REF. TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (K).1
AND 2).

DO A CHECK, REPAIR THE SHAFT (04-070B) IF NECESSARY (REF. TO

SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (J) AND REF. TO REPAIR NO.
9 TASK 36-11-51-300-805-A01).

5 Install the bearing made up of the inner ring (04-290), the thirty-five needles (04-300)
and the outer ring (04-310).

6 Place the washer (04-280) on the top of the bearing.

7 Install the two sealing rings (04-050) with their slots diametrically opposite.

8 Install the threaded ring (04-030) equipped with the lockwasher (04-040) into the
valve body (04-340) with the special tool (T02).

9 Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

10 Safety by folding down the lockwasher (04-040) tabs into the castellated notches of
the valve body (04-340).

11 Remove the shaft (04-070B).

(d) Position the Butterfly S/A (04-080C) or (04-080D) into the valve body (04-340).

(e) Angular positioning of the shaft splines

1 Apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on the contact areas between the shaft
(04-070) and the Butterfly S/A (04-080C) or (04-080D) except with the splines area of
the shaft (04-070) and the splines area of the Butterfly S/A (04-080C) or (04-080D).

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE SEALING RINGS (04-330), (04-050)
WHEN YOU INSTALL THE SHAFT (04-070B).

2 Insert the shaft (04-070B) into the valve body (04-340) and orientate its angular
position, so that the Manual Control S/A (04-010) indicates the "CLOSED" position
and that the knurled screw (01-130) can be installed into the locking position of the
Manual Control S/A (04-010) (Ref. Fig. 7002).

3 Attach the manual control (04-010) with the screw (04-020).

4 Torque the screw (04-020) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK

36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(f) Make sure that the manual control (04-010) is tightly fitted to the shaft (04-070) after
torque tightening.

36-11-51 Page 7007

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

– If it is loose, clamp the nut part of the manual control into a vice and shrink it by a slight
pressure while you tighten the screw (04-020) fully.

(g) Install the knurled screw (01-130) into the manual control. Tighten it into its locking
position.

(h) Maintain, by hand, the butterfly (04-080C) or (04-080D) pushed towards the opening
position (Ref. Fig. 7002).

– Verify, in this position, that H is between 44,5 and 48 mm (1.751 and 1.890 in).

(i) Remove the knurled screws (01-130).

(j) Assembly of the upper bearing

For P/N 6714D010000 and 6714D020000

CAUTION: UPON ASSEMBLY DO A CHECK AND CHANGE THE BEARINGS PARTS

(IF NECESSARY) (REF. TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (K)).

1 Rotate the Butterfly S/A (04-080C) or (04-080D) by a quarter turn (butterfly open
position), so that sealing rings (04-140) or (04-150) are not in contact with the valve
body (04-340) bore.

CAUTION: DO A CHECK AND REPAIR THE WASHER (04-260) IF NECESSARY (REF.

TO REPAIR NO. 4 TASK 36-11-51-320-801-A01).

2 Apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on the inside diameter of the stop
(04-275).

3 Install the stop (04-275), the sealing ring (04-270) and the washer (04-260) with its
chamfered side facing the valve body contact face.

4 Install the parts that follow:

– The bearing made up of the bearing ring (04-170)

– The outer ring (04-250)
– The thirty-five needles (04-240)
– The washer (04-230)
– Twenty balls (04-180)
– The bearing ring (04-190).

5 Install the four shims (04-200) as a pre-setting.

6 Install the two sealing rings (04-210) with their slots diametrically opposite.

7 Install and secure the threaded ring (04-060A) equipped with the washer lock
(04-220) into the valve body (04-340). Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

CAUTION: NEVER RE-USE THE SCREW (04-090). DISCARD IT AND REPLACE IT

BY A NEW ONE.

8 Install the screw (04-090) and the lockwasher (04-100) into the butterfly (04-160).
Do not tighten the screw (04-090) yet.

36-11-51 Page 7008

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(k) Assembly of the upper bearing

For P/N 6713D040000

CAUTION: UPON ASSEMBLY DO A CHECK AND CHANGE THE BEARINGS PARTS

(IF NECESSARY) (REF. TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (K)).

1 Rotate the Butterfly S/A (04-080C) or (04-080D) by a quarter turn (butterfly open
position), so that sealing ring (04-155) are not in contact with the valve body (04-340)
bore.

CAUTION: DO A CHECK AND REPAIR THE WASHER (04-260) IF NECESSARY (REF.

TO REPAIR NO. 4 TASK 36-11-51-320-801-A01).

2 Apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on the inside diameter of the stop
(04-275).

3 Install the stop (04-275), the sealing ring (04-270) and the washer (04-260) with its
chamfered side facing the valve body contact face.

4 Install the parts that follow:

– The bearing made up of the bearing ring (04-170)

– The outer ring (04-250)
– The thirty-five needles (04-240)
– The washer (04-230)
– Twenty balls (04-180)
– The bearing ring (04-190).

5 Install the four shims (04-200) as a pre-setting.

6 Install the two sealing rings (04-210) with their slots diametrically opposite.

CAUTION: BEFORE ASSEMBLY, DO A CHECK AND POLISH IF NECESSARY THE

ROUGHNESS OF THE THREADED RING (04-060A) UPPER FACE (REF.
TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (L)).

7 Install and secure the threaded ring (04-060A) equipped with the washer lock
(04-220) into the valve body (04-340). Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

CAUTION: NEVER RE-USE THE SCREW (04-090). DISCARD IT AND REPLACE IT

BY A NEW ONE.

8 Install the screw (04-090) and the lockwasher (04-100) into the butterfly (04-160).
Do not tighten the screw (04-090) yet.

(l) Adjustment of clearance between the butterfly body edge and the bore of the valve
body (04-340) (Ref. Fig. 7003)

1 Install the setting tool (T09) (Ref. Fig. 7003).

2 Bring the butterfly-shaft assembly in its upwards extreme position with the knurled
screw of the setting tool (T09).

36-11-51 Page 7009

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

3 Measure the upwards clearance between the butterfly body edge and the valve body
(04-340) bore (Ref. Fig. 7003). The upwards clearance (A) must range between
0,4 and 0,5 mm (0.015 to 0.019 in).

4 If the correct clearance values cannot be achieved, modify the number of shims
(04-200) accordingly.

5 Fold down the lockwasher (04-220) tabs.

6 Positioning of the shaft (04-070) shoulder with the threaded ring (04-060A) upper face

For P/N 6714D010000 and 6714D020000

– Adjust the shaft (04-070) position so that its shoulder comes in line with the
threaded ring (04-060) upper face with a ± 0,15 mm (0.006 in) clearance.

For P/N 6714D040000

– Adjust the shaft position, so that its shoulder is located below the upper face of the
threaded ring (04-060) to within - 0,1 and - 0,3 mm (0.004 to 0.012 in).

7 Torque the screw (04-090) to the maximum specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

8 Fold down the lockwasher (04-100) tabs.

36-11-51 Page 7010

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Angular Positioning of the Shaft Splines

Figure 7002/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-056-A01

36-11-51 Page 7011

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Adjustment of the Clearance between the Butterfly Body Edge and the Valve Body Bore
For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000 or 6713D040000
Figure 7003/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-057-A01

36-11-51 Page 7012

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-004-B01
For P/N 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000, 6713D060000
Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(2) Assembly of the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250)

(Ref. Fig. 7002,
Ref. Fig. 7004 and
Ref. Fig. 7005)

NOTE: Make sure that the shaft (04A-070C) can slide freely inside the Butterfly S/A (04-080C)
or (04A-080D).

(a) Assemble the Butterfly S/A (04-080) (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-440-801-A01).

(b) Split the sealing rings (04A-050B), (04A-051), (04-210B), (04A-215B) and (04A-270) as
follows:

1 Place a sealing ring on a soft flat support (rubber).

2 With a round wooden rod, placed against the rim of the sealing ring, apply a slight
pressure by hand.

(c) Butterfly S/A (04A-080D) positioning into the Valve Body (04A-340) (Ref. Fig. 7004)

NOTE: For this positioning, use temporarily the upper and lower ball bearings (04A-255)
and (04A-305) in order to center the shaft (04A-070C) into the valve body
(04A-340). After this positioning remove the two ball bearings (04A-255) and
(04A-305).

NOTE: Make sure that the ball bearings (04-255) and (04A-305) can be engaged freely
into the valve body (04A-340) bore. In case of a friction point polish the valve
body (04A-340) with abrasive paper (M01X).

1 Apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on the contact areas (except the grooves)
between the shaft (04A-070C) and the Butterfly S/A (04A-080D).

2 Insert the shaft (04A-070C) into the valve body (04A-340) and into the Butterfly
S/A (04A-080D).

3 Insert the ball bearings (04A-255) and (04A-305) into the bore of the valve body
(04A-340). Then orientate the angular position of the shaft (04A-070C), so that the
Manual Control S/A (04A-010) indicates the "CLOSED" position and that the knurled
screw (01A-130) can be installed into the locking position of the Manual Control S/A
(04A-010) (Ref. Fig. 7002).

4 Temporarily attach the manual control (04A-010) with the screw (04A-020) and
tighten it.

5 Install the knurled screw (01-130) into the manual control. Tighten it into its locking
position.

6 Maintain, by hand, the butterfly (04-080) pushed towards the opening position (Ref.
Fig. 7002).

36-11-51 Page 7013

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

– Verify in this position that H is between 44,5 and 48 mm (1.751 to 1.890 in).

7 Remove the knurled screws (01-130) and the manual control (04A-010) with the
screw (04A-020).

8 Remove the two ball bearings (04A-255) and (04A-305).

(d) Installation of the lower bearing (Ref. Fig. 7005)

1 Install the sealing ring (04A-330) and the washer (04-320C) into the valve body
(04A-340) bore.

2 Install the locking ring (04A-313) in the groove of the shaft (04A-070C) and the
spring washer (04A-315).

CAUTION: ON ASSEMBLY, APPLY A LAYER OF LUBRICATING MATERIAL (M23C)

ON THE PERIPHERAL AREA OF THE BALL BEARING (04A-305).

3 Install the ball bearing (04A-305).

CAUTION: RESPECT IMPERATIVELY THE BALL BEARING INSTALLATION

DIRECTION.

4 Install the special tool (T43) on the tip of the shaft (04A-070C).

5 Install the parts that follow:

– The spring washer retainer (04A-298)

– The spring washer (04A-295)
– The stop (04A-285)
– Two sealing rings (04A-051) and (04A-050B).

CAUTION: TAKE CARE TO POSITION THE INNER RING OF THE SPRING WASHER
(04A-295) INTO THE SHOULDER OF THE STOP (04A-285).

6 Torque the threaded ring (04A-030C) equipped with the lockwasher (04A-040) to the
specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01) with the special tool (T02) and
remove the special tool (T43).

7 Fold down the lockwasher (04A-040) tabs.

8 Install the manual control (04A-010) with the screw (04A-020).

9 Torque the screw (04A-020) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK

36-11-51-820-802-A01).

10 Make sure that the manual control (04A-010) is tightly fitted to the shaft (04A-070C)
after torquing.

– If it is loose, clamp the nut part of the manual control into a vice and shrink it by a
slight pressure while you tighten the screw (04A-020).

(e) Installation of the upper bearing (Ref. Fig. 7005)

1 Install the stop (04A-275), the sealing ring (04A-270) and the washer (04A-260C).

36-11-51 Page 7014

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

2 Adjustment of the Butterfly S/A (04A-080D) position into the valve body (04A-340)

a Install the setting tool (T09) (Ref. Fig. 7004).

b Place a 0,5 mm (0.0198 in) thick shim between the valve body (04A-340) and the
rim of the Butterfly S/A (04A-080D).

c Bring the butterfly shaft assembly in its upwards extreme position with the
knurled screw of the setting tool (T09).

3 Measure "Y" dimension between the face of the washer (04A-260C) and the tip
of the stop (04A-275).

4 Determine, with the "Y" clearance value, the number of shims (04A-259) and
(04A-258) required.

NOTE: Select the upper shim number if "Y" is not a whole number.

Example: With a 0,63 mm (0.0248 in) clearance measured, select to

0,65 mm (0.0255 in) clearance with the shim (04A-259).

5 Install the determined number of shims (04A-259) and (04A-258).

6 Remove the setting tool (T09) and the 0,5 mm (0.0198 in) thick shim.

CAUTION: ON ASSEMBLY, APPLY A LAYER OF LUBRICATING MATERIAL (M23C)

ON THE PERIPHERAL AREA OF THE BALL BEARING (04A-255).

CAUTION: RESPECT IMPERATIVELY THE BALL BEARING INSTALLATION

DIRECTION.

7 Install the ball bearing (04A-255).

8 Install the parts that follow:

– The spacer (04A-245)

– The spring washer (04A-235)
– The stop (04A-225)
– Two sealing rings (04A-215C) and (04A-210B).

CAUTION: TAKE CARE TO POSITION THE INNER RING OF THE SPRING WASHER
(04A-235) INTO THE SHOULDER OF THE STOP (04-225).

9 Tighten the threaded ring (04A-060B) equipped with the lockwasher (04A-220) but
do not torque it. Then remove the setting tool (T09).

10 Torque the threaded ring (04A-060B) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01) with the special tool (T02) and fold down the lockwasher
(04A-220) tab.

11 Install the setting tool (T09) (Ref. Fig. 7005).

12 Make sure that the "A" clearance is always equal to 0,5 mm (0.0196 in) length. Then
remove the setting tool (T09).

36-11-51 Page 7015

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(f) Setting of the pre-load of the shaft (Ref. Fig. 7005)

1 Push the locking ring (04A-313) in contact of the ball bearing (04A-305) to the
manual control.

2 Install and lock the special tool (T42) on the valve body (04A-340).

3 Bring in contact the shaft (04A-070C) shoulder with the knurled screw of the special
tool (T43).

4 Measure "X" clearance between the manual control (04A-010) and the threaded
ring (04A-030C) with the thick shims.

5 Adjust the pre-load of the shaft (04A-070C) by turning clockwise the knurled screw of
the special tool (T43) to obtain a value "E".

E = (X + 0,4 (+0,1/+0) mm
(X + 0.0157 (+0.0039/+0) in)

6 Install the setting tool (T09) in order to maintain the Butterfly S/A (04A-080D)
against the stop (04A-275).

7 Then, torque the screw (04A-090) to the maximum specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

8 Remove the setting tool (T09) and the special tool (T42).

9 Fold down the lockwasher (04A-100) tab.

10 Do a check of the pre-load efficiency of the shaft, with a screw driver, placed between
the manual control (04A-010) and the threaded ring (04A-030C).

36-11-51 Page 7016

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Adjustment of the Clearance between the Butterfly Body Edge and the Valve Body Bore and
Measurement of “Y” Dimension For P/N 6713D040000 Amdt A
Figure 7004/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-058-A01

36-11-51 Page 7017

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Setting of the Preload of the Shaft (04-070C) For P/N 6713D040000 Amdt A
Figure 7005/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-059-A01

36-11-51 Page 7018

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-005-A01
(3) Internal Leakage Test
(Ref. Fig. 7006 and
Ref. Fig. 7007 Sheet 1 and 2)

(a) Install the test tool (T06) on the valve body (04-340).

(b) Install the lever (03-320) (Ref. Fig. 7007 Sheet 1).

(c) Adjust the Buttefly S/A (04-080) in its correct closed position (Ref. Fig. 7006) so that
(h-h’) ranges between 1 and 3 mm (0.040 to 0.118 in).

(d) Install the special plugs (T14) with a seal (01-060) into the valve body pneumatic
connecting holes.

(e) Install the valve body fully with the blanking cap (T13) to test set-up (Ref. Fig. 7007
Sheet 2).

(f) Gradually apply a 10 bar rel. (145 psig) (P1) test pressure.

(g) Make sure that (Q1) leakage on the flowmeter is less than or equal to 222 l/min
(7.836 cu.ft/min).

NOTE: The above leakage value is given for new sealing ring (04-155) (this value is
different from that given for the complete valve).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 7019

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Adjustment of the Butterfly S/A (04-080) Closed Position

Figure 7006/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-060-A01

36-11-51 Page 7020

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Valve Internal Laboratory Leakage Test

Installation of the Test Tool (T06) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 7007/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-061-A01

36-11-51 Page 7021

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Valve Internal Laboratory Leakage Test

Installation of the Test Tool (T06) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 7007/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-061-A01

36-11-51 Page 7022

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-440-803-A01
3. Preparation of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A (01-330)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M23C NEVER SEEZ NSB4M LUBRICATING MATERIAL
M01X ABRASIVE PAPER ABRASIVE PAPER
M23X GREEN ABRASIVE PAPER ABRASIVE PAPER

(2) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-062-A01 7000 FIGURE 7008

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

NOTE: Upon installation apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on all the threaded parts.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-005-A01
(1) Assembly of the Piston S/A (03-220)
(Ref. Fig. 7008)

(a) Install the ring (03-400) into the bore of the Pneumatic Actuator S/A (03-241).

(b) Measure the slot and widen it if necessary by abrading it with abrasive paper (M23X) to
obtain a slot that ranges between 0,2 and 0,3 mm (0.078 to 0.0118 in).

(c) Cut and adjust the expander ring (03-410) to the required length, such that the gap
between its ends upon assembly is between 1 and 5 mm (0.040 to 0.196 in) when
installed in its mounting groove on the piston.

(d) Deburr the expander ring ends with abrasive paper (M01X).

(e) Install the expander ring (03-410) into its piston mounting groove with its tabs orientated
towards the piston rings.

(f) Install the two piston rings (04-400) with their slots 180 apart-and offset with regard to
the expander ring (03-410) gap.

36-11-51 Page 7023

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(g) Insert the flexible ring (03-390) (Ref. Fig. 7008) into the piston groove while you make
sure it bottoms on its whole periphery within groove.

NOTE: Make sure that the gap between the ends is between 0,5 and 2,5 mm (0.020
and 0.1 in).

(h) If necessary, cut then each end of the flexible ring (03-390) to obtain the clearance.

(i) Deburr the end with abrasive paper (M01X).

(j) Upon final assembly of all the rings in the piston groove make sure that all the slots are
offset.

(k) Install the guide rings (03-370) and (03-380) into their groove. Make sure they move freely.

(l) Insert the piston thus equipped into the actuator body (03-240).

(m) Manually do a check several times it moves freely with its mounting bore.

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 7024

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Assembly of the Piston Rings (03-400)

Figure 7008/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-062-A01

36-11-51 Page 7025

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-440-804-A01
4. Assembly of the Pneumatic Actuator with the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250)

A. Reason for the Job

CAUTION: IN THE CASE OF WEAR, IMPACT DAMAGE ON THE PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR

BODY S/A (03-240), DO A CHECK AND REPAIR IF NECESSARY (REF. TO REPAIR
NO. 10 TASK 36-11-51-300-806-A01).

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M63B LOCTITE 648 ADHESIVE MATERIAL
M01C GRAPHITE POWDER LUBRICATING MATERIAL
M23C NEVER SEEZ NSB4M LUBRICATING MATERIAL

(2) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T03 OS22912 1 SPECIAL TOOL
T05 OS22948 1 SPECIAL TOOL
T26 92008A010000 1 POSITION INDICATION BOX
OR 92086A01
T27 M82000189-903A 1 ELECTRICAL CORD
OR M82000189-906
T29A M65724256A 1 SETTING TOOL
T29B M65724365A 1 SETTING TOOL
T29B-1 M65724365A-010 1 MEASURING GAGE
T30 M65724287 1 SPECIAL TOOL
T31 M65724220 1 ADAPTER
T33 M82000228 1 TEST TOOL
T35 M65724309-030 1 SPECIAL TOOL

36-11-51 Page 7026

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(3) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-059-A01 7000 FIGURE 7006
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-062-A01 7000 FIGURE 7009 SHEET 1/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-062-A01 7000 FIGURE 7009 SHEET 2/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-062-A01 7000 FIGURE 7009 SHEET 3/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-063-A01 7000 FIGURE 7010
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-064-A01 7000 FIGURE 7011
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-065-A01 7000 FIGURE 7012
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-066-A01 7000 FIGURE 7013
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-067-A01 7000 FIGURE 7014 SHEET 1/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-067-A01 7000 FIGURE 7014 SHEET 2/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-067-A01 7000 FIGURE 7014 SHEET 3/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-068-A01 7000 FIGURE 7015
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-069-A01 7000 FIGURE 7016
SUBTASK-36-11-51-750-003-A01 1000 POSITION INDICATION TEST (020)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS
TASK-36-11-51-300-802-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 6: REPAIR OF THE
MICROSWICTH S/A (03-490A) AND
(03-490B)
TASK-36-11-51-300-803-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 7: REPAIR OF THE CLEVIS
(03-160) AND THE ADJUSTING ROD
(03-180)
TASK-36-11-51-300-804-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 8: REPAIR OF THE LEVEL
(03-320) AND THE ROD S/A (03-310)
TASK-36-11-51-300-806-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 10: REPAIR OF WEAR,
IMPACT DAMAGE ON THE PNEUMATIC
ACTUATOR BODY S/A (03-241A)
TASK-36-11-51-360-801-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 2: ELECTRICAL BONDING
TASK-36-11-51-820-802-A01 8000 TIGHTENING TORQUES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 7027

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

D. Procedure

NOTE: Upon installation apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on all the threaded parts.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-006-A01
(1) Third Bearing Alignment
(Ref. Fig. 7011)

NOTE: Before you continue the step that follows, do a check of the free rotation of the Butterfly
Shaft S/A.

A free rotation means this sub-assembly rotates twice with a slight impulse.

For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000 Amdt
A and 6713D070000 Amdt A: If the free rotation cannot be obtained, disassemble, do a
check and repair the bearings.

(a) Installation of the third bearing

1 Install the two sealing rings (03-600) in the actuator body (03-240) with their slot
diametrically opposed.

NOTE: If necessary, split the sealing rings (03-600).

2 Apply a layer of lubricating material (M01C) on the preformed packing (03-585).

3 Install the preformed packing (03-585) on the ring (03-580).

4 Install the ring (03-580) in the pneumatic actuator body (03-240).

NOTE: Do a check and replace the ring (03-580) if necessary (Ref. to Subtask
36-11-51-280-001-A01 Para. (k).3).

If necessary heat the pneumatic actuator body between 200 C and 250 C
(392 F to 482 F) to insert the ring (03-580).

(b) Provisional installation of the pneumatic actuator body (03-240) with the Butterfly Valve
S/A (03-250)

1 Install the unequipped actuator body (03-240) with the Butterfly Valve S/A (03-250)
without the seal (03-300).

2 Attach the above assembly with the screws (03-260), the washers (03-270), the
screws (03-290) with the adapter (T31).

3 Loosen the four screws (03-260), (03-290) until they rotate freely.

(c) Determine the contact points between the actuator body (03-240) and the valve body
(03-250) with a light source placed behind this sub-assembly.

(d) Tighten fully the screw that corresponds to the contact points.

36-11-51 Page 7028

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(e) Do a check of the (possible) clearance between the points which are not in contact
between the actuator body (03-240) and the valve body (03-250).

NOTE: The maximum shim thickness allowed for each fixing point is 0,3 mm (0.0118 in).
If this value is exceeded, inspect the valve body (03-250) to determine which
part must be replaced.

(f) Insert the number of shims (03-293), (03-295) to compensate the clearance.

(g) Tighten the four screws (03-290), (03-260), the nuts (03-280) fully with the adapter (T31).

(h) For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000 Amdt
A and 6713D070000 Amdt A: Make sure that the operating torque of the butterfly/shaft
assembly measured with a torquemeter placed on the nut (03-090) secured to the end of
the shaft is less than 3 N.cm (0.265 lbf.in).

NOTE: During the torque measurement, place the butterfly in a position such that the
sealing rings are not in contact with the valve body bore.

(i) Measure the axial displacement of the shaft (04-070) over a quarter of a turn. The shaft
end play must be less than 0,05 mm (0.00196 in). For all P/N except 6713D040000 Amdt
A, 6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000 Amdt A and 6713D070000 Amdt A: If the end
play is greater than 0,05 mm (0.00196 in), refer to the above steps (c) to (h).

NOTE: During this measurement, place the butterfly in such a position that the sealing
rings are not in contact with the valve body bore.

(j) Remove the four screws (03-260), (03-290).

(k) Remove the Pneumatic Actuator Body S/A (03-240).

(l) Note the required number of shims for each attachment point.

(m) Attach the screw (03-360) to the lever (03-320).

NOTE: Never re-use a screw (03-360).

(n) Installation of the shaft (04-070) preloading parts

For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D050000, 6713D060000 and 6713D070000

1 Install, in turn, the parts that follow:

– The sealing ring (04-059) with its recessed side placed against the threaded
ring (04-060)
– The washer (04-057)
– The spring (04-055)
– The stop ring (04-053) with its grooved side placed in opposition to the spring
(04-055).

2 Install the retaining ring (04-052) with the special tool (T35).

36-11-51 Page 7029

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(o) Check of the shaft preloading parts efficiency:

For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D050000, 6713D060000 and 6713D070000

1 Insert a screwdriver tip beneath the manual control (04-010).

2 Actuate the manual control axially with the screwdriver several times.

3 The shaft must return freely to its initial axial position.

(p) Apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on the two sides of the new seal (03-300).
Position it on the butterfly valve (03-250).

NOTE: Do not re-use a seal (03-300).

(q) Assembly of the rods (03-180), (03-310) and lever (03-320) linkage:

CAUTION: DO A CHECK AND REPAIR THE ROD S/A (03-310) AND THE
LEVER (03-320) BEFORE YOU INSTALL THEM (REF. TO SUBTASK
36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (H) AND REF. TO REPAIR NO. 8: TASK
36-11-51-300-804-A01).

INSTALL A NEW THREADED INSERT (03-315) INTO THE ROD S/A, IF

NECESSARY (REF. TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (F)).

DO A CHECK AND REPAIR THE ADJUSTING ROD (03-180) AND THE

CLEVIS (03-160) IF NECESSARY BEFORE YOU INSTALL THEM (REF. TO
SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (H) AND REF. TO REPAIR NO.
7: TASK 36-11-51-300-803-A01).

1 Tighten the adjusting rod (03-180) into the Rod S/A (03-310); five or six threads must
remain apparent between the two parts.

2 Assemble the Rods S/A (03-180)/(03-310) with the lever (03-320), using the pin
(03-330), the lockwasher (03-340), the retaining ring (03-350). Fold down the tabs of
the lockwasher (03-340) (Ref. Fig. 7011).

NOTE: Install the clevis (03-160B) with the adjusting rod (03-180B), the pin
(03-190B), the lockwasher (03-200B) and the retaining ring (03-210B).

Install the Rod S/A (03-320B) with the lever (03-320B), the pin (03-330B),
the lockwasher (03-340B) and the retaining ring (03-350B).

(r) Install the Pneumatic Actuator S/A on the Valve Body S/A, while you position the lever
(03-320) on the tip of the shaft so that the screw (03-360) is located towards the
pneumatic actuator head.

NOTE: Do not engage the splines of the lever (03-320) on the splines of the shaft
(04-070) during this step.

(s) Insert the tip of the shaft through the sealing rings (03-600) and the ring (03-580).

CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE SEALING RINGS (03-600) UPON THE
SHAFT ASSEMBLY.

36-11-51 Page 7030

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(t) Install the determined number of shims (03-293), (03-295) between the pneumatic
actuator and the butterfly valve.

(u) Attach the butterfly Valve/Actuator assembly with the two screws (03-290) and the two
screws (03-260C) equipped with the washers (03-270) and the nuts (03-280).

(v) Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01) with the adapter (T31).

(w) For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000: Repeat the butterfly torque check and the axial
play check as per the above para. (e) and (i).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-007-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

(2) Assembly of the Equipped Casing S/A (03-560)

(Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 1)

CAUTION: DO A CHECK OF THE MICROSWITCHES (03-490C) AND REPAIR THEM IF

NECESSARY (REF. TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (F) AND REF. TO
REPAIR NO. 6 TASK 36-11-51-300-802-A01).

(a) Attach the Casing S/A (03-560) to the body (03-240) with the screws (03-570).

(b) Torque the screws (03-570) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01),
after electrical bonding procedure (Ref. to Repair No. 2 TASK 36-11-51-360-801-A01).

(c) Install the two microswitches (03-490C), with the screws (03-500B) and the washers
(03-520B).

(d) Install the cam (03-080) and secure it with the nut (03-090).

(e) Trim the length of the leads (03-530) to the required length. Strip their ends over 5,5
and 6 mm (0.216 to 0.236 in).

(f) Insert the two white leads of the microswitches and a 65 mm (2.55 in) piece of white lead
in a piece of sleeve (03-540).

(g) Insert the stripped ends of the three white leads into the splice (03-550A). Crimp then the
splice with the crimping pliers P/N AMP46447.

(h) Slide the sleeve (03-540) over the splice (03-550A). Heat-shrink the sleeve (03-540). Place
another piece of sleeve (03-540) over the first piece of sleeve on the splice. Heat-shrink it.

(i) Insert the leads through the hole of the casing (03-560B) and through the nut (03-480).

(j) Crimp the leads to the contact pins (03-460), insert them in the connector (03-420)
(Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 1)

(k) Orientate the connector (03-430) properly (Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 1). Secure it to the
Casing S/A (03-560B) with the screws (03-430). Torque to the specified value (Ref. to
TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(l) Do a check of the insulation resistance of the electrical connector (03-430) as follows:

36-11-51 Page 7031

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

1 Apply 50 VDC between the connector leads connected together and any points of the
valve body (03-241). Make sure, with a megohmmeter that the insulation resistance
is greater than 100 M .

36-11-51 Page 7032

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Installation of the Microswitches and Electrical Connector

For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000 (Sheet 1 of 3)
Figure 7009/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-063-A01

36-11-51 Page 7033

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Installation of the Microswitches and Electrical Connector

For P/N ≥ 6713D040000 and < 6713D070000 (Sheet 2 of 3)
Figure 7009/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-063-A01

36-11-51 Page 7034

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Installation of the Microswitches and Electrical Connector

For P/N 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 3 of 3)
Figure 7009/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-063-A01

36-11-51 Page 7035

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-007-B01
For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt
A, 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(3) Assembly of the Equipped Casing S/A (03-560)

(Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 2)

CAUTION: DO A CHECK OF THE MICROSWITCHES (03-490) AND REPAIR THEM IF

NECESSARY (REF. TO SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (F) AND REF. TO
REPAIR NO. 6 TASK 36-11-51-300-802-A01).

(a) Attach the Casing S/A (03-560) to the body (03-240) with the screws (03-570).

(b) Torque the screws (03-570) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01),
after electrical bonding procedure (Ref. to Repair No. 2 TASK 36-11-51-360-801-A01).

(c) Install the microswitch (03-490D), with the screws (03-500C) and the plate (03-520B).

(d) Install the cam (03-080) and secure it with the nut (03-090).

(e) Trim the three leads of the microswitch (03-490D) to the required length. Strip their ends
between 5,5 and 6 mm (0.216 to 0.236 in).

(f) Prepare four pieces of leads (03-530) of 100 mm (3.93 in) length. Strip one end between
5,5 and 6 mm (0.216 and 0.236 in).

(g) Join and insert the blue lead of the microswitch (03-490D) and one stripped end of
two prepared leads (03-530) into a splice (03-550B). Crimp then the splice (03-550B)
with the pliers P/N AMP46447.

(h) Join and insert the yellow lead of the closing microswitch (03-490D) and one stripped end
of two prepared leads (03-530) into a splice (03-550B). Crimp then the splice (03-550B)
with the pliers P/N AMP46447.

(i) Crimp the white lead of the microswitch (03-490D) to the contact pin (03-460).

(j) Slide the sleeve (03-540) over the splices (03-550B). Heat-shrink the sleeve (03-540).

(k) Slide the sleeve (03-545) over the slide sleeve (03-540). Heat-shrink the sleeve (03-545).

(l) Trim the four leads (03-530) to the required length. Strip their ends between 5,5 and
6 mm (0.216 and 0.236 in). Then crimp the stripped four leads (03-530) to the contact
pins (03-460).

(m) Insert the leads through the hole of the casing (03-560C) and through the nut (03-480).

(n) Insert the contact pins (03-460) in the connector (03-420) (Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 2).

(o) Orientate the connector (03-420) properly (Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 2). Secure it to the
Casing S/A (03-560C), with the screws (03-430) and (03-440).

(p) Torque the screws (03-430) and (03-440) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

36-11-51 Page 7036

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(q) Do a check of the insulation resistance of the electrical connector (03-430) as follows:

1 Apply 50 VDC between the connector leads connected together and any points of
valve body.

2 Make sure, with a megohmmeter, that the insulation resistance is greater than
100 M .

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-007-C01
For P/N 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(4) Assembly of the Equipped Casing S/A (03-560)

(Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 3)

(a) Attach the insulating plate (03A-573) and the Casing S/A (03A-560E) to the actuator body
(03-240) with three screws (03A-570B).

(b) Torque the screws (03A-570B) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01)
after the electrical bonding procedure (Ref. to Repair No. 2 TASK 36-11-51-360-801-A01).

(c) Install the control cam (03A-080B) and secure it with the nut (03-090).

(d) Installation of the Microswitch S/A (03A-490F) and the connector (03-420)

1 Assembly of the Microswitch S/A (03A-490F)

a Assemble the parts that follow:

– The microswitch base (03A-515)

– The microswitch (03A-513)
– The microswitch blade (03A-512)
– The stop plate (03A-511).

b Attach with two screws (03A-517) with the nuts (03A-518).

c Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

d Fold back the four angles of the stop plate (03A-511) to secure the nuts
(03A-518) and secure the screws (03A-517) with adhesive material (M63B).

2 Cut the electrical wires of the Microswitch S/A (03A-490F) to the required length.

3 Use the length that remains of the electrical wires for the connection between the
splices (03-550) and the electrical connector (03-420).

4 Strip the ends of the electrical wires over 5,5 and 6 mm (0.216 and 0.236 in) for the
splice connection and for the electrical connector connections.

5 Insert the electrical wire in the splices (03-550). Crimp then the splices (03-550).

6 Crimp the electrical wires to the contact pins (03-460).

7 Insert the electrical wires through the hole of the casing and through the backnut
(03-480).

36-11-51 Page 7037

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

8 Insert the contact pins (03-460) in the connector (03-420).

9 Assemble the connector (03-420) and tighten the backnut (03-480) on the connector
(03-420).

10 Orientate the connector (03-420) properly. Secure it with the screws (03-430) and
(03-440).

11 Torque the screws (03-430) and (03-440) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

12 Safety the backnut (03-480) with the lockwire (03A-445).

13 Slide the sleeves (03-540) over the splices (03-550).

14 Heat-shrink the sleeves (03-540).

15 Place another piece of sleeve (03-545) over the two sleeves (03-540). Heat-shrink it.

16 Attach the wires with the lacing cord (03A-539).

17 Install the Microswitch S/A (03A-490F) on the Casing S/A (03A-560E), attach with the
screw (03A-500D) and the washer (03A-510). Do not tighten the screw.

18 Insert the sleeve (03-545) into the clamp (03A-531) and attach it on the actuator body
with the screw (03A-532) and the washer (03A-533).

19 Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(e) Do a check of the insulation resistance of the electrical connector (03-430) as follows:

1 Apply 50 VDC between the connector leads connected together and any points of
the valve body.

2 Make sure, with a megohmmeter, that the insulation resistance is greater than
100 M .

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-008-A01
(5) Installation of the Piston S/A
(Ref. Fig. 7010 and
Ref. Fig. 7011)

(a) Open the butterfly to obtain H’ = 28 to 33 mm (1.102 to 1.300 in) (Ref. Fig. 7010).

(b) Then engage the lever (03-320) in the splines in order to be in horizontal position (and
perpendicular to the piston axis).

(c) Adjust the lever (03-320) position on the splines with the special tool (T05).

(d) Torque the screw (03-360) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(e) Remove the special tool (T05) (Ref. Fig. 7010).

(f) Pull the complete Lever S/A to open the butterfly (full open).

(g) Place the complete lever (03-320) against the actuator body on the shaft side.

36-11-51 Page 7038

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(h) Install the Piston S/A (03-220) in the actuator body while you introduce the complete lever
(03-320) through the longest aperture (Ref. Fig. 7011).

(i) Push the Piston S/A (03-220) into its lower position taking care to let the adjusting rod
(03-180) protrude from the center hole of the piston.

(j) Install temporarily the clevis (03-160) on the adjusting rod (03-180) and secure with
the pin (03-190).

(k) Attach this S/A with only two screws (03-170).

36-11-51 Page 7039

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Assembly of the Lever (03-320) Relative to the Splines of the Butterfly Shaft
Figure 7010/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-064-A01

36-11-51 Page 7040

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Orientation of the Piston (03-220) into the Pneumatic Actuator Body (03-240)
Figure 7011/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-065-A01

36-11-51 Page 7041

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-009-A01
(6) Adjustment of the Butterfly Closing Position
(Ref. Fig. 7006,
Ref. Fig. 7012 and
Ref. Fig. 7013)

(a) Make sure that (h - h’) is between 1 and 3 mm (0.040 to 0.118 in) (Ref. Fig. 7006).

(b) If the value is out of tolerance:

1 Remove the two screws (03-170).

2 Tighten or loosen the rod (03-180) with the special tool (T03).

NOTE: If (h - h’) < 1 mm ⇒ tighten by half of turn the adjusting rod (03-180).

If (h - h’) > 3 mm ⇒ loosen by half of turn the adjusting rod (03-180).

NOTE: After setting, the adjusting rod (03-180) must have between two and eight
threads visible.

(c) After setting, remove the two screws (03-170), the clevis (03-160) and the pin (03-190).

(d) Install the preformed packing (03-230).

(e) Install the parts that follow:

– The clevis (03-160)

– The pin (03-190)
– The lockwasher (03-200)
– The circlip (03-210).

(f) Fold the lockwasher (03-200) tab (Ref. Fig. 7012).

(g) Secure the clevis (03-160) with the four screws (03-170).

(h) Torque the screws (03-170) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(i) Rotate the piston (03-220) so that the equipped rod is symmetrical with the axis of the
piston window (Ref. Fig. 7013).

(j) Apply a layer of lubricating material (M01C) on the preformed packing (03-130).

(k) Install the spring (03-150) and the preformed packings (03-140) and (03-130).

(l) Install the cover (03-100) and secure with the screws (03-110) and the washers (03-120).

(m) Torque the screws (03-110) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

NOTE: Do a check of the orientation of the cover (03-100) to align the pneumatic
connecting holes.

36-11-51 Page 7042

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(n) Make sure that the knurled screw (01-130) can be fitted when the butterfly is on CLOSED
position.

NOTE: Do a check of the butterfly travel "T" (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-280-001-A01

Para. (h)).

36-11-51 Page 7043

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Assembly of the Clevis (03-160) with the Adjusting Rod (03-180) and the Rod (03-310) with the Lever (03-320)
Figure 7012/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-066-A01

36-11-51 Page 7044

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Adjustment of the Butterfly Closed Position Through the Clevis (03-160)

Figure 7013/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-067-A01

36-11-51 Page 7045

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-010-A01
For all P/N except 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(7) Adjustment of the Microswitches (03-490) - Test set-up preparation

Ref. Fig. 7014 Sheet 1 to 3)

(a) Install the trailing edge probe (01-228) in the valve body bore provisionally.

(b) Install the setting tool (T29A) or the setting tool (T29B) with the measuring gage (T29B-1)
on the valve body upstream side (Ref. Fig. 7014 Sheet 1 with the setting tool (T29A) or
Ref. Fig. 7014 Sheet 2 with the setting tool (T29B) with the measuring gage (T29B-1)).

(c) Install the special tool (T30) on the Equipped Casing S/A (03-560). Fix it with the two
knurled screws (Ref. Fig. 7014 Sheet 3).

(d) Connect the electrical connector (03-420) to the position indication box (T26) with the
electrical cord (T27).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-010-B01
For P/N 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(8) Adjustment of the Microswitches (03-490) - Test set-up preparation

Ref. Fig. 7014 Sheet 1 to 3)

(a) Install the trailing edge probe (01-228) in the valve body bore provisionally.

(b) Install the setting tool (T29A) or the setting tool (T29B) with the measuring gage (T29B-1)
on the valve body upstream side (Ref. Fig. 7014 Sheet 1 with the setting tool (T29A) or
Ref. Fig. 7014 Sheet 2 with the setting tool (T29B) with the measuring gage (T29B-1)).

(c) Install the special tool (T30) on the Equipped Casing S/A (03-560).

(d) Connect the electrical connector (03-420) to the position indication box (T26) with the
electrical cord (T27).

36-11-51 Page 7046

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Adjustment of the Microswitches

(Sheet 1 of 3)
Figure 7014/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-068-A01

36-11-51 Page 7047

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Adjustment of the Microswitches

(Sheet 2 of 3)
Figure 7014/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-068-A01

36-11-51 Page 7048

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Adjustment of the Microswitches

(Sheet 3 of 3)
Figure 7014/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-068-A01

36-11-51 Page 7049

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-011-A01
(9) Adjustment of the Closing Microswitch
(Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 1 or
Ref. Fig. 7009 Sheet 2 for the microswitch identification)

(a) With the knurled knob, bring the butterfly in the middle of marks (1) and (2).

(b) Loosen the two screws (03-500) and put the microswitch in position, so that the CLOSED
light comes ON.

(c) Torque the two screws (03-500) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(d) With the knurled knob, open the butterfly over the mark (2).

(e) With the knurled knob, close the butterfly and make sure that the CLOSED light comes
ON with the index in the shaded area between the marks (1) and (2).

(f) If not, repeat the adjustment procedure from the above para. (a).

(g) At the end of the satisfactory adjustment, make sure that, with the butterfly in the fully
closed position, the microswitch lever can be pushed further:

– If the microswitch lever is at its extreme mechanical stop against the cam.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-012-A01
For P/N 6713D010000 and 6713D020000

(10) Adjustment of the Opening Microswitch

(Ref. Fig. 7015)

(a) Install the test tool (T33) on the unit.

(b) Connect a stabilized pressure source to the test tool (T33) (Ref. Fig. 7015).

(c) Connect the electrical connector (03-420) to the position indication box (T26) with the
electrical cord (T27).

(d) Apply a 1 bar rel. (14.5 psig) test pressure to open the butterfly fully.

(e) Adjust the setting screw of the special tool (T30) to bring the microswitch lever at
mechanical stop against the cam (03-080).

(f) Note the value of the switch position on the Vernier.

(g) Loosen the setting screw while you bring back the microswitch by a 0,50 mm distance
(0.020 in).

(h) Torque the two microswitch screws (03-500) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(i) Make sure that the OPEN light is ON.

(j) Remove the special tool (T30) from the unit.

36-11-51 Page 7050

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(k) Keep the unit connected with the test tool (T33) (Ref. Fig. 7015).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-700-002-A01
(11) High Temperature Test
(Ref. Fig. 7015)

(a) Install the position indicator box (T26) on the connector of the valve.

(b) Set the temperature of the microswitch to 250 ± 20 C (446 F to 518 F) with a heater.
Control the temperature with a temperature probe.

(c) Operate the valve with the manual control as soon as the temperature is getting.

(d) Make sure that, for each of those positions, the indicator lights on the position indicator
box (T26) correspond with the table detailed in Subtask 36-11-51-750-003-A01.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-700-003-A01
For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000, 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000,
6713D050000 Amdt A, 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(12) Position Indication Test

(Ref. Fig. 7015)

(a) Increase gradually (P1) to bring the butterfly into the positions:

– CLOSED
– INTERMEDIATE
– OPEN.

(b) Make sure that, for each of those positions, the indicator ligths on the position indication
box (T26) correspond with the table detailed in Subtask 36-11-51-750-003-A01.

(c) Safety the microswitches screws (03-500) in pairs with the lockwire (03-030).

(d) Install the Equipped Cover S/A on the Casing S/A; fix it with the screws (03-020).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-700-003-B01
For P/N 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

(13) Position Indication Test

(Ref. Fig. 7015)

(a) Increase gradually (P1) to bring the butterfly into the positions:

– CLOSED
– INTERMEDIATE
– OPEN.

(b) Make sure that, for each of those positions, the indicator ligths on the position indication
box (T26) correspond with the table detailed in Subtask 36-11-51-750-003-A01.

(c) Install the Equipped Cover S/A on the Casing S/A; fix it with the screws (03-020).

36-11-51 Page 7051

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-027-A01
(14) Check of the Opening Pressure
(Ref. Fig. 7015)

(a) Keep the Pneumatic Actuator S/A (01-330) installed on the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 7015).

(b) Pneumatically supply the test tool (T33) and make sure that the butterfly starts to open
for a (P1) pressure less than 250 mbar rel. (3.625 psig).

(c) Make sure that full open position is reached for a (P1) pressure not exceeding 400 mbar
rel. (5.800 psig).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-006-A01
(15) Test of the Pneumatic Actuator Internal Leakage
(Ref. Fig. 7016)

(a) Apply a 3 bar rel. (43.5 psig) test (P1) pressure.

(b) Make sure that the (Q1) internal leakage flowrate is less than 12 l/min (0.423 cu.ft/min).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 7052

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Actuating Pressure Test

Figure 7015/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-069-A01

36-11-51 Page 7053

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Pneumatic Actuator Internal Leakage Test

Figure 7016/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-070-A01

36-11-51 Page 7054

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-440-805-A01
5. Assembly of the Regulator Sub-Assembly (01-230)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M49A 70030 CARECLEAN AS1 CLEANING MATERIAL
M15C MOLYKOTE 3402C LUBRICATING MATERIAL
M23C NEVER SEEZ NSB4M LUBRICATING MATERIAL
M23X GREEN ABRASIVE PAPER ABRASIVE PAPER

(2) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T04 OS22910 1 SPECIAL TOOL
OR M65724178
T15 M65723532A 1 ADAPTER
T16 M65723533A 1 ADAPTER
T19 M65724200A 1 ADAPTER
T28 M65724260A 1 SETTING TOOL
T44 M657253372 1 SPECIAL GUIDE

(3) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-071-A01 7000 FIGURE 7017
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-072-A01 7000 FIGURE 7018
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-073-A01 7000 FIGURE 7019
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-074-A01 7000 FIGURE 7020
PGBLK-36-11-51-1000 1000 TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-001-A01 1000 OPENING TEST AND REGULATION
TEST
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-025-A01 1000 OPENING TEST OF THE CLAPPER
(02A-220) (040B)

36-11-51 Page 7055

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS
TASK-36-11-51-820-802-A01 8000 TIGHTENING TORQUES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

NOTE: Upon installation apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on all the threaded parts.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-013-A01
(1) Assembly of the Closing S/A
(Ref. Fig. 7017 and
Ref. Fig. 7018)

CAUTION: DO A CHECK OF THE VALVE SEAT (02A-600) (REF. TO SUBTASK

36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (N)).

(a) Preparation of the parts (02A-560), (02A-600) (Ref. Fig. 7017 Detail A)

1 Polish the contact areas of the valve seat (02A-600) and of the threaded plug
(02A-560) with abrasive paper (M23X) placed on a flat base.

2 Clean the polished valve seat (02A-600) and the threaded plug (02A-560) with
cleaning material (M49A).

3 Spray a film of lubricating material (M15C) on the polished areas of the valve seat
(02A-600) and of the threaded plug (02A-560).

NOTE: Keep the ball (02A-580) contact area inside the valve seat (02A-600)
clear of lubricating material (M15C).

4 Let the areas coated with the lubricating material (M15C) dry in an oven for one hour
at a temperature of 150 C (302 F).

5 Glaze the dry coated areas with a clean cloth.

(b) Adjustment of the displacement of the clapper (02A-540) (Ref. Fig. 7017)

For all P/N except 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

1 Install the valve body (02A-530) with the preformed packing (02A-550) into the
regulator body (02A-610).

2 Install the threaded ring (02A-520) into its tapped hole. Torque to the specified value
(Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01) with the special tool (T04).

3 Install the clapper (02A-540) into the valve body (02A-530) and make sure it slides
freely into its bore.

36-11-51 Page 7056

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

4 Install the spring (02A-545), the seat (02A-600) and three shims (02A-605) as a
pre-setting.

5 Tighten the threaded plug (02A-560) into its bore in the body, while you push down
the clapper (02A-540) to bring the valve seat (02A-600) into alignment.

6 Pre-tighten the threaded plug (02A-560) to a 0,5 mdaN torque value (44.265 lfb.in).

7 Measure the displacement (C) of the clapper (02A-540) (Ref. Fig. 7017). Adjust it
with shims (02A-605) to obtain a value between 0,3 and 0,4 mm (0.0118 to 0.0157 in).

8 Remove the plug (02A-560).

9 Install the parts that follow:

– The ball (02A-580)

– The spring (02A-570)
– The preformed packing (02A-590)
– The plug (02A-560).

10 Maintain the clapper (02A-540) into contact with its seat and at the same time,
pre-tighten the threaded plug (02A-560) to 0,5 mdaN (544.265 lbf.in).

NOTE: The final tightening of the plug (02A-560) to the required value must be
carried out upon the performance of the test of the complete regulator (Ref.
to Subtask 36-11-51-780-001-A01).

(c) Adjustment of the displacement of the clapper (02A-540) (Ref. Fig. 7017) and alignment
of the valve seat (02A-600B) (Ref. Fig. 7018)

For all P/N except 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and

6713D070000 Amdt A

1 Install the valve seat (02A-600) equipped with three shims (02A-605) into the
regulator body (02A-610).

2 Install the ball (02A-580), the spring (02A-570) and the plug (02A-560). Do not torque
the plug (02A-560) with the adapter (T16).

3 Install the special guide (T44) into the regulator body (02A-610), in contact with the
valve seat (02A-600B) for a correct alignment of the valve seat in the regulator
body (Ref. Fig. 7018).

4 Torque the plug (02A-560) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK

36-11-51-820-802-A01).

5 Remove the special guide (T44) from the regulator body (02A-610).

6 Install the spring (02A-545), the clapper (02A-540), the valve body (02A-530F)
equipped with the preformed packing (02A-550).

7 Install and torque the threaded ring (02A-520) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

36-11-51 Page 7057

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

8 Measure the displacement (C) of the clapper (02A-540) (Ref. Fig. 7017). Adjust it
with shims (02A-605) to obtain a value between 0,3 and 0,4 mm (0.0118 to 0.0157 in).

CAUTION: IN THE CASE OF A NECESSARY ADJUSTMENT OF THE

DISPLACEMENT (C) WITH SHIMS (02A-605), REPEAT THE ABOVE
STEPS 1 TO 8.

9 Adjust the displacement (c) with the shims (02A-605) to obtain a value between
0,3 and 0,4 mm (0.0118 to 0.0157 in).

(d) Adjustment of the (J) clearance between the end of the clapper (02A-540) in its upper
position and the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) (Ref. Fig. 7019)

1 Install the Cover S/A (02A-400E) (or the cover (02A-400F) equipped with the stop
(02A-435) on the setting tool (T28), which maintains the diaphragm in contact with its
seat on the cover (02A-400E).

2 Place the dial gage on the edge of the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460). Set the dial
gage to "0".

3 Place the dial gage in the center of the diaphragm. Note the measure "Y".

4 Calculate the clearance J = X - Y.

5 Determine the required number of shims (02A-470), (02A-480) to obtain a clearance

between 0,55 and 0,65 mm (0.019 to 0.025 in).

(e) At the end of the correct adjustment:

For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

1 Install the spring (02A-510), the stop washer (02A-485) and the preformed packing
(02A-450).

2 Install the determined number of shims (02A-480), (02A-470) on the spring (02A-510).

NOTE: The thicker shims (02A-480) must be in contact with the clapper (02A-540).

3 Install the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) in the correct direction (with the pneumatic
passage holes aligned).

4 Install the preformed packing (02A-440) into its mounting groove.

5 Install the cover (02A-400E) in the correct direction on the regulator body (02A-610B).

6 Install the screws (02A-410) with the washers (02A-430).

7 Torque the screws (02A-410) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK

36-11-51-820-802-A01).

36-11-51 Page 7058

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(f) At the end of the correct adjustment:

For P/N 6713D040000, 6713D040000 Amdt A, 6713D050000, 6713D050000 Amdt A,

6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A

1 Install the spring (02A-510) and the preformed packing (02A-450).

2 Install the determined number of shims (02A-480), (02A-470) on the spring (02A-510).

NOTE: The thicker shims (02A-480) must be in contact with the clapper (02A-540).

3 Install the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) in the correct direction (with the pneumatic
passage holes aligned).

4 Install the preformed packing (02A-440) into its mounting groove.

5 Install the cover (02A-400F) with the stop (02A-435) in the correct direction on the
regulator body (02A-610A).

6 Install the screws (02A-410) with the washers (02A-430).

7 Torque the screws (02A-410) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK

36-11-51-820-802-A01).

36-11-51 Page 7059

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Measurement of the Clapper (02A-540) Displacement Preparation of the Parts

(02A-560), (02A-600) For ≥ P/N 6713D040000
Figure 7017/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-071-A01

36-11-51 Page 7060

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Alignment of the Valve Seat (02A-600B) For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A,
6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A
Figure 7018/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-072-A01

36-11-51 Page 7061

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Adjustment of the Clearance “J” between the End of the Clapper (02A-540) in its Upper Position
and the Diaphragm S/A (02A-460) For P/N ≥ 6713D040000
Figure 7019/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-073-A01

36-11-51 Page 7062

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-014-A01
(2) Assembly of the Distribution Sub-Assembly

(a) Install the sealing rings (02A-223) to the clapper (02A-220) when their slots are 180 apart.

(b) Make sure that the gap between the sealing rings (02A-223) ends is about 0,2 mm
(0.008 in).

(c) Make sure that the external diameter with the sealing rings (02A-223) fitted ranges
between 12,94 and 12,98 mm (0.5094 to 0.5110 in).

(d) Install the equipped clapper (02A-220) into the support (02A-270) and make sure it
slides freely.

(e) Install one shim (02A-190) and the spring (02A-210) on the threaded plug (02A-180).

NOTE: The shim(s) (02A-190) shall be fitted to the threaded plug (02A-180) upon the
opening pressure test of the clapper (Ref. to Subtask 36-11-51-780-025-A01).

(f) Tighten the threaded plug (02A-180) into the support (02A-270). Do not torque yet
(torque, with the adapter (T15), shall be done upon cold tests on the complete unit).

(g) Install the preformed packings (02A-260), (02A-320) and (02A-280) on the support
(02A-270).

(h) Install and secure the complete support (02A-270) into the regulator body (02A-610)
with the plug (02A-227).

(i) Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01) with the adapter (T19).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-015-A01
(3) Assembly of the Regulation Sub-Assembly
(Ref. Fig. 7020)

(a) Installation of the adjusting screw (02A-130)

1 Start the sealing rings (02A-163) slot on the internal diameter with a 0,1 mm
(0.004 in) thickness saw blade.

2 Do the sealing rings (02A-163) slot by introducing the clapper (02A-160) tip.

3 Engage the stop (02A-167) and the two sealing rings with their slots opposite at 180
(02A-163) on the clapper (02A-160).

4 Install the above assembly into the adjusting screw (02A-130).

5 Install the preformed packing (02A-150) on the stop (02A-167) periphery with the
stop (02A-167) held in contact with the face of the adjusting screw (02A-130).

6 Insert the spring (02A-175) into the support (02A-270).

7 Put the equipped adjusting screw (02A-130) in position into the regulator body.

8 Make sure that the stop (02A-167) is correctly centered into its mounting bore. Take
care not to damage the preformed packing (02A-150).

36-11-51 Page 7063

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

9 Secure the adjusting screw (02A-130) to the regulator body with three screws
(02A-140).

10 Torque the screws (02A-140) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK

36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(b) Installation of the bellows (02-070B)

For P/N 6713D010000 or 6713D020000

1 Install the adjusting nut (02A-120) on the adjusting screw (02A-130).

2 Install the guide (02A-080) into the centering guide (02A-085).

3 Install the spring (02A-090) on the centering guide (02A-085) and install the whole
assembly on the adjusting screw (02A-130).

4 Install the bellows (02A-070) with the preformed packing (02A-050) and the cover
(02A-010) with preformed packing (02A-060) on the regulator body.

5 Secure the cover (02A-010) correctly orientated to the regulator body (02A-610) with
four screw (02A-020) and two screws (02A-030) with the washers (02A-040).

6 Torque the screws (02A-020) and (02A-030) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(c) Installation and adjustment of the diaphragm (02A-070C) (Ref. Fig. 7020)

For P/N 6713D040000

1 Install the cover (02A-010) with the diaphragm with the setting tool (T28).

2 Place the dial gage on the edge of the diaphragm (02A-070C). Set dial gage to "0".

3 Place the dial gage in the center of the diaphragm. Note the measure "A".

4 Place the dial gage in the edge of the Regulator S/A (02A-610). Set dial gage to "0".

5 Place the dial gage in the center of the clapper (02A-160C) which is in contact with
the support (02A-270). Note the measure "B".

6 Calculate the clearance J = B - A.

7 Determine the required number of shims (02A-081), the shims (02A-082) under
the diaphragm lower flange to obtain the (J) diaphragm displacement equal to
0,9 (+0,1/0) mm (0.035 to 0.039 in).

8 Tighten the adjusting nut (02A-120C) to the adjusting screw (02A-130C).

CAUTION: ON ASSEMBLY, APPLY A LAYER OF LUBRICATING MATERIAL (M23C)

ON THE BORE OF THE SPRING GUIDE (02A-095).

9 Install the washer (02A-096) on the shoulder of the adjusting nut (02A-120C) and then
locate the spring guide (02A-095), the spring (02A-090C) and the spring (02A-086).

36-11-51 Page 7064

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

CAUTION: THE SHIM (02A-082) (THICK: 0,5 MM (0.020 IN)) MUST BE IN CONTACT
WITH THE CLAPPER (02A-160C).

10 Locate the shims (02A-081) on the diaphragm (02A-070C).

11 Locate one shim (02A-082) and then position the diaphragm (02A-070C) (Ref.
Fig. 7020).

12 Install the preformed packing (02A-060) in its mounting groove in the Regulator
Body S/A (02A-610).

13 Locate the cover (02A-010) and the preformed packing (02A-050) on the diaphragm
(02A-070C) and secure with the screws (02A-020) and (02A-030) with the washers
(02A-040).

14 Torque the screws (02A-020) and (02A-030) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

36-11-51 Page 7065

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Adjustment of the Diaphragm (02A-070C) Displacement “J” For P/N 6713D040000

Figure 7020/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-074-A01

36-11-51 Page 7066

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SUBTASK 36-11-51-410-001-A01
(4) Assembly of the Regulation S/A For Regulator (02A-001D) or (02A-001F)

(a) Install the plug (02A-370) with the preformed packings (02A-380) and (02A-390) into
the regulator body (02A-610).

(b) Install the threaded plug (02A-330).

(c) Torque the threaded plug (02A-330) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01) with the adapter (T16).

(d) Install the regulator pneumatic connection as follows:

1 Position the banjo tube (01-026) with a preformed packing (01-028) under each
banjo on the regulator covers.

2 Install the banjo screw (01-024) with the preformed packing (01-028) on the regulator
cover (02A-010).

3 Install the union (01-020) with the preformed packing (01-028) on the regulator
cover (02-400).

4 Torque the banjo screw (01-024) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

5 Torque the union (01-020) to the minimum specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

6 Install the spacer (01-016) and the locking plate (01-012) over the union (01-020)
and secure it to the regulator cover (02A-400) with the screw (01-014). If necessary,
increase the tightening torque without exceeding the maximum required value, in
order to aline flats of union (01-020) with those of the locking plate (01-012).

E. Close-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-700-004-A01
(1) End of Procedure

(a) Do all the tests and adjustments of the Regulator S/A (01-230) (Ref. to TESTING AND
FAULT ISOLATION).

36-11-51 Page 7067

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-440-806-A01
For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000, 6713D050000 and 6713D050000 Amdt A

6. Assembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223)

A. Reason for the Job

CAUTION: BEFORE ASSEMBLY, DO A CHECK OF THE OVERPRESSURE VALVE (REF. TO

SUBTASK 36-11-51-280-001-A01 PARA. (D)) AND REPAIR IT IF NECESSARY (REF.
TO REPAIR NO. 5 TASK 36-11-51-300-801-A01) (FOR THE VALVE BODY (05-090A)
AND (05-090B)).

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M23C NEVER SEEZ NSB4M LUBRICATING MATERIAL

(2) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T22 M65724170B 1 SPECIAL WRENCH
T32 M82000200B 1 TEST TOOL

(3) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-075-A01 7000 FIGURE 7021 SHEET 1/2
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-075-A01 7000 FIGURE 7021 SHEET 2/2
SUBTASK-36-11-51-280-001-A01 5000 SPECIAL CHECKS
TASK-36-11-51-300-801-A01 6000 REPAIR No. 5: REPAIR OF THE VALVE
BODY (05-090A) AND (05-090B)
SUBTASK-36-11-51-780-028-A01 7000 RE-OPENING PRESSURE TEST
TASK-36-11-51-820-802-A01 8000 TIGHTENING TORQUES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 7068

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

D. Procedure

NOTE: Upon installation apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on all the threaded parts.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-016-A01
(1) Assembly Procedure

CAUTION: REPLACE SYSTEMATICALLY THE NUT (05-080).

(a) Install the threaded clapper (05-060) into the valve body (05-090):

1 Install the clapper (05-070) to the threaded clapper (05-060) and secure it with
the nut (05-080).

2 Torque the nut (05-080) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01)
while you hold the threaded clapper (05-060) with the special wrench (T22).

(b) Make sure that the above assembly can slide freely into the valve body bore.

CAUTION: THE FINAL NUMBER OF SHIMS (05-030) IS DETERMINED UPON THE

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE. THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHIMS ALLOWED
IS 13 SHIMS. BEYOND THIS NUMBER DISCARD AND REPLACE THE SPRING
(05-040).

(c) Install the parts that follow:

– The centering guide (05-050)

– The spring (05-040)
– Nine shims (05-030) (as a pre-setting)
– The centering guide (05-020).

(d) Secure the whole assembly with the retaining ring (05-010).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-017-A01
(2) Adjustment of the Overpressure Valve S/A Alone (01-223A) and (01-223B)
(Ref. Fig. 7021 Sheet 1 and 2)

(a) Install the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223A) and (01-223B) on the test tool (T32).

(b) Adjustment of the closing pressure (Ref. Fig. 7021 Sheet 2)

NOTE: The closing value must be adjusted close to the max. value.

1 Gradually increase the (P1) pressure to obtain the closing of the overpressure valve.
(The P2 pressure must be less than 150 mbar rel. (2.175 psig)).

2 Repeat this step several times. The average value of the closing pressure read
on the P1 pressure gage must be between 7,90 and 8,25 bar rel. (114.55 and
119.625 psig). The maximum pressure difference between the beginning of the
closing and the full closing (with P2 pressure less than 150 mbar rel. (2.175 psig))
must be less than 450 mbar (6.525 psig).

36-11-51 Page 7069

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

3 If the closing pressure value cannot be obtained, modify the number of shims
(05-030).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-007-A01
(3) Internal Leakage Test
(Ref. Fig. 7021 Sheet 2)

(a) Increase the (P1) pressure to 9,5 bar rel. (137.75 psig).

(b) Disconnect the (P2) pressure gage and connect a flowmeter to the (P2) connection.

(c) Blank the air-vent outlet of the overpressure valve. Connect the flowmeter to the P2 outlet.

(d) Make sure that the internal leakage rate on the flowmeter is less than 6 l/min
(0.211 cu.ft/min).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-780-028-A01
(4) Re-Opening Pressure Test

(a) Prepare the test set-up (Ref. Fig. 7021 Sheet 2).

(b) Gradually increase the (P1) pressure to the closing value (P1 pressure greater than
9,5 bar rel. (137.75 psig)).

(c) From the above (P1) closing pressure value, gradually decrease the (P1) pressure until
the re-opening of the overpressure valve (when the (P2) greater than the (P1) pressure
minus 250 mbar rel. (3.625 psig)) (P2 > P1 - 250 mbar).

(d) Repeat this step several times and make sure that the average re-opening value read on
the (P1) dial gage is greater to 7,30 bar rel. (105.85 psig).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-008-A01
(5) External Leakage Test
(Ref. Fig. 7021 Sheet 2)

(a) Keep the overpressure value installed on the test set-up used in the Subtask
36-11-51-780-028-A01.

(b) Apply a 6 bar rel. (87.023 psig) (P1) pressure.

(c) Make sure that the external leakage rate is less than 5 l/min (0.176 cu.ft/min).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 7070

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) Adjustment Test Set-up

For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000, 6713D050000 and 6713D050000 Amdt A (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 7021/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-075-A01

36-11-51 Page 7071

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) Adjustment Test Set-up

For P/N 6713D010000, 6713D020000, 6713D050000 and 6713D050000 Amdt A (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 7021/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-075-A01

36-11-51 Page 7072

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-440-806-B01
For P/N 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

7. Assembly of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223C)

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M23C NEVER SEEZ NSB4M LUBRICATING MATERIAL

(2) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T45 M65725387 1 SPECIAL TOOL
T46 M82000367 1 TEST TOOL

(3) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-076-A01 7000 FIGURE 7022 SHEET 1/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-076-A01 7000 FIGURE 7022 SHEET 2/3
GRAPHIC-36-11-51-991-076-A01 7000 FIGURE 7022 SHEET 3/3

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

NOTE: Upon installation apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on all the threaded parts.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-016-B01
(1) Assembly Procedure

CAUTION: ON ASSEMBLY, ALWAYS DISCARD AND USE A NEW NUT (05-080).

(a) Install the centering axle (05-050B) in the special tool (T45).

(b) Install the centering axle (05-050B) equipped as in above para. (a) in the body (05-090C).

(c) Install the clapper (05-070B) into the body (05-090C), over the end of the centering
axle (05-050B).

36-11-51 Page 7073

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(d) Install and tighten the nut (05-080) on the threaded end of the centering axle (05-050B).

(e) Remove the special tool (T45).

(f) Install the spring (05-040B) in the body (05-090C).

(g) Install the centering guide (05-020B) equipped with seven (7) shims (05-030) into the body.

(h) Install the retaining ring (05-010) with its bulged side in contact with the centering
guide (05-020B).

(i) Verify that the clapper (05-070B) moves freely.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-017-B01
(2) Adjustment of the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223C)
(Ref. Fig. 7022 Sheet 1)

(a) Gradually increase the (P1) test pressure and make sure that the Overpressure Valve
S/A closes (P2 can drop under 150 mbar rel. (2.175 psig)) within 8,7 and 9,1 bar rel.
(126.15 and 132.00 psig).

(b) Increase the (P1) test pressure to 12 bar rel. (174 psig).

(c) Then decrease the (P1) test pressure and make sure for P1 > 7,8 bar rel. (113.10 psig)
that the Overpressure Valve S/A opens (P2 > 6 bar rel).

(d) If the above test values cannot be obtained, change the number of shims (05-030).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-007-B01
(3) External Leakage Test
(Ref. Fig. 7022 Sheet 2)

(a) Blank port (A).

(b) Gradually increase the (P1) test pressure to 6 ± 0,1 bar rel. (85.55 to 88.45 psig).

(c) Make sure that the external leakage is less than or equal to 4,5 l/min (0.176 cu.ft) (Q1).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-790-008-B01
(4) Internal Leakage
(Ref. Fig. 7022 Sheet 3)

(a) Gradually increase the (P1) test pressure to 9,5 ± 0,1 bar rel. (136.3 to 139.2 psig).

(b) Do not blank port (A).

(c) Connect the flowmeter port A and blank port B.

(d) Make sure that the internal leakage is less than or equal to 6 l/min (0.211 cu.ft) (Q1).

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 7074

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223C) Adjustment Test Set-up

For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 1 of 3)
Figure 7022/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-076-A01

36-11-51 Page 7075

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223C) Adjustment Test Set-up

For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 2 of 3)
Figure 7022/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-076-A01

36-11-51 Page 7076

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223C) Adjustment Test Set-up

For P/N 6713D060000, 6713D060000 Amdt A, 6713D070000 and 6713D070000 Amdt A (Sheet 3 of 3)
Figure 7022/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-076-A01

36-11-51 Page 7077

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-440-807-A01
8. Final Assembly

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Materials

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M06B CEMENT SILASTIC RTV732 LOCKING MATERIAL
M23C NEVER SEEZ NSB4M LUBRICATING MATERIAL

(2) Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

(a) Special Tools

CODE REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION

T10 M65723979 1 SUPPORT
T20 M65724159B 1 SPECIAL TOOL
T21 M65724152 1 SPECIAL WRENCH

(3) Referenced Information

REFERENCE PAGE DESIGNATION

BLOCK
PGBLK-36-11-51-1000 1000 TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION
TASK-36-11-51-820-802-A01 8000 TIGHTENING TORQUES

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

NOTE: Upon installation apply a layer of lubricating material (M23C) on all the threaded parts.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-018-A01
(1) Assembly of the Regulator Sub-Assembly (01-230) with Pneumatic Actuator Sub-Assembly
(01-330)

(a) Install the valve body fully on the support (T10).

(b) Install the two preformed packings (01-280), (01-290) into their mounting grooves on
the actuator body.

(c) Attach the Regulator Sub-Assembly (01-230) to the Pneumatic Actuator Sub-Assembly,
with the screw (01-250), the washer (01-270) and the two screws (01-240).

36-11-51 Page 7078

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(d) Torque the screw (01-250) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

NOTE: Upon assembly, apply a layer of locking material (M06B) on the thread of the
screw (01-250) when the mounting hole is discharging in the pneumatic actuator.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-019-A01
For all P/N except 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(2) Assembly of the Upstream Pneumatic Connection

(a) Install the trailing edge probe (01-228) with the special wrench (T21) into the upstream
tapped connecting hole of the valve body (04-340), use the special tool (T20) for the
proper orientation of the probe holes (oriented to filter (01-050)).

NOTE: Make sure that the distance between the top of the trailing edge probe (01-228)
and the face of the upstream connecting hole embossment on the valve body
(04-340) ranges between 0,20 and 1,5 mm (0.008 and 0.06 in).

(b) Tighten the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) with the metal seal (01-226) into the tapped
hole of the trailing edge probe (01-228).

(c) Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(d) Put the banjo tube (01-220) in position with the preformed packings (01-180) on the
Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) and the upstream tapped hole of the Regulator S/A
(01-230).

(e) Put the banjo union (01-170) in position with the preformed packings (01-180) and the
washer (01-190) against the banjo tube (01-220) and secure the whole assembly to the
regulator body (02-610) with the banjo screw (01-160).

(f) Install the metal seal (01-060) under the other end of the banjo tube (01-220).

(g) Install the nut (01-105) on the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223).

(h) Torque the banjo screw (01-160) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(i) Torque the nut (01-105) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-019-B01
For P/N 6713D060000 and 6713D060000 Amdt A

(3) Assembly of the Upstream Pneumatic Connection

(a) Install the trailing edge probe (01-228) with the special wrench (T21) into the upstream
tapped connecting hole of the valve body (04-340), use the special tool (T20) for the
proper orientation of the probe holes (oriented to filter (01-050)).

NOTE: Make sure that the distance between the top of the trailing edge probe (01-228)
and the face of the upstream connecting hole embossment on the valve body
(04-340) ranges between 0,20 and 1,5 mm (0.008 and 0.06 in).

36-11-51 Page 7079

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(b) Tighten the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) with the metal seal (01-226) into the tapped
hole of the trailing edge probe (01-228).

(c) Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(d) Put the banjo tube (01-220) in position with the preformed packings (01-180) on the
Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223) and the upstream tapped hole of the Regulator S/A
(01-230).

(e) Position the banjo union (01-170) with the preformed packings (01-180) and the washer
(01-190) against the banjo tube (01-220) and secure the whole assembly to the regulator
body (02-610) with the banjo screw (01-160).

(f) Install the metal seal (01-060) under the other end of the banjo tube (01-220).

(g) Install the threaded cap (01-105B) on the Overpressure Valve S/A (01-223C).

(h) Torque the banjo screw (01-160) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(i) Torque the threaded cap (01-105B) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-020-A01
(4) Assembly of the Downstream Pneumatic Connection

(a) Put the tube (01-100) in position, with two preformed packings (01-090), (one on each
side), against the downstream port of the regulator body.

(b) Secure the tube (01-100) to the regulator body with the banjo screw (01-080).

(c) Secure the free end of the tube (01-100), with two metal seals (01-060) (on each side), to
the valve body with the downstream filter (01-050).

(d) Torque the banjo screw (01-080) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK
36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(e) Torque the filter (01-050) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-021-A01
Only applicable to the units equipped with Regulator S/A (01-230E) or (01-230G)

(5) Assembly of the Pneumatic Union (01-020)

(a) Install the union (01-020) with the seal (01-030) to the cover (02-400) of the Regulator
Sub-Assembly.

(b) Torque to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(c) Install the locking plate (01-012) with the spacer (01-016).

(d) Secure the screw (01-014) with the washer (01-015) and torque the screws (01-014) to
the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01).

(e) Secure the locking plate (01-300) to the regulator body with the two screws (01-310).

36-11-51 Page 7080

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(f) Torque the screws (01-310) to the specified value (Ref. to TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01),
then safety with the lockwire (01-320).

SUBTASK 36-11-51-440-022-A01
(6) Assembly of the Complete Cable (01-150)

(a) Insert the screw (01-130) into the tab of the cable (01-150).

(b) Install the retaining ring (01-140) to the screw (01-130).

(c) Secure the screw (01-130) into its mounting hole in the head of the banjo tube (01-220).

(d) Secure the threaded cap of the Cable Sub-Assembly to the banjo union (01-170).

E. Close-up

SUBTASK 36-11-51-700-005-A01
(1) End of Procedure

(a) Do then all tests of unit detailed in TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION.

(b) Safetying of the unit

1 On completion of satisfactory tests, safety all the parts with the lockwire (Ref. Safety
table that follows).

CAUTION: (*) USE THICKER LOCKWIRE (01-135) FOR SCREW (01-130).

PARTS LIST
DESCRIPTION QTY SAFETYING
FIG ITEM
1 050 Filter, union 1 Union (01-050) with tube (01-100)
1 080 Banjo, screw 1 Banjo screw (01-080) with tube (01-100)
1 105 Nut or threaded 1 Nut or threaded cap (01-105) with tube (01-220)
cap
1 130 Screw (*) 1 Screw (01-130) with nut (01-105)
1 150 Cable 1 Threaded cap (01-154) of cable (01-150) with screw
(01-160)
1 250 Screw 1 Screw (01-250) with threaded plug (02A-560)
1 310 Screw 2 Screws (01-310) together
2A 180 Threaded plug 1 Plug (02A-180) with threaded ring (02A-227)
2A 330 Threaded plug 1 Threaded ring (02-227) with plug (02A-330)
2A 227 Threaded ring 1
3 020 Screw 2 Each screw (03-020) with one of each screw (03-430)
3 500 Screw 4 or 2 Screws (02-500) in pairs
1 024 Screw 1 Screw (01-024) with tube (01-026)
3 249 Screw 1 Screw (03-249) with screw (03-290C)

36-11-51 Page 7081

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 7082

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FITS AND CLEARANCES

TASK 36-11-51-820-801-A01
1. Fits and Clearances
(Ref. Fig. 8001,
Ref. Fig. 8002 and
Ref. Fig. 8003)

A. Fits and Clearances Table

3 4
ORIGINAL Mfg. LIMITS IN SERVICE WEAR LIMITS
1 2
ASSEMBLY
FIG. MATING IPL FITS MILLIMETER FIT LIMITS MILLIMETER MAXIMUM
CLEARANCES
REF. FIGURE AND (INCH) (INCH) ALLOWABLE
MILLIMETER (INCH)
LETTER ITEM No CLEARANCE
Minimum Maximum Mini- Maximum Mini- Maximum MILLIMETER (INCH)
mum mum

3,965 3,975 See INSPECTION

OD 03-190 See
(0.1561) (0.1564) 0,045 0,067 See REPAIR / CHECK
E REPAIR
4,020 4,032 (0.00177) (0.00263) No. 7 Subtask-36-11-51-
ID 03-180 No. 7
(0.1582) (0.1587) 280-001-a01 Para. (h)

3,965 3,975 See INSPECTION

OD 03-330 See
(0.1561) (0.1564) 0,045 0,067 See REPAIR / CHECK
F REPAIR
4,020 4,032 (0.00177) (0.00263) No. 8 Subtask-36-11-51-
ID 03-310 No. 8
(0.1582) (0.1587) 280-001-a01 Para. (h)

3,97 3,98 3,26 3,98

OD 02A-160
(0.1562) (0.1566) 0,020 0,048 (0.1283) (0.1567) 0,08
H
4 4,018 (0.0007) (0.0018) 4 4,04 (0.0031)
ID 02A-130
(0.1574) (0.1581) (0.1575) (0.1591)

3,97 3,98 3,96 3,98

OD 02B-540
(0.1562) (0.1566) 0,020 0,042 (0.1559) (0.1567) 0,07
I
4 4,012 (0.0007) (0.0016) 4 4,03 (0.0028)
ID 02B-530
(0.1574) (0.1579) (0.1575) (0.1587)

13,883 13,894 13,873 13,894

OD 04-070
(0.5446) (0.5470) 0,006 0,028 (0.5461) (0.5470), 0,047
L
13,900 13,911 (0.000236) (0.001102) 13,900 13,920 (0.00185)
ID 04-170
(0.5472) (0.5476) (0.5472) (0.5480)

13,883 13,894 13,873 13,894

OD 04-070
(0.5446) (0.5470) 0,006 0,028 (0.5461) (0.5470) 0,047
M
13,900 13,911 (0.000236) (0.001102) 13,900 13,920 (0.00185)
ID 04-290
(0.5472) (0.5476) (0.5472) (0.5480)

36-11-51 Page 8001

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Fits and Clearances

Figure 8001/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-077-A01

36-11-51 Page 8002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Fits and Clearances

Figure 8002/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-078-A01

36-11-51 Page 8003

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Fits and Clearances

Figure 8003/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-079-A01

36-11-51 Page 8004

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-820-802-A01
2. Tightening Torques

A. Table of Tightening Torques

IPL FIG. TIGHTENING TORQUE

AND ITEM DESCRIPTION daN.m and (lbf.in)
No Minimum Maximum
01-014 SCREW 0,11 (9.74) 0,13 (11.51)
01-020 UNION 1,80 (159.35) 2,00 (177.06)
01-024 BANJO SCREW 1,00 (88.53) 1,20 (106.23)
01-050 FILTER UNION 1,00 (88.53) 1,20 (106.23)
01-080 BANJO SCREW 0,65 (57.54) 0,80 (70.82)
01-105 NUT OR THREADED CAP 0,40 (35.41) 0,60 (53.11)
01-160 BANJO SCREW 0,65 (57.54) 0,80 (70.82)
01-223 OVERPRESSURE VALVE S/A 0,40 (35.41) 0,60 (53.11)
01-240 SCREW 0,40 (35.40) 0,50 (44.26)
01-250 SCREW 0,30 (26.56) 0,35 (30.99)
01-310 SCREW 0,09 (7.70) 0,11 (9.74)
02A-020 UNION 0,11 (9.74) 0,13 (11.51)
02A-030 SCREW 0,11 (9.74) 0,13 (11.51)
02A-140 SCREW 0,11 (9.74) 0,13 (11.51)
02A-180D THREADED PLUG 1,40 (123.91) 1,60 (141.61)
02A-227 THREADED RING 2,10 (186.00) 2,20 (195.00)
02A-330 THREADED PLUG 2,00 (177.12) 2,20 (194.83)
02A-410 SCREW 0,11 (9.74) 0,13 (11.51)
02A-520 THREADED RING 1,80 (159.35) 2,00 (177.06)
02A-560 THREADED PLUG 1,00 (88.53) 1,20 (106.23)
03-020 SCREW 0,09 (7.97) 0,11 (9.74)
03-090 NUT 0,20 (17.71) 0,25 (22.14)
03-110 SCREW 0,20 (17.71) 0,25 (22.14)
03-170 SCREW 0,20 (17.71) 0,25 (22.14)
03-260 SCREW 0,75 (66.40) 0,90 (79.67)
03-290 SCREW 0,75 (66.40) 0,90 (79.67)
03-360 SCREW 0,20 (17.71) 0,25 (22.14)
03-430 SCREW 0,09 (7.97) 0,11 (9.74)
03-440 SCREW 0,09 (7.97) 0,11 (9.74)

36-11-51 Page 8005

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

IPL FIG. TIGHTENING TORQUE

AND ITEM DESCRIPTION daN.m and (lbf.in)
No Minimum Maximum
03-497 SCREW 0,014 (1.239) 0,017 (1.505)
03-500 SCREW 0,09 (7.97) 0,11 (9.74)
03-500D SCREW 0,078 (6.903) 0,085 (7.522)
03-520 SCREW 0,09 (7.96) 0,11 (9.74)
03-532 SCREW 0,078 (6.903) 0,085 (7.522)
03-570 SCREW 0,20 (17.71) 0,25 (22.14)
03-580 THREADED RING 1,50 (132.79) 1,70 (150.50)
04-020 SCREW 0,20 (17.71) 0,25 (22.14)
04-030 THREADED RING 3,00 (265.68) 3,50 (309.96)
04-060 THREADED RING 3,00 (265.68) 3,50 (309.96)
SCREW
04-090 FOR P/N 6713D010000 AND 0,98 (86.76) 1,05 (93.00)
6713D020000
SCREW
FOR P/N 6713D040000,
04-090 6713D040000 AMDT A,
OR 6713D050000, 6713D050000 AMDT 0,60 (53.11) 0,80 (70.08)
04A-090 A, 6713D060000, 6713D060000
AMDT A, 6713D070000 AND
6713D070000 AMDT A
SCREW
04-490 0,60 (86.76) 0,80 (70.80)
FOR P/N 6713D040000
05-080 NUT 0,08 (7.08) 0,09 (7.96)

36-11-51 Page 8006

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES

TASK 36-11-51-940-801-A01
1. Special Tools, Fixtures and Equipment

A. Special Tool Table

CODE QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION USE

T01 1 0S22875D Test Tool Pneumatic interface
Used with (T36), to be fitted to
(T37) the regulator
sub-assembly
(01-230)
T02 1 OS22911 (NP) Special Tool To assemble and
OR M65724009A remove the threaded
ring (04-030)
T03 1 0S22912 Special Tool To tighten or loosen
the rod (03-180)
T04 1 0S22910 (NP) Special Tool To assemble and
OR M65724178 remove the threaded
ring (02-520)
T05 1 0S22948 Special Tool To adjust the lever
(03-330) relative to
the butterfly shaft
splines
T06 1 0S22964A Test Tool To test the butterfly
(04-160) tightness.
To adjust its correct
position
T07 1 31-7-8 Taper Mill Bonding operations
T08 1 0US20354N12 Spotfacer Bonding operations
T09 1 M65723164A Setting Tool To adjust the butterfly
(04-160) clearance
upon assembly
T10 1 M65723979 Support Support of the valve
body on assembly
T11 1 M65723525A Special Tool To disassemble the
rivet (04-120) from
the Butterfly S/A
(04-080)
T12 1 0S23105 Riveting tool To install the rivet
OR M65724008 (04-120) to the
Used with (T25) or Butterfly S/A (04-080)
(T17)
T13 2 0S22868A Blanking cap Blanking caps of the
valve body (04-340)

36-11-51 Page 9001

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

CODE QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION USE

T14 2 OS23119 (NP) Special Plug Special plugs
OR M8210043-1 for upstream
and downstream
connections
T15 1 M65723532A Adapter Torque tightening of
the threaded plug
(02-180)
T16 1 M65723533A Adapter Torque tightening of
the threaded plugs
(02-330) and (02-560)
T17 1 OS21521 Riveting Die To install the rivet
Opt to (T25) (04-120) to the
Butterfly S/A (04-080)
T18 1 M65723253C (NP) Test Tool To check the filter
OR M65723281 (01-050)
T19 1 M65724200A Adapter To tighten the ring
(02-227)
T20 1 M65724159B Special Tool Orientation of the
trailing edge probe
(01-228)
T21 1 M65724152 Special Wrench To install the trailing
edge probe (01-228)
T22 1 M65724170B Special Wrench To disassemble
and assemble the
Overpressure Valve
S/A (01-223) and
(01-223B)
T23 1 M82100020-060A Test Tool To test the
(NP) Overpressure Valve
OR M82100020- S/A (01-223)
010A
T24 1 M65724265 (NP) Test Tool To test the tightness
OR M82000222 of the clapper
(02-540) in closing
position and test the
clapper (02-220)
T25 1 M65724320 Riveting Die Used with (T12)
Opt to (T17) To install the rivet in
the butterfly
T26 1 92008A010000 Position Indication Box Position indication
OR 92086A01 tests
Used with (T27)

36-11-51 Page 9002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

CODE QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION USE

T27 1 M82000189-903A Electrical Cord Used with
OR 92008A010000
M82000189-906 Used with 92086A01
T28 1 M65724260A Setting tool To adjust the clapper
(02A-540) travel
T29A 1 M65724256A Setting Tool
SUPSD BY T29B
T29B 1 M65724365A Setting Tool To adjust the
T29B-1 1 M65724365A-010 Measuring gage microswitch (03-490)
Used with T29B
T30 1 M65724287 Special tool
T31 1 M65724220 Adapter To assemble the
pneumatic actuator
with the valve body
T32 1 M82000200B Test Tool Test of the
overpressure valve
(01-223) For P/N
6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt
A, 6713D070000 and
6713D070000 Amdt
A
T33 1 M82000228 Test Tool Pneumatic test of the
unit
T34 1 M65723908A Special Broach To broach the butterfly
splines
T35 1 M65724309-030 Special Tool To install/remove
the retaining ring
(04-052)
T36 1 M82100020-030 Test tool Test of the Regulator
Used with (T01) S/A
T37 1 M8210055-030A Test tool Test of the Regulator
Used with (T01) S/A
T38 1 M82000189-905 Electrical Cord Insulation resistance
test
T39 1 SBE1693 Test Tool Air venting tool of
the Regulator S/A
(01-230)
T40 1 M87000210 Test Tool Downstream tapping
adaptor of the Valve
Body S/A (03-250)

36-11-51 Page 9003

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

CODE QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION USE

T41 1 M82000226 Test Tool Upstream blanking
adaptor on the Valve
Body S/A (02-250)
T42 1 M65725171 Special Tool Setting of the
pre-load of the shaft
(04A-070C)
T43 1 M65725224 Special Tool To assemble the lower
bearing (04A-298)
into the valve body
(04A-340C)
T44 1 M65725372 Special Guide Alignment of the valve
seat (02A-600B)
T45 1 M65725387 Special Tool To assemble the
overpressure valve
(05-001C)
For P/N
6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt
A, 6713D070000 and
6713D070000 Amdt
A
T46 1 M82000367 Test Tool To test the
overpressure valve
(05-001C)
For P/N
6713D060000,
6713D060000 Amdt
A, 6713D070000 and
6713D070000 Amdt
A

36-11-51 Page 9004

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9001/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-080-A01

36-11-51 Page 9005

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9002/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-081-A01

36-11-51 Page 9006

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9003/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-082-A01

36-11-51 Page 9007

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9004/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-083-A01

36-11-51 Page 9008

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9005/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-084-A01

36-11-51 Page 9009

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9006/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-085-A01

36-11-51 Page 9010

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9007/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-086-A01

36-11-51 Page 9011

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9008/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-087-A01

36-11-51 Page 9012

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9009/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-088-A01

36-11-51 Page 9013

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9010/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-089-A01

36-11-51 Page 9014

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9011/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-090-A01

36-11-51 Page 9015

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9012/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-091-A01

36-11-51 Page 9016

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Special Tools
Figure 9013/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-092-A01

36-11-51 Page 9017

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-941-801-A01
2. Consumable Materials

A. Consumable Materials Table

NOTE: Equivalent substitutes can be used for listed items.

Code letter:

A- Cleaning materials D- Coating material

B- Adhesive materials, Locking E- Storage materials Packaging
materials Sealing materials materials
C- Lubricating materials X- Other materials

DESIGNATION PART NUMBER MANUFACTURER OR CODE PAGE BLOCK WHERE

AND SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER (NAME, USED
ADDRESS AND CODE)
DENATURED METHANOL LOCAL VENDOR M09A 4000
USA (OM23214) OT(S.747)
HYDROFLUORIC ACID SPECIFIC LOCAL VENDOR M26A 4000
GRAVITY 1.13
NITRIC ACID SPECIFIC GRAVITY LOCAL VENDOR M27A 4000
1.13
SODIUM BICHROMATE PURIFIED LOCAL VENDOR M28A 4000
TO 99 %
DEMINERALIZED WATER LOCAL VENDOR M33A 4000
CARBONE-SOLVENT OCTEL GAMLEN M34A 4000
INDUSTRIES
17 RTE DE ROUEN
27950 SAINT MARCEL
F2674
FRANCE
TURCO 4181 TURCO FRANCE SA M48A 4000
161 RUE DE SILLY
92100 BOULOGNE
BILLANCOURT
F3172
FRANCE
70030 CARECLEAN AS1 CASTROL FRANCE SA M49A 4000
10 AV DE L’ENTREPRISE
95866 CERGY ST
CHRISTOPHE CEDEX
F3591
FRANCE

36-11-51 Page 9018

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

DESIGNATION PART NUMBER MANUFACTURER OR CODE PAGE BLOCK WHERE

AND SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER (NAME, USED
ADDRESS AND CODE)
TURCO AVIATION SPR ARKEMA M51A 4000
4 CRS MICHELET LA
DEFENSE 10
92800 PUTEAUX
F7860
FRANCE
PROMOCLEAN TP 108 PROMOSOL SA M53A 4000
BD HENRI CAHN
94360 BRY SUR MARNE
F5927
FRANCE
CEMENT SILASTIC RTV732 DOW CORNING FRANCE SA M06B 7000
LE BRITANNIA
20 BD EUGENE DERUELLE
69003 LYON
F7286
FRANCE
LOCTITE 242 HENKEL LOCTITE FRANCE M09B 7000
10 AVENUE EUGENE
GAZEAU
60300 SENLIS
F7121
FRANCE
LOCTITE 648 HENKEL LOCTITE FRANCE M63B 7000
10 AV EUGENE GAZEAU
60300 SENLIS
F7121
FRANCE
GRAPHITE POWDER ACHESON FRANCE SA M01C 7000
F (AIR 4224) RUE GEORGES BESSE
USA (MIL-G-6711) 67150 ERSTEIN
F5606
FRANCE
MOLYKOTE 3402C DOW CORNING FRANCE SA M15C 7000
USA (MIL-L-8937D, LE BRITANNIA
MIL-L-23398C, 20 BD EUGENE DERUELLE
MIL-L-46-147) 69003 LYON 3EME
F7286
FRANCE
NEVER SEEZ NSB4M ISO ROULEMENTS M23C 7000
USA (MIL-A-907D) 15 RUE DE LA FAISANDERIE
75116 PARIS CEDEX 16
F7527
FRANCE

36-11-51 Page 9019

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

DESIGNATION PART NUMBER MANUFACTURER OR CODE PAGE BLOCK WHERE

AND SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER (NAME, USED
ADDRESS AND CODE)
VARNISH CLEAR LOCAL VENDOR M03D 15000
ALODINE 1200 USA (MIL-C-5541A) NUFARM M04D 6000
28 BD CAMELINAT
92230 GENNEVILLIERS
F2865
FRANCE
HIGH TEMP. VARNISH NYCOTE LABORATORIES M15D 6000
NYCOTE7-11-BLUE CORP 7000
12750 RAYMER ST
91605-4225 NORTH
HOLLYWOOD
05803
UNITED STATES
PAPER PACKING VALLUTHENE RHODIA CHIMIE M01E 15000
P21 CLASS 12 GRADE A TYPE C 26 QUAI ALPHONSE LE
GALLO
92100 BOULOGNE
BILLANCOURT
F0107
FRANCE
SHEET, TH.WELD. VALLUTHENE T SILVALAC (STE M02E 15000
CLASS 1 & 2 INDUSTRIELLE DE
LA VALLEE ET DES
EMBALLAGES D’ARLAC)
SA
7 RUE EUGENE FLACHAT
75017 PARIS
F3689
FRANCE
STORAGE BAG WITH DESICCANT CECA SA M03E 15000
USA (MIL-D-3464D) 4 CRS MICHELET
92800 PUTEAUX
F3757
FRANCE
BULPACK TYPE GB8526 SHOCK SEALED AIR PACKAGING M04E 15000
ABSORBING 53 RUE ST DENIS
28230 EPERNON
F8307
FRANCE

36-11-51 Page 9020

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

DESIGNATION PART NUMBER MANUFACTURER OR CODE PAGE BLOCK WHERE

AND SPECIFICATION SUPPLIER (NAME, USED
ADDRESS AND CODE)
WATER-PROOF ABRASIVE PAPER 3M FRANCE M01X 6000
PNR: M734C-P1200 BD L’OISE 7000
95006 CERGY PONTOISE
F0347
FRANCE
SOLDER X20T3 AUBERT ET DUVAL M23X 6000
33 AV DU MAINE 7000
75015 PARIS
FANU1
FRANCE

36-11-51 Page 9021

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 9022

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

STORAGE (INCLUDING TRANSPORTATION)

TASK 36-11-51-550-801-A01
1. Storage

A. Reason for the Job

Self-explanatory

B. Job Set-up Information

(1) Consumable Material

CODE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

M03D LOCAL VENDOR CLEAR VARNISH
M01E VALLUTHENE P 21 CLASS 12 GRADE PAPER PACKING MATERIAL
A TYPE C
M02E TH.WELD. VALLUTHENE T CLASS 1& 2 SHEET
M03E STORAGE BAG WITH DESICCANT STORAGE BAG
M04E BULPACK TYPE GB 8526 SHOCK-ABSORBING MATERIAL

C. Job Set-up

Not applicable

D. Procedure

SUBTASK 36-11-51-530-001-A01
(1) Packaging

(a) Make sure that all the projections and the sharp edges have a protection. Make sure that
all the protective caps are installed on the component.

(b) Put the component in the paper packing material (M01E).

(c) Put the component in an envelope made of sheet (M02E), which has a minimum
thickness of 0,2 mm (0.008 in).

NOTE: When you seal the envelope, keep sufficient material so you can use the
envelope three times.

(d) Put the storage desiccant bags (M03E) along the length of the component, and safety
them in position.

(e) Put an identity label in the envelope, and make sure that you can read it when the
envelope is closed.

(f) Remove as much air as possible from the envelope. Heat-seal the envelope.

NOTE: Do steps (c) to (f) quickly, because the storage bags are hygroscopic.

36-11-51 Page 15001

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(g) Put the labels on the outer surface of the envelope. Write these three things on the labels:

– “This envelope contains desiccant”

– “DO NOT OPEN until necessary for use”
– The date of packing.

(h) Put the component in a cardboard box as written in ATA 300 - Class II. Fill the box
with shock-absorbing material (M04E).

(i) Close the container, and put a desiccant label on the outer surface of the container.

(j) Apply clear varnish (M03D) on the labels.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-550-001-A01
(2) Storage

(a) Keep the component in a clean and dry room or building. The temperature must be
between 18 C and 22 C (64 F to 72 F), and the relative humidity must be between
25% and 65%.

(b) Keep the component in its initial box. Make sure that the stack in the store is not too
high, to prevent damage.

(c) Do not keep the component near corrosive fluids.

(d) Put the package in a position which makes it easy to read the identification and humidity
indicator labels.

(e) Put the packaged component in the store in the sequence of its date.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-550-002-A01
(3) Destorage

(a) Remove the component from the box.

(b) Collect the different trailer documents.

(c) Remove the different storage parts.

(d) Do a visual inspection of the component.

SUBTASK 36-11-51-800-005-A01
(4) Transportation

(a) Not applicable

E. Close-up

Not applicable

36-11-51 Page 15002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

APPENDIX A

TASK 36-11-51-880-801-A01
1. Approved Repairers

A. List of Approved Repairers

TRADE NAME ADDRESS COMMENTS

LIEBHERR-AEROSPACE SALINE 1465 WOODLAND DR. SALINE
48176 SALINE, MI U.S.A.
Tel. 313/429.7225
Fax. 313/429.2294
LIEBHERR-AEROSPACE SINGAPORE N . 8 PANDAM AVENUE
2260 SINGAPORE
Tel. 65.265.2657
Fax. 65.265.2305
LIEBHERR-AEROSPACE TOULOUSE 408, Avenue des Etats-Unis
SAS B.P. 52010
31016 TOULOUSE CEDEX
FRANCE
Tel. 33. (0)5.61.35.28.28
Fax. 33. (0)5.61.35.29.29

APPENDIX A

36-11-51 Page A-1

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

APPENDIX A

36-11-51 Page A-2

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST

36-11-51 Page 10001

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 10002

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

TASK 36-11-51-802-810-A01
1. Introduction

A. General

The Illustrated Parts List (IPL) contains a list and the illustrations of the assemblies, and the detailed
parts of the unit, in the disassembly sequence. It includes these sections:

– Introduction (INTRO)
– Optional Vendor Table (OVT)
– Vendors List (VL)
– Equipment Designator Index (EDI)
– Numerical Index (NI)
– Detailed Parts List (DPL).

B. How to Use the Illustrated Parts List

(1) You can find the illustration for a part, if you know the part number. Refer to the Numerical Index
and look for the part number and the related figure and item number. Refer to the Detailed
Parts List and look for the first figure and item number found in the Numerical Index for this
part. It is possible that this figure shows the part in a section or a system of the component
other than the one necessary. If it does, refer to the other figure numbers which are given in
the Numerical Index.

(2) To determine the part number of a given part, refer to the illustration which shows the assembly
with this part. Record the item number of the illustrated part and refer to the Detailed Parts List,
which gives its part number and its description.

C. Vendors List (VL)

The manufacturer codes have the capital letter "V" in front of them. These codes are used in the
nomenclature of the Detailed Parts List to identify the source of procurement for the vendor items. A
list of these codes and of the manufacturer’s names and addresses is given in the Vendors List.

D. Numerical Index (NI)

(1) In this index, the part numbers are classified in this sequence:

(a) The classification is made from the left to the right. Each digit (letter, numeral, dash)
has its own meaning.

(b) The sequence in the first left row is:

1 an alpha letter A to Z (but not the "O" and the "I", because it is possible to read these
letters as a zero and a one),

2 a numeral 0 to 9.

(c) For the subsequent rows, the sequence is:

1 a dash,

2 an alpha letter A to Z (but not the "O" and the "I", because it is possible to read these
letters as a zero and a one),

36-11-51 Page 10003

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

3 a numeral 0 to 9.

(d) The part number column contains all the part numbers which are included in the Detailed
Parts List. The part numbers which are deleted or superseded in the Detailed Part List are
listed in the Numerical Index, and they are identified as deleted or superseded.

E. Detailed Parts List (DPL)

(1) Figure and Item Number

(a) Each assembly, sub-assembly and part which has a part number, and which is given in
the parts list, has an item number.

(b) The figure number which is related to the item number is shown on the first line, at
the top of each page.

(c) Assemblies, the Sub-assemblies numbered parts which are in the list, but which are not
illustrated, are identified with a dash (-) before the item number.

(d) An index letter before the item number is cross-referenced to the figure which shows the
modication of the part.

(2) Manufacturer’s Part Number

A manufacturer’s part number is given to each assembly and to each detailed part, if it is
illustrated and also if it is not illustrated.

(3) Nomenclature

(a) The nomenclature is given with an indenture, to show how the parts and the assemblies
and related to their next higher assemblies. These are the details:

12 34 5 6 7

Assembly

• Detailed parts for the assembly

• Sub-assembly

• Attaching parts and/or storage parts for the sub-assembly

***

• • Detailed parts for the sub-assembly

• • Sub-sub-assembly

• • Attaching parts and/or storage parts for the sub-sub-assembly

***

• • • Detailed parts for the sub-sub-assembly

(b) The attaching parts are shown immediately after the assembly of the part. In the list, they
are below the same indenture number as the item they attach, and they are identified by
the words "Attaching Parts". They are followed by three asterisks.

36-11-51 Page 10004

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(c) The manufacturer’s code, or the abbreviation NP (not procurable), is put at the end
right-hand side of the first line of the nomenclature column on the right side. Where
there is no code number or the abbreviation NP (not procurable), the manufacturer is
LIEBHERR AEROSPACE TOULOUSE SAS (Manufacturer code: F1958).

(4) Effectivity Code

(a) An alphanumerical index gives the effectivity of the sub-assemblies, and it gives the
detailed parts list in relation to the next higher assembly(ies) or sub-assembly(ies).

(b) When the effectivity is fully applicable, the use code column stays empty.

(c) The use code for the assemblies, and the detailed parts list, refer to the figure/item
number of the next higher assembly(ies) or sub-assembly(ies). Example: Effectivity 1A,
1B, 1C is written 1ABC.

(5) Units per Assembly

(a) The units per assembly column shows the quantity of units necessary for one next
higher assembly.

(b) In some cases, the information is replaced by the abbreviation RF (for reference) or
AR (as required).

(6) Abbreviations Used

ALT FROM PNR A part which is functionnally and physically interchangeable with the initial part
XXX after repair

AMDT Amendment

AR As required

DELETED Deleted part

DPL Detailed Parts List

EDI Equipment Designator Index

EFFECT CODE Effectivity code

IPL Illustrated Parts List

LH Left-hand

MFR Manufacturer Manufacturer or Optional

Manufacturer in the DPL

MODIFIED A part got after a different part is modified

FROM

NHA Next higher assembly

NP Not procurable

36-11-51 Page 10005

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

OPT PNR Optional part number Optional part number which is

fully interchangeable with the
part in the part number column

OPT SEE TABLE Refer to the optional table

ORDER A part number with more than fifteen characters

OVERLGTH PNR

OVERSIZE A part with a size which is larger than its nominal dimension

PNR Part number

POST SB After a modification given up by a Service Bulletin

PRE SB Before a modification given up by a Service Bulletin

R Revised

RF For reference

RH Right hand

SEE CMM Refer to the Component Maintenance Manual

SEE FIG FOR Refer to the figure for details

DET

SEE FIG FOR Refer to the figure for the next higher assembly
NHA

SEL FROM Selected from. A part that you must select from a collection of parts, as necessary

SUPSD BY Superseded by xxx

SUPSDS Supersedes xxx

UNDERSIZE A part with a size which is smaller than its nominal dimension

UNITS PER Units Per Assembly

ASSY

VL Vendors List

F. Updating

(1) General

(a) When an item is revised, added or deleted, the letter "R" is shown in the right-hand
margin (the date of issue changes).

(2) Added Items

(a) The basic sequence of the items are given in steps of 10. It is thus possible to add new
items between the old ones, in the correct sequence of the breakdown. If you add more
than nine new items, you must add new figure at the end of the IPL.

36-11-51 Page 10006

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

(3) New Figures Added

(a) When new illustrations are necessary, the alternative figures are added. They refer to the
same nomenclature. The alternative figure is given the basic figure number, with a letter.
This letter is in front of the item number in the nomenclature.

36-11-51 Page 10007

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

VENDOR LIST

CODE NAME ADDRESS

VF0111 BNAE (BUREAU DE NORMALISATION 199 R J-JACQUES ROUSSEAU

DE L’AERONAUTIQUE ET DE 92138 ISSY LES MOULINEAUX
L’ESPACE) FRANCE

VF0225 FCI FRANCE 145 RUE YVES LE COZ

78035 VERSAILLES
FRANCE

VF0229 LE JOINT FRANCAIS 2 RUE BALZAC

75008 PARIS
FRANCE

VF0235 TRELLEBORG SEALING SOLUTIONS 101 RUE ST MARTIN

CONDE 14110 CONDE SUR NOIREAU
FRANCE

VF0271 SENIOR AEROSPACE ERMETO ZA EURO VAL DE LOIRE

8 BD DU CLOS THOMAS
41330 FOSSE
FRANCE

VF0286 TYCO ELECTRONICS FRANCE SAS 29 CHAUSSEE JULES CESAR

95300 CERGY PONTOISE
FRANCE

VF0458 QUINSON SA 6 R DE LENS

92000 NANTERRE
FRANCE

VF0559 SOFRANCE RUE MARYSE BASTIE

87800 NEXON
FRANCE

VF1699 BOLLHOFF OTALU SA ROUTE D’APREMONT

73490 LA RAVOIRE
FRANCE

VF1868 DRAKA FILECA-FOPTICA ROUTE NATIONALE 1

60730 SAINTE GENEVIEVE
FRANCE

VF1958 LIEBHERR AEROSPACE TOULOUSE 408 AV DES ETATS UNIS

SAS BP 52010
31016 TOULOUSE CEDEX
FRANCE

36-11-51 Page 10008

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

CODE NAME ADDRESS

VF1983 CONNECTEURS ELECTRIQUES 17 RUE LAVOISIER

DEUTSCH 27000 EVREUX
FRANCE

VF3341 HELLERMANNTYTON GROUPE 2 R DES HETRES

BOWTHORPE 78190 TRAPPES
FRANCE

VF6220 RAYCHEM SA 2 BD DU MOULIN A VENT

95800 CERCY ST CHRISTOPHE
FRANCE

VF8995 FCI FRANCE 145 RUE YVES LE COZ

78035 VERSAILLES
FRANCE

VF9108 MOSS PIECES PLASTIQUES 1 RUE DU GUE

77990 LE MESNIL AMELOT
FRANCE

VU1982 NICHOLSONS SEALING HAMSTERLEY

TECHNOLOGIES LTD NE17 7SX NEWCASTLE-UPON-TYNE
UNITED KINGDOM

36-11-51 Page 10009

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 10010

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

ALPHA/NUMERIC INDEX

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

ABG22225
(optional, see basic P/N 04 155A 1
S105DN0400B1)
04A 155A 1

CABLEINOXD1 01 158A 1

CG0752503458N02 01 050B 1

CP520S521 01 060A 3

E22-19NIAGBLANC 3 530A AR
3A 530A AR

E22-19NIAGBLEU 3 535A AR
3A 535A AR

E22-19NIAGJAUNE 3 537A AR
3A 537A AR

EC5465 02A 070B 1

I-E8-125 3A 248A 1

I-E8-12S 01 030B 1
3 248A 1

JS-217 3A 512A 1

KAPTON92 3 470A 5
3A 470A 5

KNCML3X0-50 3 565A 2
3A 565A 2

L0H103 3A 539A AR

LN9490BK04 3A 531A 1

MT118 3 410B 1
3A 410B 1

S100-631 02A 570A 1

36-11-51 Page 10011

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

S100-632 3 150A 1
3A 150A 1

S100-637 3 529A 1
3A 529A 1

S100-837 02A 086A 1

S100-838 5 040A 1

S100-845 02A 510B 1

S100-846 02A 545A 1

S100-847 02A 175A 1

S100-848 02A 210C 1

S100-850 02A 090B 1

S100-864 02A 090C 1

S100-895 04 055A 1

S100-911 3 150B 1
3A 150B 1

S100-962 5 040B 1

S102A1300139090 04A 255A 1

305A 1

S105DN0400B1 04 155A 1
04A 155A 1

S1242 3 060A 1

S1242A 3A 060B 1

S303-004
(optional, see basic P/N 01320030045) 02A 620A 15
3 575A 4
3A 575A 4

S303-007
(optional, see basic P/N 01320040004) 04 015A 1
04A 015A 1

36-11-51 Page 10012

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

S303-009
(optional, see basic P/N 01320040006) 3 225A 4
242A 11
3A 225A 4
242A 11

S303-012
(optional, see basic P/N 01320050625) 3 244A 1
3A 244A 1

S303-013
(optional, see basic P/N 01320050075) 02A 630A 2

S303-016
(optional, see basic P/N 01320060009) 3 246A 2
3A 246A 2

S3348-05 3 293A AR
3A 293A AR

S3348-2 3 295A AR
3A 295A AR

S3518 3 249A 1
3A 249A 1

S4051 01 152A 2

S4095 01 154A 1

S4147 01 020C 1

S4165
(optional, see basic P/N CP520S521) 01 060A 3

S550-11 04 240C 35
300B 35

S580A03000 04 180B 20

S580A04000 02A 580B 1

S602-10X1
(optional, see basic P/N 10X1ZC70THT) 02A 320A 1
380A 1
550A 1

36-11-51 Page 10013

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

S602-12-3X1-5
(optional, see basic P/N 02A 590A 1
12-3X1-5ZC70THT)

S602-14X1-5
(optional, see basic P/N 3 585A 1
14X1-5ZC70THT)
3A 585A 1

S602-15X1-5
(optional, see basic P/N 02A 260A 1
15X1-5ZC70THT)

S602-20X1
(optional, see basic P/N 20X1ZC70THT) 3 230A 1
3A 230A 1

S602-35X1-5
(optional, see basic P/N 02A 050A 1
35X1-5ZC70THT)

S602-38X1-5
(optional, see basic P/N 02A 050B 1
38X1-5ZC70THT)
440B 1

S602-4X1
(optional, see basic P/N 4X1ZC70THT) 01 280A 1
02A 060A 1
450A 1
3 140A 1
3A 140A 1

S602-6X1
(optional, see basic P/N 6X1ZC70THT) 01 290A 1
02A 390A 1

S602-79-4X1-6
(optional, see basic P/N 3 130A 1
79-4X1-6ZC70THT)
3A 130A 1

S602-7X1
(optional, see basic P/N 7X1ZC70THT) 02A 280B 1

36-11-51 Page 10014

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

S602-8X1
(optional, see basic P/N 8X1ZC70THT) 01 028A 4
090A 2
180A 4
02A 150B 1

S635-014
(optional, see basic P/N 3 420A 1
8533-0ES10-05PN)
3A 420A 1
(optional, see basic P/N 3 420B 1
983-0SE10-05PN)
3A 420B 1

S636-002
(optional, see basic P/N 38007-10-3014) 3 480D 1
3A 480D 1
(optional, see basic P/N 852-31N10) 3 480C 1
3A 480C 1

S741-220 01 150A 1

S853 3A 490F 1

SR1150-10332 01 022A 1

SR1400-31965 01 340A 2

TFE-CODE12 3 540A AR
3A 540A AR

TFE-CODE8 3 545A AR
3A 545A AR

01320030045 02A 620A 15

3 575A 4
3A 575A 4

01320040004 04 015A 1
04A 015A 1

01320040006 3 225A 4
242A 11
3A 225A 4
242A 11

01320050075 02A 630A 2

36-11-51 Page 10015

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

01320050625 3 244A 1
3A 244A 1

01320060009 3 246A 2
315A 1
3A 246A 2
315A 1

097-0015-20 3 460B 5
3A 460B 5

104-0001-09 3 450B 1
3A 450B 1

10X1SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 10X1ZC70THT) 02A 320A 1
380A 1
550A 1

10X1ZC70THT 02A 320A 1

380A 1
550A 1

12-3X1-5SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 02A 590A 1
12-3X1-5ZC70THT)

12-3X1-5ZC70THT 02A 590A 1

14X1-5SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 3 585A 1
14X1-5ZC70THT)
3A 585A 1

14X1-5ZC70THT 3 585A 1
3A 585A 1

15X1-5SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 02A 260A 1
15X1-5ZC70THT)

15X1-5ZC70THT 02A 260A 1

16HM4 3A 513A 1

36-11-51 Page 10016

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

20X1SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 20X1ZC70THT) 3 230A 1
3A 230A 1

20X1ZC70THT 3 230A 1
3A 230A 1

21215CA1606 04 120B 1
04A 120B 1

21215CA1607 04 120A 1
04A 120A 1

21215DB1602 3 070B 4
3A 070B 4

21215DB1604 3 070C 4
3A 070C 4

22125CF040014E 3 360B 1
3A 360B 1

22125CF060018E 3 260B 2
3A 260B 2

22125CM050020 04 090A 1
04A 090A 1

22208CF040010E 3 110A 8
3A 110A 8

22208CF060012E 3 290A 2
3A 290A 2

22222CC030018 3 500B 4
500C 2

22222CF030014E 01 014B 1

22222CF030016E 01 014A 1

22222CF040014E 04 020E 1
04A 020E 1

22222CF040016E 04 020D 1
04A 020D 1

36-11-51 Page 10017

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

22223CF030008E 02A 030A 2

3A 500D 2
532A 1

22223CF030010E 02A 020A 4

410A 5

22223CF050012E 01 240A 2

22223CF060018E 3 260C 2
3A 260C 2

22224CF060012E 3 290C 1
3A 290C 1

22225CF060012E 3 290B 1
3A 290B 1

22256CF040008E 3 570A 3

22256CF040012E 3A 570B 3

22291CF020010E 3A 517A 2

22291CF030006E 02A 140A 3

22293CF030006E 3 430A 2
3A 430A 2

22296CF030006E 01 310A 2
3 020A 2
440A 2
3A 020A 2
440A 2

22296CF040008E 3 170B 4
3A 170B 4

22431CF020E 3A 518A 2

22541N040 3 090A 1
3A 090A 1

22541P030 5 080A 1

22541P060 3 280A 2
3A 280A 2

36-11-51 Page 10018

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

23111CC030 01 015A 1
016B 2
02A 040A 6
430A 5
3 040B 2
520B 4
3A 040B 2
510A 2
533A 1

23111CC040 3 120B 8
3A 120B 8

23111CC050 01 270A 1

23111CC060 3 270B 2

23111DB030 3 040C 2
3A 040C 2

23111DB040 3 120A 8
3A 120A 8

23111DB060 3 270A 2
3A 270A 2

23111DD060 3A 270B 2

23202CC0110 5 010B 1

23203CC0023 3 210A 1
350A 1
3A 210A 1
350A 1

23203CC0032 3 210B 1
350B 1
3A 210B 1
350B 1

23203CC0110 5 010A 1

23320CA050 01 040A AR
3 030A AR
3A 030A AR
445A AR

36-11-51 Page 10019

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

23320CA080 01 135A AR

23350CC050 04 100A 1
04A 100A 1

323030 3 550A 1
550B 2
3A 550B 2

35X1-5SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 02A 050A 1
35X1-5ZC70THT)

35X1-5ZC70THT 02A 050A 1

38007-10-3014 3 480D 1
3A 480D 1

38X1-5SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 02A 050B 1
38X1-5ZC70THT)
440B 1

38X1-5ZC70THT 02A 050B 1

440B 1

3J4 01 030A 1

4X1SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 4X1ZC70THT) 01 280A 1
02A 060A 1
450A 1
3 140A 1
3A 140A 1

4X1ZC70THT 01 280A 1
02A 060A 1
450A 1
3 140A 1
3A 140A 1

60055-18 3 523A 1
3A 523A 1

60055-20 3 525A 2
3A 525A 2

36-11-51 Page 10020

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

60055-42 01 130A 1

60055-43 01 156A 1

60055-44 01 140A 1

60100-144
(optional, see basic P/N 6717-65) 3 527A 1
3A 527A 1

6713
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0712) 3 560D 1

6713-0100 3 310A 1
3A 310A 1
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0100R) 3 310B 1
3A 310B 1

6713-0100R 3 310B 1
3A 310B 1

6713-01020 5 001C RF

6713-011 04 340A 1
04A 340A 1
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-011R) 04 340D 1
04A 340D 1

6713-011R 04 340D 1
04A 340D 1

6713-0130 3 010A 1
3A 010A 1

6713-0151 02A 610A 1

6713-0151R
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0151) 02A 610A 1

6713-0180
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-050) 3 220A 1
3A 220A 1

6713-0230 3 490C 2
490D 1

6713-0240 02A 432A 1

36-11-51 Page 10021

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6713-0340 01 026A 1

6713-0370 01 223A 1
5 001A RF

6713-0380 5 090A 1

6713-0380R 5 095A 1

6713-0410 02A 010C 1

6713-0430 02A 130B 1

6713-0440 02A 530C 1

6713-0450 04 001B RF
3 250B 1

6713-0460 04 080C 1

6713-0480 01 330C 1
3 001C RF

6713-050 3 220A 1
3A 220A 1

6713-0500 01 230D 1
02A 001D RF
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0520) 01 230E 1

6713-0510 3 560B 1

6713-0520 01 230E 1
02A 001E RF
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0500) 01 230D 1

6713-0521 02A 610B 1

6713-0521R
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0521) 02A 610B 1

6713-0560
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-140) 04 030B 1

6713-0570 04 010B 1
04A 010B 1

6713-0580 02A 400F 1

36-11-51 Page 10022

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6713-0590
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-146) 3 100B 1
3A 100B 1

6713-060 3 490A 2
490B 1
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-060R) 3 490E 2

6713-0600 02A 530D 1

6713-060R 3 490E 2

6713-0610 04 001C RF
3 250C 1

6713-0611 04 340B 1
04A 340B 1
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0611R) 04 340E 1
04A 340E 1

6713-0611R 04 340E 1
04A 340E 1

6713-0620 01 330D 1
3 001D RF

6713-0630
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-050) 3 220A 1
3A 220A 1

6713-0700 04 001D RF
3 250D 1
3A 250D 1

6713-0701 04 340C 1
04A 340C 1

6713-0702 04 080D 1
04A 080D 1

6713-0710 01 330E 1
3 001E RF

6713-0711 3 240C 1
3A 240C 1

36-11-51 Page 10023

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6713-0712 3 560D 1
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0713) 3 560C 1

6713-0713 3 560C 1

6713-0720 01 230F 1
02A 001F RF
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0730) 01 230G 1

6713-0721 02A 610C 1

6713-0721R
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0721) 02A 610C 1

6713-0730 01 230G 1
02A 001G RF
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0720) 01 230F 1

6713-0731 02A 610E 1

6713-0733 01 330G 1
3A 001A RF

6713-0740 01 223B 1
5 001B RF

6713-0741 5 090B 1

6713-0750 04A 001E RF

3 250E 1
3A 250E 1

6713-0760 01 330F 1
3 001F RF

6713-080 3 320A 1
3A 320A 1
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-080R) 3 320B 1
3A 320B 1

6713-0800 01 230H 1
02A 001H RF
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0810) 01 230I 1

6713-080R 3 320B 1
3A 320B 1

36-11-51 Page 10024

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6713-0810 01 230I 1
02A 001I RF
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0800) 01 230H 1

6713-0820 3A 560E 1

6713-0900 01 330H 1
3A 001B RF

6713-10 3 080A 1

6713-100 04 150B 1

6713-101 02A 435A 1

6713-106 02A 270C 1

6713-108 02A 540C 1

6713-109 02A 600B 1

6713-11 3 190A 1
330A 1
3A 190A 1
330A 1

6713-111 04 070B 1
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-111R) 04 070C 1

6713-111R 04 070C 1

6713-112 02A 605A AR

6713-113 3 600B 2
3A 600B 2
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-113A) 3 600C 2
3A 600C 2

6713-113A 3 600C 2
3A 600C 2
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-113) 3 600B 2
3A 600B 2

6713-114 3 580B 1
3A 580B 1

6713-116 04 275A 1
04A 275A 1

36-11-51 Page 10025

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6713-118 02A 485A 1

6713-121 02A 082A 1

480B 1

6713-122 02A 081A AR

470B AR

6713-124 02A 220C 1

6713-124A 02A 220D 1

6713-125 02A 180D 1

6713-126 02A 190B AR

6713-127 02A 223A 2

(optional, see basic P/N 6713-127A) 02A 223B 2

6713-127A 02A 223B 2

(optional, see basic P/N 6713-127) 02A 223A 2

6713-128 02A 227A 1

6713-129 02A 163A 2

(optional, see basic P/N 6713-129A) 02A 163B 2

6713-129A 02A 163B 2

(optional, see basic P/N 6713-129) 02A 163A 2

6713-130 02A 160B 1

6713-132 02A 400E 1

6713-136 02A 010D 1

6713-14 3 180A 1
3A 180A 1
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-14R) 3 180B 1
3A 180B 1

6713-140 04 030B 1

6713-146 3 100B 1
3A 100B 1

6713-148 04 059A 1

36-11-51 Page 10026

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6713-149 04 057A 1

6713-14R 3 180B 1
3A 180B 1

6713-159 3A 573A 1

6713-16 3 410A 1
3A 410A 1

6713-160 3A 515A 1

6713-162 3A 080B 1

6713-17 3 400A 2
3A 400A 2
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-17A) 3 400B 2
3A 400B 2

6713-17A 3 400B 2
3A 400B 2
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-17) 3 400A 2
3A 400A 2

6713-18 3 370A 1
3A 370A 1

6713-20 01 080A 1

6713-30 3 300A 1
3A 300A 1

6713-34 01 170A 1

6713-35 01 160A 1

6713-36 01 190A 1

6713-45 3 050A 1

6713-54 01 250A 1

6713-70 01 228A 1

6713-77 01 024A 1

6713-79 01 020B 1

36-11-51 Page 10027

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6713-80 02A 370C 1

6713-81 01 016A 1

6713-82 01 012A 1

6713-83 5 060A 1

6713-84 5 020A 1

6713-85 5 030A AR

6713-87 01 105A 1

6713-88 5 050A 1

6713-89 5 070A 1

6713-95 02A 167A 1

6713-96 01 226A 1

6713-98 04 130B 1
04A 130B 1

6713-99 04 140C 1

6713C010000 01 001C

6713D010000 01 001D RF

6713D020000 01 001E RF

6713D040000 01 001F RF
001G RF

6713D050000 01 001H RF
001I RF

6713D060000 01 001J RF
001K RF

6713D070000 01 001L RF
001M RF

6714-0200 01 220A 1

6714-0210 01 100A 1

36-11-51 Page 10028

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6714-0350 3 241A 1
3A 241A 1

6714-0370 02A 460C 1

6714-0420 02A 080B 1

6714-0470 3 240B 1
3A 240B 1

6714-114
(optional, see basic P/N EC5465) 02A 070B 1

6714-119 02A 120B 1

6714-120 02A 085A 1

6714-15 02A 560A 1

6714-22 02A 520A 1

6714-36 01 300A 1

6717-65 3 527A 1
3A 527A 1

6729-21 04 110A 1
04A 110A 1

6730-15 3 160A 1
3A 160A 1
(optional, see basic P/N 6730-15R) 3 160B 1
3A 160B 1

6730-15R 3 160B 1
3A 160B 1

6730-23 3 380A 1
3A 380A 1

6740-14 04 060A 1

6740-15 04 040A 1
220A 1
04A 040A 1
220A 1

6740-17 04 260A 1

36-11-51 Page 10029

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6740-17A 04 260B 1

6740-18 04 280A 1
320A 1

6740-18A 04 280B 1
320B 1

6740-19 04 230A 1

6740-19A 04 230B 1

6740-21 04 250A 1
310A 1

6740-22 04 270A 1
04A 270A 1

6740-23 04 330A 1
04A 330A 1

6740-24 04 290A 1

6740-4 04 190A 1

6740-43 3 200A 1
340A 1
3A 200A 1
340A 1

6740-48 04 160A 1
04A 160A 1

6740-5 04 170A 1

6740-8 04 200A AR

6740-9 04 050A 2
210A 2

6740-97 3A 511A 1

6753-0950 02A 460D 1

6753-10 04 110B 1
04A 110B 1

6753-100 02A 010E 1

36-11-51 Page 10030

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6753-101 02A 160C 1

6753-119 3 520C 1

6753-18 3 390B 1
3A 390B 1

6753-42 02A 330B 1

6753-77 02A 120C 1

6753-78 02A 095A 1

6753-79 02A 096A 1

6763-0962 02A 610D 1

(optional, see basic P/N 6713-0731) 02A 610E 1

6763-0962R
(optional, see basic P/N 6763-0962) 02A 610D 1

6764-118
(optional, see basic P/N 6713-108) 02A 540C 1

6764-187 3 190B 1
330B 1
3A 190B 1
330B 1

6764-29 3 200B 1
340B 1
3A 200B 1
340B 1

6773-01020 01 223C 1

6773-01021 5 020B 1

6773-14 04 052A 1

6773-15 04A 050B 1

210B 1

6773-16 04A 051A 1

215C 1

6773-17 04A 225A 1

285A 1

36-11-51 Page 10031

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6773-18 04A 235A 1

295A 1

6773-26 3A 050B 1

6773-60 5 070B 1

6773-61 5 050B 1

6773-62 5 090C 1

6773-63 01 105B 1

6773-7 04 053A 1

6774-0620 02A 070C 1

460E 1

6794-012 04A 298A 1

6794-10 04A 258A AR

6794-11 04A 260C 1

6794-12 04A 030C 1

060B 1

6794-3 04A 070C 1

6794-33 02A 530E 1

6794-34 02A 130C 1

6794-37 02A 530F 1

6794-5 04A 245A 1

6794-6 04A 313A 1

6794-7 04A 315A 1

6794-8 04A 320C 1

6794-9 04A 259A AR

6X1SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 6X1ZC70THT) 01 290A 1
02A 390A 1

36-11-51 Page 10032

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

PART NUMBER AIRLINE FIGURE ITEM TOTAL

STOCK NUMBER NUMBER REQ’D
NUMBER

6X1ZC70THT 01 290A 1
02A 390A 1

70778 3 450A 1
3A 450A 1

79-4X1-6SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 3 130A 1
79-4X1-6ZC70THT)
3A 130A 1

79-4X1-6ZC70THT 3 130A 1
3A 130A 1

7X1SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 7X1ZC70THT) 02A 280B 1

7X1ZC70THT 02A 280B 1

852-31N10 3 480C 1
3A 480C 1

8533-0ES10-05PN 3 420A 1
3A 420A 1

8533-1000 3 460A 5
3A 460A 5

8X1SL1013A
(optional, see basic P/N 8X1ZC70THT) 01 028A 4
090A 2
180A 4
02A 150B 1

8X1ZC70THT 01 028A 4
090A 2
180A 4
02A 150B 1

983-0SE10-05PN 3 420B 1
3A 420B 1

36-11-51 Page 10033

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 10034

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

OPTIONAL VENDOR INDEX

OPTIONAL OPTIONAL PART NUMBER

PART NUMBER VENDOR’S
CODE PART NUMBER VENDOR
CODE

01320030045 ZZZZZZ S303-004 VF1958

01320040004 ZZZZZZ S303-007 VF1958

01320040006 ZZZZZZ S303-009 VF1958

01320050075 ZZZZZZ S303-013 VF1958

01320050625 ZZZZZZ S303-012 VF1958

01320060009 ZZZZZZ S303-016 VF1958

10X1ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 10X1SL1013A VF0229

S602-10X1 VF1958

12-3X1-5ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 12-3X1-5SL1013A VF0229

S602-12-3X1-5 VF1958

14X1-5ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 14X1-5SL1013A VF0229

S602-14X1-5 VF1958

15X1-5ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 15X1-5SL1013A VF0229

S602-15X1-5 VF1958

20X1ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 20X1SL1013A VF0229

S602-20X1 VF1958

35X1-5ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 35X1-5SL1013A VF0229

S602-35X1-5 VF1958

38007-10-3014 ZZZZZZ S636-002 VF1958

38X1-5ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 38X1-5SL1013A VF0229

S602-38X1-5 VF1958

4X1ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 4X1SL1013A VF0229

S602-4X1 VF1958

6713-0100R ZZZZZZ 6713-0100 VF1958

6713-011R ZZZZZZ 6713-011 VNP

6713-0151 ZZZZZZ 6713-0151R VNP

36-11-51 Page 10035

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

OPTIONAL OPTIONAL PART NUMBER

PART NUMBER VENDOR’S
CODE PART NUMBER VENDOR
CODE

6713-050 ZZZZZZ 6713-0180 VF1958

6713-0630 VF1958

6713-0500 ZZZZZZ 6713-0520 VNP

6713-0520 ZZZZZZ 6713-0500 VNP

6713-0521 ZZZZZZ 6713-0521R VNP

6713-060R ZZZZZZ 6713-060 VNP

6713-0611R ZZZZZZ 6713-0611 VNP

6713-0712 ZZZZZZ 6713 VF1958

6713-0713 ZZZZZZ 6713-0712 VF1958

6713-0720 ZZZZZZ 6713-0730 VNP

6713-0721 ZZZZZZ 6713-0721R VNP

6713-0730 ZZZZZZ 6713-0720 VNP

6713-0731 ZZZZZZ 6763-0962 VF1958

6713-0800 ZZZZZZ 6713-0810 VNP

6713-080R ZZZZZZ 6713-080 VF1958

6713-0810 ZZZZZZ 6713-0800 VNP

6713-108 ZZZZZZ 6764-118 VF1958

6713-111R ZZZZZZ 6713-111 VF1958

6713-113 ZZZZZZ 6713-113A VF1958

6713-113A ZZZZZZ 6713-113 VF1958

6713-127 ZZZZZZ 6713-127A VF1958

6713-127A ZZZZZZ 6713-127 VF1958

6713-129 ZZZZZZ 6713-129A VF1958

6713-129A ZZZZZZ 6713-129 VF1958

6713-140 ZZZZZZ 6713-0560 VF1958

36-11-51 Page 10036

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

OPTIONAL OPTIONAL PART NUMBER

PART NUMBER VENDOR’S
CODE PART NUMBER VENDOR
CODE

6713-146 ZZZZZZ 6713-0590 VF1958

6713-14R ZZZZZZ 6713-14 VF1958

6713-17 ZZZZZZ 6713-17A VF1958

6713-17A ZZZZZZ 6713-17 VF1958

6717-65 ZZZZZZ 60100-144 VNP

6730-15R ZZZZZZ 6730-15 VF1958

6763-0962 ZZZZZZ 6763-0962R VNP

6X1ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 6X1SL1013A VF0229

S602-6X1 VF1958

79-4X1-6ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 79-4X1-6SL1013A VF0229

S602-79-4X1-6 VF1958

7X1ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 7X1SL1013A VF0229

S602-7X1 VF1958

852-31N10 ZZZZZZ S636-002 VF1958

8533-0ES10-05PN ZZZZZZ S635-014 VF1958

8X1ZC70THT ZZZZZZ 8X1SL1013A VF0229

S602-8X1 VF1958

983-0SE10-05PN ZZZZZZ S635-014 VF1958

CP520S521 ZZZZZZ S4165 VF1958

EC5465 ZZZZZZ 6714-114 VF1958

S105DN0400B1 ZZZZZZ ABG22225 VF1958

36-11-51 Page 10037

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 10038

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

DETAILED PARTS LIST

36-11-51 Page 10039

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

H.P. Regulating Valve

Figure 01/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-093-A01

36-11-51 Page 10040

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

01 – 001C 6713C010000 *** DELETED ***

– 001D 6713D010000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

NP
POST SB 6713-36-04

– 001E 6713D020000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

NP
POST LS 6713-36-02

– 001F 6713D040000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

NP
POST SB 6713-36-06

– 001G 6713D040000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

NP
AMDT A
POST SB 6713-36-07

– 001H 6713D050000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

NP
POST SB 6713-36-08

– 001I 6713D050000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

NP
AMDT A
POST SB 6713-36-08

– 001J 6713D060000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

NP
POST SB 6713-36-09

– 001K 6713D060000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

NP
AMDT A
POST SB 6713-36-09

– 001L 6713D070000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

POST SB 6713-36-10

– 001M 6713D070000 VALVE, H.P., REGULATING RF

AMDT A
POST SB 6713-36-10

012A 6713-82 . PLATE, LOCKING 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10041

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

01 ATTACHING PARTS

014A 22222CF030016E . SCREW 1

USED WITH 02A-001D/001F

014B 22222CF030014E . SCREW 1

USED WITH 02A-001E/001G

***

015A 23111CC030 . WASHER 1

016A 6713-81 . SPACER 1

USED WITH 02A-001D/001F

016B 23111CC030 . WASHER 2

USED WITH 02A-001E/001G

020B 6713-79 . UNION 1

USED WITH 02A-001D/001F/001H

– 020C S4147 . UNION 1

USED WITH 02A-001E/001G/001I

022A SR1150-10332 . CAP, PROTECTIVE 1

(VF9108)

024A 6713-77 . SCREW, BANJO 1

USED WITH 02A-001D/001F/001H

026A 6713-0340 . TUBE, BANJO 1

USED WITH 02A-001D/001F/001H

028A 8X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 4

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-8X1
OPT TO 8X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)
USED WITH 02A-001D/001F/001H

– 030A 3J4 . SEAL 1

(VF0271)
SUPSD BY I-E8-12S

030B I-E8-12S . SEAL 1

(VF0458)
USED WITH 02A-001E/001G/001I
SUPSDS 3J4

040A 23320CA050 . LOCKWIRE AR

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10042

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

01 050B CG0752503458N02 . FILTER, UNION 1

(VF0559)

060A CP520S521 . SEAL, METAL 3

(VU1982)
OPT TO S4165

080A 6713-20 . SCREW, BANJO 1

090A 8X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 2

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-8X1
OPT TO 8X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

100A 6714-0210 . TUBE, BANJO 1

– 105A 6713-87 . NUT DEFGHI 1

105B 6773-63 . CAP, THREADED JK 1

130A 60055-42 . SCREW, KNURLED 1

135A 23320CA080 . LOCKWIRE AR

USED WITH 130A

140A 60055-44 . RING, RETAINING 1

150A S741-220 . CABLE, COMPLETE 1

– 152A S4051 . . RING, ATTACH 2

– 154A S4095 . . PLUG, THREADED 1

– 156A 60055-43 . . TAB, ATTACH 1

– 158A CABLEINOXD1 . . CABLE 1

LENGTH 220 MM

160A 6713-35 . SCREW, BANJO 1

170A 6713-34 . UNION, BANJO 1

180A 8X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 4

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-8X1
OPT TO 8X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

190A 6713-36 . WASHER 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10043

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

01 220A 6714-0200 . TUBE, BANJO 1

223A 6713-0370 . VALVE, OVERPRESSURE, S/A 1DEHI 1

SEE FIG 05-001A FOR DET

– 223B 6713-0740 . VALVE, OVERPRESSURE, S/A 1FG 1

NP
SEE FIG 05-001B FOR DET

223C 6773-01020 . VALVE, OVERPRESSURE, S/A 1JK 1

SEE FIG 05-001C FOR DET

226A 6713-96 . SEAL, METAL 1

228A 6713-70 . PROBE, EDGE, TRAILING 1

230D 6713-0500 . REGULATOR, S/A 1DE 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0520 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE FIG 02A-001D FOR DET

– 230E 6713-0520 . REGULATOR, S/A 1DE 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0500 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE FIG 02A-001E FOR DET

– 230F 6713-0720 . REGULATOR, S/A 1FGHI 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0730 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE FIG 02A-001F FOR DET

– 230G 6713-0730 . REGULATOR, S/A 1FGHI 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0720 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE FIG 02A-001G FOR DET

– 230H 6713-0800 . REGULATOR, S/A 1JK 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0810 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE FIG 02A-001H FOR DET

– 230I 6713-0810 . REGULATOR, S/A 1JK 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0800 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE FIG 02A-001I FOR DET

240A 22223CF050012E . SCREW 2

250A 6713-54 . SCREW, SPECIAL 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10044

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

01 270A 23111CC050 . WASHER 1

280A 4X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-4X1
OPT TO 4X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

290A 6X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-6X1
OPT TO 6X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

300A 6714-36 . PLATE, LOCKING 1

ATTACHING PARTS

310A 22296CF030006E . SCREW 2

***

– 330C 6713-0480 . ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A 1D 1

NP
SEE FIG 03-001C FOR DET

– 330D 6713-0620 . ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A 1E 1

NP
SEE FIG. 03-001D FOR DET

– 330E 6713-0710 . ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A 1FJH 1

NP
SEE FIG. 03-001E FOR DET
PRE SB 6713-36-10

– 330F 6713-0760 . ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A 1GIK 1

NP
SEE FIG. 03-001F FOR DET
PRE SB 6713-36-10

– 330G 6713-0733 . ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A 1FJHL 1

NP
SEE FIG 03A-001A FOR DET
POST SB 6713-36-10

– 330H 6713-0900 . ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A 1GIKM 1

NP
SEE FIG 03A-001B FOR DET
POST SB 6713-36-10

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10045

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

01 340A SR1400-31965 . CAP, PROTECTIVE 2

(VF9108)

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10046

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 10047

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Regulator S/A
Figure 02A/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-094-A01

36-11-51 Page 10048

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

02A – 001D 6713-0500 REGULATOR, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-230D FOR NHA

– 001E 6713-0520 REGULATOR, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-230E FOR NHA

– 001F 6713-0720 REGULATOR, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-230F FOR NHA

– 001G 6713-0730 REGULATOR, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-230G FOR NHA

– 001H 6713-0800 REGULATOR, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-230H FOR NHA

– 001I 6713-0810 REGULATOR, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-230I FOR NHA

– 010C 6713-0410 . COVER 1DFH 1

010D 6713-136 . COVER 1EGI 1

010E 6753-100 . COVER 1GI 1

ATTACHING PARTS

020A 22223CF030010E . SCREW 4

030A 22223CF030008E . SCREW 2

040A 23111CC030 . WASHER 6

***

050A 35X1-5ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1DE 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-35X1-5
OPT TO 35X1-5SL1013A MADE
BY (VF0229)

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10049

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

02A 050B 38X1-5ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1FGHI 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-38X1-5
OPT TO 38X1-5SL1013A MADE
BY (VF0229)

060A 4X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-4X1
OPT TO 4X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

070B EC5465 . BELLOWS 1DE 1

OPT TO 6714-114

070C 6774-0620 . DIAPHRAGM, S/A 1FGHI 1

080B 6714-0420 . GUIDE 1DE 1

081A 6713-122 . SHIM 1FGHI AR

0,10 MM THICK

082A 6713-121 . SHIM 1FGHI 1

0,5 MM THICK

085A 6714-120 . GUIDE, CENTERING 1DE 1

086A S100-837 . SPRING 1FGHI 1

090B S100-850 . SPRING 1DE 1

090C S100-864 . SPRING 1FGHI 1

095A 6753-78 . GUIDE, SPRING 1FGHI 1

096A 6753-79 . WASHER 1FGHI 1

– 120B 6714-119 . NUT, ADJUSTING 1DE 1

120C 6753-77 . NUT, ADJUSTING 1FGHI 1

– 130B 6713-0430 . SCREW, ADJUSTING 1DE 1

130C 6794-34 . SCREW, ADJUSTING 1FGHI 1

ATTACHING PARTS

140A 22291CF030006E . SCREW 3

***

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10050

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

02A 150B 8X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-8X1
OPT TO 8X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

– 160B 6713-130 . CLAPPER 1DE 1

160C 6753-101 . CLAPPER 1FGHI 1

– 163A 6713-129 . RING, SEALING 2

NP
OPT TO 6713-129A
SEMI-WORKED ITEM

163B 6713-129A . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 2

OPT TO 6713-129

167A 6713-95 . STOP 1

175A S100-847 . SPRING 1

180D 6713-125 . PLUG, THREADED 1

190B 6713-126 . SHIM AR

0,2 MM THICK

210C S100-848 . SPRING 1

– 220C 6713-124 . CLAPPER 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6713-124A

220D 6713-124A . CLAPPER 1

SUPSDS 6713-124

– 223A 6713-127 . RING, SEALING 2

NP
OPT TO 6713-127A
SEMI-WORKED ITEM

223B 6713-127A . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 2

OPT TO 6713-127

227A 6713-128 . RING, THREADED 1

260A 15X1-5ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-15X1-5
OPT TO 15X1-5SL1013A MADE
BY (VF0229)
– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10051

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

02A 270C 6713-106 . SUPPORT 1

280B 7X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-7X1
OPT TO 7X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

320A 10X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-10X1
OPT TO 10X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

330B 6753-42 . PLUG, THREADED 1DFH 1

370C 6713-80 . PLUG 1DFH 1

380A 10X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1DFH 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-10X1
OPT TO 10X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

390A 6X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1DFH 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-6X1
OPT TO 6X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

400E 6713-132 . COVER 1EGI 1

– 400F 6713-0580 . COVER, S/A 1DFH 1

NP

ATTACHING PARTS

410A 22223CF030010E . SCREW 5

430A 23111CC030 . WASHER 5

***

– 432A 6713-0240 . . COVER 1

– 435A 6713-101 . . STOP 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10052

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

02A 440B 38X1-5ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-38X1-5
OPT TO 38X1-5SL1013A MADE
BY (VF0229)

450A 4X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-4X1
OPT TO 4X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

– 460C 6714-0370 . DIAPHRAGM, S/A 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6774-0620

– 460D 6753-0950 . DIAPHRAGM, S/A 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6774-0620

460E 6774-0620 . DIAPHRAGM, S/A 1

SUPSDS 6714-0370
SUPSDS 6753-0950

470B 6713-122 . SHIM AR

0,10 MM THICK
SEL FROM 470B TO 480B

480B 6713-121 . SHIM 1

0,50 MM THICK
SEL FROM 470B TO 480B

485A 6713-118 . WASHER, STOP 1DE 1

510B S100-845 . SPRING 1

520A 6714-22 . RING, THREADED 1

– 530C 6713-0440 . BODY, VALVE 1DE 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6713-0600

– 530D 6713-0600 . BODY, VALVE 1DE 1

SUPSDS 6713-0440

530E 6794-33 . BODY, VALVE 1FG 1

530F 6794-37 . BODY, VALVE 1HI 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10053

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

02A 540C 6713-108 . CLAPPER 1

NP
OPT TO 6764-118

545A S100-846 . SPRING 1

550A 10X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-10X1
OPT TO 10X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)

560A 6714-15 . PLUG 1

570A S100-631 . SPRING 1

580B S580A04000 . BALL 1

590A 12-3X1-5ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO S602-12-3X1-5
OPT TO 12-3X1-5SL1013A MADE
BY (VF0229)

600B 6713-109 . SEAT, VALVE 1

605A 6713-112 . SHIM AR

0,10 MM THICK

610A 6713-0151 . BODY, REGULATOR, S/A 1D 1

OPT TO 6713-0151R MADE BY (VNP)
SEE REPAIR No. 11

– 610B 6713-0521 . BODY, REGULATOR, S/A 1E 1

OPT TO 6713-0521R MADE BY (VNP)
SEE REPAIR No. 11

– 610C 6713-0721 . BODY, REGULATOR, S/A 1FH 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0721R MADE BY (VNP)
ITEM 02A-610A MODIFIED
SEE REPAIR No. 11

610D 6763-0962 . BODY, REGULATOR, S/A 1GI 1

OPT TO 6763-0962R MADE BY (VNP)
ITEM 02A-610B MODIFIED
SEE REPAIR No. 11

610E 6713-0731 . BODY, REGULATOR, S/A 1I 1

OPT TO 6763-0962

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10054

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

02A 620A 01320030045 . . INSERT, THREADED 15

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-004

630A 01320050075 . . INSERT, THREADED 2

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-013

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10055

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Pneumatic Actuator S/A

Figure 3/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-095-A01

36-11-51 Page 10056

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3 – 001C 6713-0480 ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-330C FOR NHA

– 001D 6713-0620 ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-330D FOR NHA

– 001E 6713-0710 ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-330E FOR NHA

– 001F 6713-0760 ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-330F FOR NHA

– 010A 6713-0130 . COVER, S/A 1

NP

ATTACHING PARTS

020A 22296CF030006E . SCREW 2

030A 23320CA050 . LOCKWIRE AR

– 040B 23111CC030 . WASHER 2

SUPSD BY 23111DB030

040C 23111DB030 . WASHER 2

SUPSDS 23111CC030

***

050A 6713-45 . . COVER 1

060A S1242 . . PLATE, NAME 1

NP

ATTACHING PARTS

– 070B 21215DB1602 . . RIVET 4

MADE FROM 21215DB1606
SUPSD BY 21215DB1604

070C 21215DB1604 . . RIVET 4

SUPSDS 21215DB1602

***

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10057

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3 080A 6713-10 . CAM, CONTROL 1

ATTACHING PARTS

090A 22541N040 . NUT 1

***

100B 6713-146 . COVER 1

OPT TO 6713-0590

ATTACHING PARTS

110A 22208CF040010E . SCREW 8

– 120A 23111DB040 . WASHER 8

SUPSD BY 23111CC040

120B 23111CC040 . WASHER 8

SUPSDS 23111DB040

***

130A 79-4X1-6ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO 79-4X1-6SL1013A MADE
BY (VF0229)
OPT TO S602-79-4X1-6

140A 4X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO 4X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)
OPT TO S602-4X1

– 150A S100-632 . SPRING 1

NP
SUPSD BY S100-911

150B S100-911 . SPRING 1

SUPSDS S100-632

160A 6730-15 . CLEVIS 1

– 160B 6730-15R . CLEVIS 1

NP
OPT TO 6730-15
SEE REPAIR No. 7
USED WITH 180B/190B/200B/210B

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10058

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3 ATTACHING PARTS

170B 22296CF040008E . SCREW 4

***

180A 6713-14 . ROD, ADJUSTING 1

– 180B 6713-14R . ROD, ADJUSTING 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-14
SEE REPAIR No. 7
USED WITH 160B/190B/200B/210B

ATTACHING PARTS

190A 6713-11 . PIN 1

– 190B 6764-187 . PIN 1

USED WITH 160B/180B/200B/210B
OVERSIZE

200A 6740-43 . WASHER, LOCK 1

– 200B 6764-29 . WASHER, LOCK 1

USED WITH 160B/180B/190B/210B
OVERSIZE

210A 23203CC0023 . RING, RETAINING 1

– 210B 23203CC0032 . RING, RETAINING 1

USED WITH 160B/180B/190B/200B
OVERSIZE

***

220A 6713-050 . PISTON, S/A 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0180
OPT TO 6713-0630

225A 01320040006 . . INSERT, THREADED 4

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-009

230A 20X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO 20X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)
OPT TO S602-20X1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10059

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3 – 240B 6714-0470 . BODY, S/A 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6713-0711

– 240C 6713-0711 . BODY, EQUIPPED, S/A 1

NP
SUPSDS 6713-0470

241A 6714-0350 . . BODY, S/A 240C 1

242A 01320040006 . . . INSERT, THREADED 11

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-009
USED WITH 240B/240C

244A 01320050625 . . . INSERT, THREADED 1

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-012
USED WITH 240B/240C

246A 01320060009 . . . INSERT, THREADED 2

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-016
USED WITH 240B/240C

248A I-E8-12S . . SEAL 240C 1

249A S3518 . . PLUG 240C 1

– 250B 6713-0450 . VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A 1C 1

NP
SEE FIG. 04-001B FOR DET

– 250C 6713-0610 . VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A 1D 1

NP
SEE FIG. 04-001C FOR DET

– 250D 6713-0700 . VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A 1E 1

NP
SEE FIG. 04-001D FOR DET

– 250E 6713-0750 . VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A 1F 1

NP
SEE FIG. 04A-001E FOR DET

ATTACHING PARTS

– 260B 22125CF060018E . SCREW 2

SUPSD BY 22223CF060018E

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10060

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3 260C 22223CF060018E . SCREW 2

SUPSDS 22125CF060018E

– 270A 23111DB060 . WASHER 2

SUPSD BY 23111CC060

270B 23111CC060 . WASHER 2

SUPSDS 23111DB060

280A 22541P060 . NUT 2

– 290A 22208CF060012E . SCREW 2

290B 22225CF060012E . SCREW 240C 1

290C 22224CF060012E . SCREW 240C 1

***

293A S3348-05 . SHIM AR

0,05 MM THICK
SEL FROM 293 TO 295

295A S3348-2 . SHIM AR

0,2 MM THICK
SEL FROM 293 TO 295

300A 6713-30 . SEAL 1

310A 6713-0100 . ROD, S/A 1

– 310B 6713-0100R . ROD, S/A 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0100
SEE REPAIR No. 7
USED WITH 320B/330B/340B/350B

315A 01320060009 . . INSERT, THREADED 1

(VF1699)

320A 6713-080 . LEVER 1

– 320B 6713-080R . LEVER 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-080
SEE REPAIR No. 7
USED WITH 310B/330B/340B/350B

ATTACHING PARTS

330A 6713-11 . PIN 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10061

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3 – 330B 6764-187 . PIN 1

USED WITH 310B/320B/340B/350B
OVERSIZE

340A 6740-43 . WASHER, LOCK 1

– 340B 6764-29 . WASHER, LOCK 1

USED WITH 310B/320B/330B/350B
OVERSIZE

350A 23203CC0023 . RING, RETAINING 1

– 350B 23203CC0032 . RING, RETAINING 1

USED WITH 310B/320B/330B/340B
OVERSIZE

360B 22125CF040014E . SCREW 1

***

370A 6713-18 . RING, GUIDE 1

380A 6730-23 . RING, GUIDE 1

390B 6753-18 . RING, FLEXIBLE 1

– 400A 6713-17 . RING, PISTON 2

NP
OPT TO 6713-17A
SEMI-WORKED ITEM

400B 6713-17A . RING, PISTON, SPLIT 2

OPT TO 6713-17

– 410A 6713-16 . RING, EXPANDER 1

NP
SUPSD BY MT118

410B MT118 . RING, EXPANDER 1

SEMI-WORKED ITEM
SUPSDS 6713-16

420A 8533-0ES10-05PN . CONNECTOR 1

(VF0225)
OPT TO S635-014

– 420B 983-0SE10-05PN . CONNECTOR 1

(VF1983)
OPT TO S635-014

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10062

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3 ATTACHING PARTS

430A 22293CF030006E . SCREW 2

440A 22296CF030006E . SCREW 2

***

450A 70778 . CAP, PROTECTIVE 1

(VF0225)
USED WITH 420A

– 450B 104-0001-09 . CAP, PROTECTIVE 1

(VF1983)
USED WITH 420B

460A 8533-1000 . . PIN, CONTACT 420A 5

(VF0225)

– 460B 097-0015-20 . . PIN, CONTACT 420B 5

(VF1983)

470A KAPTON92 *** DELETED ***

480C 852-31N10 . NUT, BACK 1

(VF0225)
OPT TO S636-002

– 480D 38007-10-3014 . NUT, BACK 1

(VF1983)
OPT TO S636-002

490A 6713-060 . MICROSWITCH, S/A 1CD 2

NP
SUPSD BY 6713-0230

– 490B 6713-060 . MICROSWITCH, S/A 1EF 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6713-0230

490C 6713-0230 . MICROSWITCH, S/A 1CD 2

SUPSD BY 6713-060

490D 6713-0230 . MICROSWITCH, S/A 1EF 1

SUPSDS 6713-060

– 490E 6713-060R . MICROSWITCH, S/A 2

NP
OPT TO 6713-060 MADE BY (VNP)
OPT TO 6713-060 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE REPAIR No. 6
– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10063

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3 ATTACHING PARTS

500B 22222CC030018 . SCREW 1CD 4

500C 22222CC030018 . SCREW 1EF 2

520B 23111CC030 . WASHER 1CD 4

520C 6753-119 . PLATE 1EF 1

***

– 523A 60055-18 . . PIN 1

SEE REPAIR No. 6

– 525A 60055-20 . . WASHER 2

SEE REPAIR No. 6

– 527A 6717-65 . . LEVER 1

OPT TO 60100-144 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE REPAIR No. 6

– 529A S100-637 . . SPRING 1

SEE REPAIR No. 6

530A E22-19NIAGBLANC . WIRE AR

(VF1868)
USEFUL LENGTH REF TO FIG. 7011

– 535A E22-19NIAGBLEU . WIRE AR

(VF1868)
SEE REPAIR No. 6

537A E22-19NIAGJAUNE . WIRE AR

(VF1868)
SEE REPAIR No. 6

540A TFE-CODE12 . SLEEVE AR

(VF6220)
USEFUL LENGTH: 15 MM

545A TFE-CODE8 . SLEEVE AR

(VF6220)
USEFUL LENGTH: 20 MM

550A 323030 . SPLICE 1CD 1

(VF0286)

550B 323030 . SPLICE 1EF 2

(VF0286)

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10064

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3 560B 6713-0510 . CASING, S/A 1CD 1

560C 6713-0713 . CASING, S/A 1EF 1

OPT TO 6713-0712

560D 6713-0712 . CASING, S/A 1EF 1

OPT TO 6713

565A KNCML3X0-50 . . INSERT, THREADED 560CD 2

(VF8995)

ATTACHING PARTS

570A 22256CF040008E . SCREW 3

***

575A 01320030045 . . INSERT, THREADED 4

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-004

580B 6713-114 . RING 1

585A 14X1-5ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO 14X1-5SL1013A MADE
BY (VF0229)
OPT TO S602-14X1-5

– 600B 6713-113 . RING, SEALING 2

NP
OPT TO 6713-113A
SEMI-WORKED ITEM

600C 6713-113A . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 2

OPT TO 6713-113

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10065

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Pneumatic Actuator S/A

Figure 3A/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-096-A01

36-11-51 Page 10066

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3A – 001A 6713-0733 ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A RF

SEE FIG. 01-330G FOR NHA
POST SB 6713-36-10

– 001B 6713-0900 ACTUATOR, PNEUMATIC, S/A RF

SEE FIG. 01-330H FOR NHA
POST SB 6713-36-10

– 010A 6713-0130 . COVER, S/A 1

ATTACHING PARTS

020A 22296CF030006E . SCREW 2

(VF0111)

030A 23320CA050 . LOCKWIRE AR

(VF0111)

– 040B 23111CC030 . WASHER 2

(VF0111)
SUPSD BY 23111DB030

040C 23111DB030 . WASHER 2

(VF0111)
SUPSDS 23111CC030

***

050B 6773-26 . . COVER 1

060B S1242A . . PLATE, NAME 1

ATTACHING PARTS

– 070B 21215DB1602 . . RIVET 4

(VF0111)
MADE FROM 21215DB1606
SUPSD BY 21215DB1604

070C 21215DB1604 . . RIVET 4

(VF0111)
SUPSDS 21215DB1602

***

080B 6713-162 . CAM, CONTROL 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10067

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3A ATTACHING PARTS

090A 22541N040 . NUT 1

(VF0111)

***

100B 6713-146 . COVER 1

OPT TO 6713-0590

ATTACHING PARTS

110A 22208CF040010E . SCREW 8

(VF0111)

– 120A 23111DB040 . WASHER 8

(VF0111)
SUPSD BY 23111CC040

120B 23111CC040 . WASHER 8

(VF0111)
SUPSDS 23111DB040

***

130A 79-4X1-6ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO 79-4X1-6SL1013A MADE
BY (VF0229)
OPT TO S602-79-4X1-6

140A 4X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO 4X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)
OPT TO S602-4X1

– 150A S100-632 . SPRING 1

SUPSD BY S100-911

150B S100-911 . SPRING 1

SUPSDS S100-632

160A 6730-15 . CLEVIS 1

– 160B 6730-15R . CLEVIS 1

OPT TO 6730-15
SEE REPAIR No. 7
USED WITH 180B/190B/200B/210B

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10068

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3A ATTACHING PARTS

170B 22296CF040008E . SCREW 4

(VF0111)

***

180A 6713-14 . ROD, ADJUSTING 1

– 180B 6713-14R . ROD, ADJUSTING 1

OPT TO 6713-14
SEE REPAIR No. 7
USED WITH 160B/190B/200B/210B

ATTACHING PARTS

190A 6713-11 . PIN 1

– 190B 6764-187 . PIN 1

USED WITH 160B/180B/200B/210B
OVERSIZE

200A 6740-43 . WASHER, LOCK 1

– 200B 6764-29 . WASHER, LOCK 1

USED WITH 160B/180B/190B/210B
OVERSIZE

210A 23203CC0023 . RING, RETAINING 1

(VF0111)

– 210B 23203CC0032 . RING, RETAINING 1

(VF0111)
USED WITH 160B/180B/190B/200B
OVERSIZE

***

220A 6713-050 . PISTON, S/A 1

OPT TO 6713-0180
OPT TO 6713-0630

225A 01320040006 . . INSERT, THREADED 4

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-009

230A 20X1ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO 20X1SL1013A MADE BY
(VF0229)
OPT TO S602-20X1
– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10069

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3A – 240B 6714-0470 . BODY, S/A 1

SUPSD BY 6713-0711

– 240C 6713-0711 . BODY, EQUIPPED, S/A 1

SUPSDS 6713-0470

241A 6714-0350 . . BODY, S/A 240C 1

242A 01320040006 . . . INSERT, THREADED 11

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-009
USED WITH 240B/240C

244A 01320050625 . . . INSERT, THREADED 1

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-012
USED WITH 240B/240C

246A 01320060009 . . . INSERT, THREADED 2

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-016
USED WITH 240B/240C

248A I-E8-125 . . SEAL 240C 1

249A S3518 . . PLUG 240C 1

– 250D 6713-0700 . VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A 1A 1

SEE FIG. 04-001D FOR DET

250E 6713-0750 . VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A 1B 1

SEE FIG. 04A-001E FOR DET

ATTACHING PARTS

– 260B 22125CF060018E . SCREW 2

(VF0111)
SUPSD BY 22223CF060018E

260C 22223CF060018E . SCREW 2

(VF0111)
SUPSDS 22125CF060018E

– 270A 23111DB060 . WASHER 2

(VF0111)
SUPSD BY 23111DD060

270B 23111DD060 . WASHER 2

(VF0111)
SUPSDS 23111DB060

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10070

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3A 280A 22541P060 . NUT 2

(VF0111)

– 290A 22208CF060012E . SCREW 2

(VF0111)

290B 22225CF060012E . SCREW 240C 1

(VF0111)

290C 22224CF060012E . SCREW 240C 1

(VF0111)

***

293A S3348-05 . SHIM AR

0,05 MM THICK
SEL FROM 293 TO 295

295A S3348-2 . SHIM AR

0,2 MM THICK
SEL FROM 293 TO 295

300A 6713-30 . SEAL 1

310A 6713-0100 . ROD, S/A 1

– 310B 6713-0100R . ROD, S/A 1

OPT TO 6713-0100
SEE REPAIR No. 7
USED WITH 320B/330B/340B/350B

315A 01320060009 . . INSERT, THREADED 1

(VF1699)

320A 6713-080 . LEVER 1

– 320B 6713-080R . LEVER 1

OPT TO 6713-080
SEE REPAIR No. 7
USED WITH 310B/330B/340B/350B

ATTACHING PARTS

330A 6713-11 . PIN 1

– 330B 6764-187 . PIN 1

USED WITH 310B/320B/340B/350B
OVERSIZE

340A 6740-43 . WASHER, LOCK 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10071

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3A – 340B 6764-29 . WASHER, LOCK 1

USED WITH 310B/320B/330B/350B
OVERSIZE

350A 23203CC0023 . RING, RETAINING 1

(VF0111)

– 350B 23203CC0032 . RING, RETAINING 1

(VF0111)
USED WITH 310B/320B/330B/340B
OVERSIZE

360B 22125CF040014E . SCREW 1

(VF0111)

***

370A 6713-18 . RING, GUIDE 1

380A 6730-23 . RING, GUIDE 1

390B 6753-18 . RING, FLEXIBLE 1

– 400A 6713-17 . RING, PISTON 2

OPT TO 6713-17A
SEMI-WORKED ITEM

400B 6713-17A . RING, PISTON, SPLIT 2

OPT TO 6713-17

– 410A 6713-16 . RING, EXPANDER 1

SUPSD BY MT118

410B MT118 . RING, EXPANDER 1

SEMI-WORKED ITEM
SUPSDS 6713-16

420A 8533-0ES10-05PN . CONNECTOR 1

(VF0225)
OPT TO S635-014

– 420B 983-0SE10-05PN . CONNECTOR 1

(VF1983)
OPT TO S635-014

ATTACHING PARTS

430A 22293CF030006E . SCREW 2

(VF0111)

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10072

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3A 440A 22296CF030006E . SCREW 2

(VF0111)

***

– 445A 23320CA050 . LOCKWIRE AR

(VF0111)

450A 70778 . CAP, PROTECTIVE 1

(VF0225)
USED WITH 420A

– 450B 104-0001-09 . CAP, PROTECTIVE 1

(VF1983)
USED WITH 420B

460A 8533-1000 . . PIN, CONTACT 420A 5

(VF0225)

– 460B 097-0015-20 . . PIN, CONTACT 420B 5

(VF1983)

470A KAPTON92 *** DELETED ***

480C 852-31N10 . NUT, BACK 1

(VF0225)
OPT TO S636-002

– 480D 38007-10-3014 . NUT, BACK 1

(VF1983)
OPT TO S636-002

– 490F S853 . MICROSWITCH, S/A 1

ATTACHING PARTS

500D 22223CF030008E . SCREW 2

(VF0111)

510A 23111CC030 . WASHER 2

(VF0111)

***

511A 6740-97 . . PLATE, STOP 1

512A JS-217 . . BLATE, MICROSWITCH 1

513A 16HM4 . . MICROSWITCH 1

515A 6713-160 . . BASE, MICROSWITCH 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10073

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3A ATTACHING PARTS

517A 22291CF020010E . . SCREW 2

(VF0111)

518A 22431CF020E . . NUT 2

(VF0111)

***

– 523A 60055-18 . . PIN 1

SEE REPAIR No. 6

– 525A 60055-20 . . WASHER 2

SEE REPAIR No. 6

– 527A 6717-65 . . LEVER 1

OPT TO 60100-144 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE REPAIR No. 6

– 529A S100-637 . . SPRING 1

SEE REPAIR No. 6

530A E22-19NIAGBLANC . WIRE AR

(VF1868)
USEFUL LENGTH REF. TO FIG. 7011

531A LN9490BK04 . CLAMP 1

ATTACHING PARTS

532A 22223CF030008E . SCREW 1

(VF0111)

533A 23111CC030 . WASHER 1

(VF0111)

***

– 535A E22-19NIAGBLEU . WIRE AR

(VF1868)
SEE REPAIR No. 6

– 537A E22-19NIAGJAUNE . WIRE AR

(VF1868)
SEE REPAIR No. 6

– 539A L0H103 . CORD, LACING AR

(VF3341)

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10074

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

3A 540A TFE-CODE12 . SLEEVE AR

(VF6220)
USEFUL LENGTH: 15 MM

545A TFE-CODE8 . SLEEVE AR

(VF6220)
USEFUL LENGTH: 20 MM

550B 323030 . SPLICE 2

(VF0286)

560E 6713-0820 . CASING, S/A 1

565A KNCML3X0-50 . . INSERT, THREADED 2

(VF8995)

ATTACHING PARTS

570B 22256CF040012E . SCREW 3

(VF0111)

***

573A 6713-159 . PLATE, INSULATING 1

575A 01320030045 . . INSERT, THREADED 4

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-004

580B 6713-114 . RING 1

585A 14X1-5ZC70THT . PACKING, PREFORMED 1

(VF0235)
OPT TO 14X1-5SL1013A MADE
BY (VF0229)
OPT TO S602-14X1-5

– 600B 6713-113 . RING, SEALING 2

NP
OPT TO 6713-113A
SEMI-WORKED ITEM

600C 6713-113A . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 2

OPT TO 6713-113

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10075

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Butterfly Valve S/A

Figure 04/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-097-A01

36-11-51 Page 10076

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

04 – 001B 6713-0450 VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 03-250B FOR NHA

– 001C 6713-0610 VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 03-250C FOR NHA

– 001D 6713-0700 VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 03-250D FOR NHA
SEE FIG. 03A-250D FOR NHA

010B 6713-0570 . CONTROL, MANUAL, S/A 1

– 015A 01320040004 . . INSERT, THREADED 1

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-007

– 020D 22222CF040016E . SCREW 1

SUPSD BY 22222CF040014E

020E 22222CF040014E . SCREW 1

SUPSDS 22222CF040016E

030B 6713-140 . RING, THREADED 1

OPT TO 6713-0560

040A 6740-15 . WASHER, LOCK 1

050A 6740-9 . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 2

052A 6773-14 . RING, RETAINING 1D 1

053A 6773-7 . RING, STOP 1D 1

055A S100-895 . SPRING 1D 1

057A 6713-149 . WASHER 1D 1

059A 6713-148 . RING, THREADED 1D 1

060A 6740-14 . RING, THREADED 1

070B 6713-111 . SHAFT 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10077

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

04 – 070C 6713-111R . SHAFT 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-111
SEE REPAIR No. 11

– 080C 6713-0460 . BUTTERFLY, S/A 1BC 1

NP

– 080D 6713-0702 . BUTTERFLY, S/A 1D 1

NP

ATTACHING PARTS

090A 22125CM050020 . SCREW 1

100A 23350CC050 . WASHER, LOCK 1

***

– 110A 6729-21 . . PLATE, LOCKING 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6753-10

110B 6753-10 . . PLATE, LOCKING 1

SUPSDS 6729-21

ATTACHING PARTS

– 120A 21215CA1607 . . RIVET 1

NP
SUPSD BY 21215CA1606

120B 21215CA1606 . . RIVET 1

SUPSDS 21215CA1607

***

130B 6713-98 . . RING 1

SEMI-WORKED ITEM

140C 6713-99 . . RING, SEALING 1

150B 6713-100 . . RING, SEALING 1

155A S105DN0400B1 . . RING, SEALING 80D 1

OPT TO ABG22225

160A 6740-48 . . BUTTERFLY 1

170A 6740-5 . RING 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10078

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

04 180B S580A03000 . BALL 20

190A 6740-4 . RING 1

200A 6740-8 . SHIM AR

0,10 MM THICK

210A 6740-9 . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 2

220A 6740-15 . WASHER, LOCK 1

– 230A 6740-19 . WASHER 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6740-19A

230B 6740-19A . WASHER 1

SUPSDS 6740-19

240C S550-11 . NEEDLE 35

250A 6740-21 . RING, OUTER 1

– 260A 6740-17 . WASHER 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6740-17A

260B 6740-17A . WASHER 1

SUPSDS 6740-17

270A 6740-22 . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 1

275A 6713-116 . STOP 1

– 280A 6740-18 . WASHER 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6740-18A

280B 6740-18A . WASHER 1

SUPSDS 6740-18

290A 6740-24 . RING, INNER 1

300B S550-11 . NEEDLE 35

310A 6740-21 . RING, OUTER 1

– 320A 6740-18 . WASHER 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6740-18A

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10079

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

04 320B 6740-18A . WASHER 1

SUPSDS 6740-18

330A 6740-23 . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 1

– 340A 6713-011 . BODY, VALVE 1BD 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6713-0701

– 340B 6713-0611 . BODY, VALVE 1CD 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6713-0701

– 340C 6713-0701 . BODY, VALVE 1

SUPSDS 6713-011
SUPSDS 6713-0611

– 340D 6713-011R . BODY, VALVE 1BD 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-011 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE REPAIR No. 3

– 340E 6713-0611R . BODY, VALVE 1CD 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0611 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE REPAIR No. 3

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10080

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

This page intentionally left blank.

36-11-51 Page 10081

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Butterfly Valve S/A

Figure 04A/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-098-A01

36-11-51 Page 10082

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

04A – 001E 6713-0750 VALVE, BUTTERFLY, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 03-250E FOR NHA
SEE FIG. 03A-250E FOR NHA

010B 6713-0570 . CONTROL, MANUAL, S/A 1

– 015A 01320040004 . . INSERT, THREADED 1

(VF1699)
OPT TO S303-007

– 020D 22222CF040016E . SCREW 1

SUPSD BY 22222CF040014E

020E 22222CF040014E . SCREW 1

SUPSDS 22222CF040016E

030C 6794-12 . RING, THREADED 1

040A 6740-15 . WASHER, LOCK 1

050B 6773-15 . RING, SEALING 1

051A 6773-16 . RING, SEALING 1

060B 6794-12 . RING, THREADED 1

070C 6794-3 . SHAFT 1

– 080D 6713-0702 . BUTTERFLY, S/A 1

NP

ATTACHING PARTS

090A 22125CM050020 . SCREW 1

100A 23350CC050 . WASHER, LOCK 1

***

– 110A 6729-21 . . PLATE, LOCKING 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6753-10

110B 6753-10 . . PLATE, LOCKING 1

SUPSDS 6729-21

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10083

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

04A ATTACHING PARTS

– 120A 21215CA1607 . . RIVET 1

NP
SUPSD BY 21215CA1606

120B 21215CA1606 . . RIVET 1

SUPSDS 21215CA1607

***

130B 6713-98 . . RING 1

SEMI-WORKED ITEM

155A S105DN0400B1 . . RING, SEALING 1

OPT TO ABG22225

160A 6740-48 . . BUTTERFLY 1

210B 6773-15 . RING, SEALING 1

215C 6773-16 . RING, SEALING 1

220A 6740-15 . WASHER, LOCK 1

225A 6773-17 . STOP 1

235A 6773-18 . WASHER, SPRING 1

245A 6794-5 . SPACER 1

255A S102A1300139090 . BEARING, BALL 1

258A 6794-10 . SHIM AR

0,2 MM THICK

259A 6794-9 . SHIM AR

0,05 MM THICK

260C 6794-11 . WASHER 1

270A 6740-22 . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 1

275A 6713-116 . STOP 1

285A 6773-17 . STOP 1

295A 6773-18 . WASHER, SPRING 1

298A 6794-012 . RETAINER, SPRING, WASHER 1

305A S102A1300139090 . BEARING, BALL 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10084

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

04A 313A 6794-6 . RING, LOCKING 1

315A 6794-7 . WASHER, SPRING 1

320C 6794-8 . WASHER 1

330A 6740-23 . RING, SEALING, SPLIT 1

– 340A 6713-011 . BODY, VALVE 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6713-0701

– 340B 6713-0611 . BODY, VALVE 1

NP
SUPSD BY 6713-0701

340C 6713-0701 . BODY, VALVE 1

SUPSDS 6713-011
SUPSDS 6713-0611

– 340D 6713-011R . BODY, VALVE 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-011 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE REPAIR No. 3

– 340E 6713-0611R . BODY, VALVE 1

NP
OPT TO 6713-0611 MADE BY (VNP)
SEE REPAIR No. 3

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10085

May 01/08
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

Overpressure Valve S/A

Figure 5/GRAPHIC 36-11-51-991-099-A01

36-11-51 Page 10086

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

5 – 001A 6713-0370 VALVE, OVERPRESSURE, S/A RF

SEE FIG. 01-223A FOR NHA

– 001B 6713-0740 VALVE, OVERPRESSURE, S/A RF

NP
SEE FIG. 01-223B FOR NHA

– 001C 6713-01020 VALVE, OVERPRESSURE, S/A RF

SEE FIG. 01-223C FOR NHA

– 010A 23203CC0110 . RING, RETAINING 1

NP
SUPSD BY 23202CC0110

010B 23202CC0110 . RING, RETAINING 1

SUPSDS 23203CC0110

020A 6713-84 . GUIDE, CENTERING 1AB 1

020B 6773-01021 . GUIDE, CENTERING 1C 1

030A 6713-85 . SHIM AR

– 040A S100-838 . SPRING 1A 1

040B S100-962 . SPRING 1B 1

050A 6713-88 . GUIDE, CENTERING 1AB 1

050B 6773-61 . AXLE, CENTERING 1C 1

060A 6713-83 . CLAPPER, THREADED 1AB 1

070A 6713-89 . CLAPPER 1AB 1

ATTACHING PARTS

070B 6773-60 . CLAPPER 1C 1

080A 22541P030 . NUT 1

***

090A 6713-0380 . BODY, VALVE 1A 1

– 090B 6713-0741 . BODY, VALVE 1B 1

NP

090C 6773-62 . BODY, VALVE 1C 1

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10087

May 01/08
 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6713D Series

FIG. ITEM PART NUMBER AIRLINE NOMENCLATURE EFFECT UNITS

STOCK 1234567 CODE PER
NUMBER ASSY

5 – 095A 6713-0380R . BODY, VALVE 1A 1

NP
SEE REPAIR No. 5

– ITEM NOT ILLUSTRATED

36-11-51 Page 10088

May 01/08